Capsula XL 2 - New RU2 - A - 02E

To CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE
GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual

How to Use PDF Manual
FCR CAPSULA XL II /
FCR CARBON XL-2 / FCR XL-2
Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation
Search the error code. Installation Specifications
Distinguish between abnormal images. Preparation for Installation
Abnormal image occurs. Installation Procedures (Mechanical)
Gather log data. Installation Procedures (Software Setup)
Installing Optional Items (Anti-Topple Retainer)
Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs Installing Optional Items (Supporter)
Software Control (relationship with DX Console) When Installed in Patient Environment
Electrical Block Diagrams/Short-Circuit Detection Registering the Master CL
Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection check)
I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview
Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance
Unit Locations Preventive Maintenance Programs
Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts:
Image Data Flows 2nd-Year/3rd-Year/4th-Year
Voltage Check Procedures
Image Related Checkpoints Software Related Checkpoints

Sensitivity/Shading Correction
Install/version update software and applications.
Gather log data.
Parts Related Checkpoints
Back up/restore machine shipment control data.
Parts List (INDEX) Back up/restore configuration data.
Machine Maintenance Utility
RU PC-TOOL
MUTL
-1-
To GUIDE PAGE
CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

FCR CAPSULA XL II /
FCR CARBON XL-2 / FCR XL-2
Features of the Client PC Outline of ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations
Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

List of CLIENT PC-TOOL Commands Operation in ON-LINE Mode
Operation in OFF-LINE Mode
Precautions in Using the Client PC

Precautions in Using a Notebook PC without CD-ROM Data Flow of Commands
Drive
UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
Precautions in Setting the “Windows Firewall”
in DX Console READ and WRITE
Precautions in Setting the “Internet Options” Import and Export

in Client PC
Maintenance
Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL

Acquisition of Log Information
Check/Acquisition of History Data
Check/Acquisition of Configuration Data
MUTL
Version Update
-2-
How to Use PDF Manual
Hyperlinks
A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored mark in this manual.
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section.
- Example of Hyperlink -
{MC:3.1_Cover}
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.
-3-
BLANK PAGE
-4-
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY l Target devices of this Service Manual
The target device of this Service Manual (014-247-xxE) is CR-IR 359 with
serial numbers # xxx40001 to 49999 and # xxx70001 or later.
FCR CAPSULA XL II / FCR CARBON XL-2 / FCR XL-2 For CR-IR 359 with serial number # xxx50000 to 70000,
please use CR-IR 359 Service Manual (014-211-xxE).
CR-IR 359
l Software to be used in this device
Service Manual Software "114Y5039004Axx" or "114Y5039004Bxx" is used in this device.
The part number of the software must be confirmed before performing the
software installation and upgrade.
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the

unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),
which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258μC/kg
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2013-2014 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 014-247-02E

1st Edition May 31, 2013
Revised Edition Jan 31, 2014
Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
1. Handling of This Manual 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
n Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.

1.1 About This Manual The notation formats of "warning", "caution", "Instruction", "note", and "reference" are shown
below.
n Scope
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR 359 (# xxx40001 to
WARNING
49999, and # xxx70001 or later). The machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
classification.
n Notation of Unit Symbols CAUTION

For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI) Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the instruction
are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Law, not in is not observed.
the SI, are used in some cases. Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable or
difficult-to-recover trouble).
1.2 Precautions for Handling of This Manual
u INSTRUCTION u
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual. Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, if the
instruction is not observed.
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel
authorized by FUJIFILM Corporation. u NOTE u
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
such as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should
be taken to prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this REFERENCE
manual. Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of

FUJIFILM Corporation: n Indication of Refer To
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of Its format is as indicated below.
this manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit}
personnel.
n Notation in the Manual
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
In this Service Manual, the CR-IR 359 is sometimes denoted simply as the RU (Reader Unit),
technical servicing of the product.
and the DR-ID 300CL as the DX Console.
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to
improvements on the product.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
CR-IR 359 Service Manual 0.1
0.2
n Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled.
CHECK1 This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
" Check/Adjustment Procedures."
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/

Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Name Inspection Calibration
Dosimeter - 
Steel rule (150 mm)  -
Steel rule (300 mm)  -
Digital multimeter  
Calipers  (*) -
* : A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Safety Precautions 0.3
CR-IR 359 Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions ........................................... Safety-1 4. CLASSIFICATION ........................................... Safety-10

1.1 General Precautions ............................................................... Safety-1
5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves ............Safety-11
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation ....................................... Safety-2
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .....................................Safety-11
1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment ........................................ Safety-2
5.2 Further information for IEC60601-1-2 .....................................Safety-11
1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine ...................................... Safety-3
1.5 Notes on Supporter Use.......................................................... Safety-3 6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS ................... Safety-14
1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site
where the Supporter Is Used........................................................Safety-3 7. Cautions on Network ..................................... Safety-15
1.5.2 Precautions in Preventing the Supporter from Toppling................Safety-3
2. Labels ................................................................ Safety-4

2.1 Laser Precaution Labels.......................................................... Safety-4
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations..............................Safety-4
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels.....................................................Safety-5
2.2 Ratings Indication Labels ........................................................ Safety-6
2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations ............ Safety-7
2.3.1 Erasure Unit..................................................................................Safety-7
2.3.2 Scanning Optics Unit.....................................................................Safety-7
2.3.3 Covers...........................................................................................Safety-8
2.3.4 Cassette Insertion Operation Label,
Cassette Right-Justifying Label.....................................................Safety-8
2.3.5 Exposure Marker Instruction Label...............................................Safety-9
2.3.6 Power Cable Caution Label..........................................................Safety-9
3. Protective Housings
Against Laser Exposure ................................ Safety-10
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Contents Safety Precautions 0.4
Product Specifications
1. Specifications of Machine ..................................Spec-1

1.1 Product Code ............................................................................ Spec-1
1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types .................................................... Spec-1
1.3 Available Cassette Types and Sizes.......................................... Spec-1
1.4 List of Optional Items ................................................................ Spec-1
1.5 Product Specifications............................................................... Spec-2
1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity ............................... Spec-2
1.7 Moving Means for the Machine ................................................. Spec-3
1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine .............................................. Spec-3
1.8.1 Retaining the Machine on Adjustable Feet......................................Spec-3
1.8.2 Retaining the Machine by Use of Anti-Topple Retainer...................Spec-4
1.9 Environmental Conditions.......................................................... Spec-5
1.10 Electrical Specifications ............................................................. Spec-5
1.11 Servicing Space ........................................................................ Spec-6
1.12 Installation Space ...................................................................... Spec-6
1.12.1 For Fixing by Adjustable Feet..........................................................Spec-6
1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer........................Spec-7
1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used......Spec-7
1.12.4 Using the Supporter........................................................................Spec-8
1.13 Disposal .................................................................................... Spec-9
1.13.1 Disposal of IP..................................................................................Spec-9
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.5
Machine Description (MD)
1. Machine Overview ..................................................MD-1 2. Descriptions of Software Control .......................MD-14

1.1 Features ...................................................................................... MD-1 2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console.......................................... MD-14
1.2 System Configuration ................................................................... MD-1 2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing ............................................... MD-14
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names................MD-2 2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data ............................................................ MD-14
1.3.1 External View of Machine .................................................................... MD-2 2.2 Error Handling ............................................................................ MD-15
1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions .............................................................. MD-2 2.3 What Is Sleep Mode? ................................................................. MD-15
1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents .......................................... MD-3 2.4 RU Bootup Processing ............................................................... MD-16
1.4 Machine Components ..................................................................MD-4 2.5 RU Termination Processing ........................................................ MD-16
1.4.1 Unit Locations ...................................................................................... MD-4
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths ............................................ MD-4 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations ................MD-17
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions ....................................MD-5 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function....................... MD-17
1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit - 1 ........................................................................... MD-5 3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection Circuit
and the Components to Be Protected ............................................... MD-17
1.5.2 Cassette Set Unit - 2 ........................................................................... MD-6
3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected .................................... MD-17
3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram ................................... MD-18
1.5.5 Subscanning Unit - 1 ........................................................................... MD-9 3.2 Erasure Unit Control................................................................... MD-19
1.5.6 Subscanning Unit - 2 ......................................................................... MD-10 3.3 LEDs on the SND27A Board and the CPU63A Board.................MD-20
1.5.7 Housing ..............................................................................................MD-11 3.3.1 LEDs on the SND27A Board ............................................................. MD-20
1.6 Board Locations ......................................................................... MD-12 3.3.2 LEDs on the CPU63A Board ............................................................. MD-21
1.6.1 Housing ............................................................................................. MD-12 3.4 Checking the Voltage .................................................................MD-22
1.6.2 Erasure Unit ...................................................................................... MD-12 3.4.1 Checking the Voltage of the PIF63A Board /
1.6.3 Scanning Optics Unit ......................................................................... MD-13 Alfha II Power Source ........................................................................ MD-22
1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit .......................................................................... MD-13

1.6.5 Subscanning Unit .............................................................................. MD-13
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.6
4. Descriptions of Scanner Mechanism and

Its Operation .........................................................MD-23
4.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence .............................MD-23
4.2 Correction Data..........................................................................MD-24
4.3 Image Data Flow ........................................................................MD-25
4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem ......................................MD-26
5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components

and Their Operations ...........................................MD-27
5.1 IP Conveyance Flow ..................................................................MD-27
5.2 Cassette Set Unit .......................................................................MD-28
5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation ............................................................ MD-28
5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation ............................................................. MD-32
5.3 Erasure Unit ...............................................................................MD-35
5.3.1 IP Dust Removal by Brush Rollers and Cleaning the Brush Roller ... MD-36
5.4 Subscanning Unit .......................................................................MD-37
5.4.1 IP Reading ......................................................................................... MD-37
5.4.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading .................................................... MD-37
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.7
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting................................. MT-1

1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting..............................................................MT-1
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log..................................................MT-2
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log......................................................................MT-2
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble...................MT-3
1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table.......................................................MT-4
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch.........................................MT-6
2. Error Code Table..................................................... MT-7

3. Abnormal Images.................................................. MT-80
3.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images............................................MT-80
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.8
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

of Parts (MC)
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit......MC-1 4.5 Antistatic Member ......................................................................MC-25
1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment ................. MC-1 4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) .........................................................................MC-26
1.2 Types of Screws .......................................................................... MC-1 4.7 Main Power Switch Assembly ....................................................MC-27
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding .............................................. MC-1 4.8 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet ..........................MC-28
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance......................... MC-1 4.9 Operation Panel Assembly .........................................................MC-29
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image .............................. MC-1 4.10 LAN Cover ................................................................................. MC-31
2. Table of Contents ...................................................MC-2 5. Cassette Set Unit ..................................................MC-32

5.1 Cassette Set Unit .......................................................................MC-32
3. Cover .......................................................................MC-4 5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly ........................................................MC-35
3.1 Cover ...........................................................................................MC-4 5.3 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) .........MC-37
3.2 Plate ............................................................................................MC-5 5.4 Cable Junction Bracket ..............................................................MC-38
4. Housing Unit ...........................................................MC-6 5.5 Shutter Drive Arm ......................................................................MC-39
4.1 Alpha II Power Supply ..................................................................MC-6 5.6 Spur Gear (Reference Side).......................................................MC-40
4.2 PIF63A Board ..............................................................................MC-8 5.7 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) ........................................ MC-41
4.3 CPU Board ..................................................................................MC-9 5.8 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly ............................................MC-42
4.3.1 Replacement Procedures .................................................................... MC-9 5.9 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft .......................MC-44
4.3.2 Machine Data Backup ......................................................................... MC-9 5.10 Shutter Assembly .......................................................................MC-46
4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board ..................................................................MC-11 5.11 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) .............................MC-48
4.3.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU ................................................... MC-13 5.12 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear ......................MC-49
4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version .................................................... MC-18 5.13 Cassette Hold Release Arm .......................................................MC-50
4.3.6 Installing the HR Reading Option Key ............................................... MC-21 5.14 Cassette IP Holding Arm ............................................................ MC-51
4.3.7 Restoring the Machine Data .............................................................. MC-22 5.15 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly ...................................................MC-53
4.3.8 Confirming the S Value ...................................................................... MC-23 5.16 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) ...............................................MC-54
4.3.9 S Value Correction/LED Initialize....................................................... MC-23 5.17 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) ..........MC-55
4.4 SND Board ................................................................................MC-24 5.18 IP Suction Link Mechanism ........................................................MC-56
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
5.19 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) ...............................................MC-58 6. Erasure Unit ..........................................................MC-92
5.20 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft.........................MC-59 6.1 Erasure Unit ...............................................................................MC-92
5.21 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly ............................................. MC-61 6.2 Reflection Plate ..........................................................................MC-94
5.22 Hose ..........................................................................................MC-63 6.3 Brush Roller Assembly ...............................................................MC-96
5.23 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) ..................................MC-64 6.4 Brush Roller ...............................................................................MC-97
5.24 IP Suction Pump (PA1) ...............................................................MC-65 6.5 Filter ..........................................................................................MC-99
5.25 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Emitting Side) ...........................MC-66 6.6 Lamp Assembly ....................................................................... MC-101
5.26 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Receiving Side) ........................MC-67
5.27 Guide .........................................................................................MC-68 7. Light-Collecting Unit ..........................................MC-103
5.28 Suction Cup ...............................................................................MC-69 7.1 Light-Collecting Unit ................................................................. MC-103
5.29 IP Transport Motor (MA4) ........................................................... MC-71 7.2 PMT Board .............................................................................. MC-106
5.30 Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear ...........................MC-72 8. Scanning Optics Unit .........................................MC-108
5.31 Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A) and (B) ............................MC-73 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit ................................................................ MC-108
5.32 Actuator Assembly .....................................................................MC-76
5.33 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6)....................................................MC-77 9. Subscanning Unit ...............................................MC-112
5.34 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) .............MC-78 9.1 Subscanning Unit ..................................................................... MC-112
5.35 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) ................................MC-79 9.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly ................................. MC-114
5.36 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) ..................MC-80 9.3 Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)................................. MC-115
5.37 Movable Guide Assembly ...........................................................MC-82 9.4 Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) .................... MC-116
5.38 15x30 Cassette Movable Guide Assembly...............................MC-84 9.5 Subscanning Motor (MZ1) ........................................................ MC-116
5.39 IP Suction Arm ...........................................................................MC-85 9.6 IP Transport Motor (MC1) ......................................................... MC-117
5.40 IP Suction Link Shaft ..................................................................MC-87 9.7 Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2) ................................. MC-117
5.41 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly ....................................MC-88 9.8 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) ................................................. MC-118
5.42 Guide Plates (A) and (B) ............................................................MC-90 9.9 Light-Collecting Shaft
(Light-Collecting Mirror, Antistatic Member) ............................... MC-119
9.10 Rubber Roller (A, B) ................................................................. MC-121
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
9.11 Rubber Roller (C, D)................................................................. MC-123

9.12 Rubber Roller (E) ..................................................................... MC-125
9.13 Conveyor Guide Assembly ....................................................... MC-128
9.14 Rubber Roller (F) ..................................................................... MC-129
9.15 Grip Release Arm..................................................................... MC-130
9.16 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and
Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) ............................................... MC-131
9.17 Subscanning Grip Assembly ..................................................... MC-133
9.18 IP Sensor (SC3) ....................................................................... MC-135
9.19 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) .................... MC-136
9.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) ............................................... MC-137
9.21 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)............................................... MC-139
9.22 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) .............................................. MC-141
9.23 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) .............................................. MC-143
9.24 Center Roller............................................................................MC-145
10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations........MC-147

10.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures .................... MC-147
10.2 CPU Board Fuses ....................................................................MC-148
10.3 SND Board Fuses ....................................................................MC-148
10.4 PIF63A Board Fuses ................................................................MC-149
11. List of Jigs and Tools .........................................MC-150

11.1 Jigs and Tools .......................................................................... MC-150
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.11
Maintenance Utility (MU)
1. Overview of RU Service Utility ..............................MU-1 3.4 FTP Server IP Address .............................................................. MU-12
1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility ............................................................. MU-1 3.4.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-12
1.2 RU Operation Panel ..................................................................... MU-1 3.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-12
1.3 Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes ..........................MU-2 3.5 Default Gateway ........................................................................ MU-13
1.3.1 Description of Buttons ......................................................................... MU-2 3.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-13
1.3.2 Procedures for Menu Selection ........................................................... MU-3 3.5.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-13
1.4 Method of Setting the Addresses..................................................MU-4 3.6 Secure Host ............................................................................... MU-14
1.4.1 Description of Buttons ......................................................................... MU-4 3.6.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-14
1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the Address ................................................ MU-5 3.6.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-14
3.7 Secure Net................................................................................. MU-15
2. User Utility ..............................................................MU-6 3.7.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-15
2.1 Overview of User Utility ................................................................MU-6 3.7.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-15
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility...............................................MU-8 3.8 Network Check .......................................................................... MU-16
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility ........................................................................ MU-8 3.8.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-16
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility ......................................................................... MU-8 3.8.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-16
2.3 Select master IIP console .............................................................MU-8 3.9 HV On/Off .................................................................................. MU-17
2.3.1 Function ............................................................................................... MU-8 3.9.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-17
2.3.2 Procedures .......................................................................................... MU-8 3.9.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-17
3. Machine Maintenance Utility .................................MU-9 3.10 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility .................. MU-18
3.10.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility during Initialization ........... MU-18
3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance Utility .............................................MU-9
3.10.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility during READY State ... MU-19
3.2 Reader Unit IP Address .............................................................. MU-10
3.10.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility ............................................ MU-20
3.2.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-10
3.10.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility when Error Occurred ........ MU-20
3.2.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-10
3.3 Subnet Mask .............................................................................. MU-11 4. RU PC-TOOL .........................................................MU-21
3.3.1 Function ..............................................................................................MU-11 4.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree ........................................ MU-21
3.3.2 Procedures .........................................................................................MU-11 4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window .............................................................. MU-21
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
4.1.2 Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-21 4.10.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-30

4.2 Outline of RU PC-TOOL .............................................................MU-22 4.10.3 Message on the Error Window .......................................................... MU-30
4.2.1 Display of Under Maintenance on the Operation Panel ................. MU-22 4.11 VERSION UP............................................................................. MU-31
4.2.2 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display .................................................. MU-23 4.11.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-31
4.3 LIST OF EXISTING RU ..............................................................MU-24 4.11.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-31
4.3.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-24 4.12 EDIT HISTORY ..........................................................................MU-32
4.4 NEW ..........................................................................................MU-24 4.12.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-32
4.4.1 Function ............................................................................................ MU-24 4.12.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-32
4.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-24 4.12.3 Details of USE ................................................................................... MU-33
4.5 DELETE.....................................................................................MU-25 4.12.4 Details of IP ....................................................................................... MU-34
4.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-25 4.12.5 Details of BARCODE ......................................................................... MU-35
4.5.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-25 4.12.6 Details of LASER ............................................................................... MU-36
4.6 MUTL.........................................................................................MU-25 4.12.7 Details of LAMP ................................................................................. MU-37
4.6.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-25 4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION ............................................................MU-38
4.6.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-25 4.13.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-38
4.7 PING ..........................................................................................MU-26 4.13.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-38
4.7.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-26 4.14 EDIT CL NAME ..........................................................................MU-42
4.7.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-26 4.14.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-42
4.8 MON ..........................................................................................MU-27 4.14.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination ........ MU-42
4.8.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-27 4.14.3 Editing the List of Master CL's ........................................................... MU-43
4.8.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-28 4.14.4 Switching the Master CL.................................................................... MU-44
4.9 FTP............................................................................................MU-29 4.15 BACKUP ....................................................................................MU-45
4.9.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-29 4.15.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-45
4.9.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-29 4.15.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-45
4.10 INSTALL ....................................................................................MU-30 4.15.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and
4.10.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-30 Their Probable Causes ...................................................................... MU-46
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
4.16 RESTORE .................................................................................MU-47 5. Client PC ...............................................................MU-61

4.16.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-47 5.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC .................................. MU-61
4.16.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-47 5.1.1 Features of the Client PC .................................................................. MU-61
4.16.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and 5.1.2 Operations of the Client PC ............................................................... MU-62
Their Probable Causes ...................................................................... MU-48
5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC .................................................. MU-63
4.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT ..................................................................MU-49
5.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM Drive ...... MU-63
4.17.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-49
5.1.5 Precautions in Setting the DX Console ............................................. MU-63
4.17.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-50
5.2 Setting Up the Client PC ............................................................MU-64
4.18 ERROR DB................................................................................ MU-51
5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM .................. MU-65
4.18.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-51
5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive ....... MU-66
4.18.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-52
5.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.........................................................MU-68
4.19 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs ................................................................MU-53
5.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification ................MU-69
4.19.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-53
5.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List .............................................. MU-71
4.19.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-53
5.5.1 Registering an RU in the Hospital List ............................................... MU-71
4.20 VERSION UP: ALL RUs .............................................................MU-55
5.5.2 Adding an RU to the Hospital List ..................................................... MU-72
4.20.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-55
5.5.3 Deleting a Hospital List Entry ............................................................ MU-73
4.20.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-55
5.5.4 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Indications .................................................. MU-74
4.21 CDPath ......................................................................................MU-57
5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE.............................................................MU-75
4.21.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-57
5.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations ................. MU-75
4.21.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"....................................................... MU-57
5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode ............................................................. MU-76
4.21.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" .................................................. MU-58
5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode ........................................................... MU-77
4.22 Initialize APL...............................................................................MU-59
5.7 Data Flow of Each Command ....................................................MU-78
4.22.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-59
5.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD .............................................................. MU-78
4.22.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-59
5.7.2 READ and WRITE ............................................................................. MU-78
4.23 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL..............................................MU-60
5.7.3 Import and Export .............................................................................. MU-78
4.23.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL ....................................................................... MU-60
4.23.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL......................................................................... MU-60
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after 6.5.3 Deleting an FTP Server ..................................................................... MU-99
Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation .....................................MU-79 6.5.4 Deleting a Site ................................................................................... MU-99
5.8.1 Solution-1 .......................................................................................... MU-79 6.5.5 Deleting the Entire Tree Information ................................................ MU-100
5.8.2 Solution-2 .......................................................................................... MU-80 6.6 COPY ...................................................................................... MU-101
5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL....................................................... MU-81 6.6.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-101
5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM ................. MU-81 6.6.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-101
5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive .... MU-83 6.7 RENAME ................................................................................. MU-103
5.10 Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC........MU-86 6.7.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-103
5.11 Checking the Internet Options Setting of the Client PC ............MU-87 6.7.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-103
6.8 GET VERSION ........................................................................ MU-104
6. CLIENT PC-TOOL .................................................MU-88
6.8.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-104
6.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree .................................MU-88
6.8.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-104
6.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window ...................................................... MU-88
6.9 MUTL....................................................................................... MU-105
6.1.2 Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-88
6.9.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-105
6.2 Outline of the CLIENT PC-TOOL ................................................MU-89
6.9.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-105
6.2.1 Display of Under Maintenance on the Operation Panel ................. MU-89
6.10 PING ........................................................................................ MU-106
6.2.2 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Screen Display ........................................... MU-90
6.10.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-106
6.3 Hospital List ............................................................................... MU-91
6.10.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-106
6.3.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-91
6.11 MON ........................................................................................ MU-107
6.4 NEW RU ....................................................................................MU-92
6.11.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-107
6.4.1 Function ............................................................................................ MU-92
6.11.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-108
6.4.2 Registering an RU in the Hospital List ............................................... MU-92
6.12 FTP.......................................................................................... MU-110
6.4.3 Registering an FTP Server and RU with a Registered Site Name .... MU-94
6.12.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-110
6.4.4 Registering an RU with a Registered FTP Server ............................. MU-96
6.12.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-110
6.5 DELETE.....................................................................................MU-98
6.13 VERSION UP............................................................................MU-111
6.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-98
6.13.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-111
6.5.2 Deleting an RU Only .......................................................................... MU-98
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
6.13.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-111 6.21.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-128

6.14 EDIT HISTORY ........................................................................ MU-112 6.21.3 Errors that may Occur during UPLOAD and
6.14.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-112 their Probable Causes ..................................................................... MU-129
6.14.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-112 6.22 DOWNLOAD ........................................................................... MU-130
6.15 EDIT CONFIGURATION .......................................................... MU-114 6.22.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-130
6.15.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-114 6.22.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-130
6.15.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-114 6.22.3 Errors that may Occur during DOWNLOAD and
their Probable Causes ..................................................................... MU-131
6.16 EDIT CL NAME ........................................................................ MU-116
6.23 CDPath .................................................................................... MU-132
6.16.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-116
6.23.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-132
6.16.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination .......MU-116
6.23.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"..................................................... MU-132
6.16.3 Editing the List of Master CL's ..........................................................MU-118
6.23.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" ................................................ MU-133
6.16.4 Switching the Master CL...................................................................MU-119
6.23.4 Verifying the "CDPath" Setting ........................................................ MU-134
6.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT ................................................................ MU-120
6.24 Export ...................................................................................... MU-135
6.17.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-120
6.24.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-135
6.17.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-121
6.24.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-135
6.18 ERROR DB.............................................................................. MU-122
6.25 Import ...................................................................................... MU-136
6.18.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-122
6.25.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-136
6.18.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-123
6.25.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-136
6.19 READ ...................................................................................... MU-124
6.26 OnLine ..................................................................................... MU-137
6.19.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-124
6.26.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-137
6.19.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-124
6.26.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-137
6.20 WRITE ..................................................................................... MU-126
6.27 Network ................................................................................... MU-138
6.20.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-126
6.27.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-138
6.20.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-126
6.27.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-138
6.21 UPLOAD .................................................................................. MU-128
6.28 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL .................................... MU-139
6.21.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-128
6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL) .... MU-139
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window .................... MU-140 [5-2] Laser ............................................................................................... MU-154
6.28.3 Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL ............................................................... MU-140 [5-3] HV Diagnostic .................................................................................. MU-155
[5-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic ..................................................................... MU-155
7. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions .............MU-141
[5-4] Format Adjustment .......................................................................... MU-156
7.1 Tree of MUTL........................................................................... MU-141
[5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) ............................................................ MU-156
7.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL .................................................. MU-143
[5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel) ............................................................... MU-158
7.2.1 Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL ................................. MU-143
[5-4-3] Manual Adjustment (Line) ................................................................ MU-160
7.2.2 Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL.......................... MU-144
[5-4-4] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel) .......................................................... MU-162
7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL ............................................................................. MU-145
[5-4-5] Default Setting (FREQ) ................................................................... MU-164
7.3 Details of MUTL ....................................................................... MU-146
[5-4-6] Default Setting (Pixel) ...................................................................... MU-164
[1] Conveyance Check ......................................................................... MU-146
[5-4-7] Optic Setting (FREQ) ...................................................................... MU-164
[1-1] Conveyance Setting ........................................................................ MU-148
[5-4-8] Optic Setting (Pixel) ......................................................................... MU-164
[1-2] Processing Mode Setting ................................................................ MU-148
[5-5] Correction ........................................................................................ MU-165
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting ...................................................... MU-148
[5-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST) ................................................ MU-165
[2] Board Check .................................................................................... MU-149
[5-5-2] Shading Correction (HR) ................................................................. MU-166
[2-1] CPU Board Setting Display ............................................................. MU-149
[5-5-3] Shading Speed Correction (HR Speed) .......................................... MU-167
[2-2] Panel Check .................................................................................... MU-150
[5-5-4] Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR)) .............................................. MU-168
[2-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off.......................................................................... MU-150
[5-5-5] Sensitivity Correction (ST) ............................................................... MU-169
[2-2-2] BUZZER On/Off............................................................................... MU-150
[5-5-6] Sensitivity Correction (HR) .............................................................. MU-170
[3] Software Check ............................................................................... MU-151
[5-5-7] Special Sensitivity Correction .......................................................... MU-171
[3-1] Ver. Display ..................................................................................... MU-151
[5-5-8] Sensitivity S-Value Correction ......................................................... MU-176
[3-2] MAC Address Display ...................................................................... MU-151
[5-6] Trouble Shooting ............................................................................. MU-177
[4] Virtual Image Check ........................................................................ MU-152
[5-6-1] Shading Correction .......................................................................... MU-177
[4-1] LED Virtual Read ............................................................................. MU-152
[5-7] HV ON/OFF ..................................................................................... MU-177
[4-2] PMT Virtual Read ............................................................................ MU-153
[5-8] S Value ............................................................................................ MU-178
[5] Scanner Check ................................................................................ MU-154
[5-8-1] S value now ..................................................................................... MU-178
[5-1] Polygon Mortor ................................................................................ MU-154
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
[5-8-2] S value calculate ............................................................................. MU-178

[5-8-3] PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize......................................... MU-179
[6] For Design ....................................................................................... MU-180
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.18
Service Parts List (SP)

How to Use Service Parts List .................................................................SP-1 07E SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 .............................................................SP-27
INDEX SP-2 07F SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 .............................................................SP-28
01A COVER 1......................................................................................SP-3 07G SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 .............................................................SP-29
01B COVER 2......................................................................................SP-4 07H SUB SCANNING UNIT 8 .............................................................SP-30
02 FRAME .........................................................................................SP-5 07I SUB SCANNING UNIT 9 .............................................................SP-31
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 ...............................................................SP-6 07J SUB SCANNING UNIT 10 ...........................................................SP-32
03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 ...............................................................SP-7 07K SUB SCANNING UNIT 11 ...........................................................SP-33
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 ...............................................................SP-8 08 CONTROLLER ...........................................................................SP-34
03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 ...............................................................SP-9 09 OPTION ......................................................................................SP-35
03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 .............................................................SP-10 10 CABLE........................................................................................SP-36
03F CASSETTE SET UNIT 6 ............................................................. SP-11 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................................................................SP-37
03G CASSETTE SET UNIT 7 .............................................................SP-12 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ...................................................SP-40
03H CASSETTE SET UNIT 8 .............................................................SP-13 13 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring...............................SP-42
03I CASSETTE SET UNIT 9 .............................................................SP-14
03J CASSETTE SET UNIT 10 ...........................................................SP-15
03K CASSETTE SET UNIT 11 ...........................................................SP-16
03L CASSETTE SET UNIT 12 ...........................................................SP-17
03M CASSETTE SET UNIT 13 ...........................................................SP-18
04A ERASURE UNIT 1 ......................................................................SP-19
04B ERASURE UNIT 2 ......................................................................SP-20
05 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ..........................................................SP-21
06 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT .........................................................SP-22
07A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 .............................................................SP-23
07B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 .............................................................SP-24
07C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 .............................................................SP-25
07D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 .............................................................SP-26
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6149
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.19
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Section....PM-1 7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.....................................................PM-14
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List....................................... PM-2 7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter.............................PM-15
1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine 7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member of
Has Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when the Housing Unit.......................................................................PM-15
a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached.......... PM-4 7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit.............................................PM-16
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine 7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly...................PM-16
Has Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or
8. Erasure Unit...........................................................PM-17
when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached........... PM-5
8.1 Cleaning the Filter.....................................................................PM-17
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures.......................PM-6 8.2 Replacing the Filter...................................................................PM-17
2.1 Backing Up the Log................................................................... PM-6 8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller.........................................................PM-18
2.2 Checking the Error Log.............................................................. PM-7 8.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate....................................................PM-18
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................................. PM-8 8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit.....................................................PM-19
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance..........................PM-9 9. Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-20

9.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly.......... PM-20
4. Pulling Out the Machine.......................................PM-10
9.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit.......................................... PM-20
5. Removing the Covers/Plates................................PM-12 9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide......................................... PM-20
5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years).......................PM-12 9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit.......................................... PM-20
5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years)............................PM-12 9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide Assembly.... PM-20
6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-12 10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch...................PM-21
7. Cassette Set Unit...................................................PM-13 11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates...............PM-21
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit.......................................................PM-13 11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)..........PM-21
7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit...............................................PM-13 11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years)...............PM-21
7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small).......................................................PM-13
12. Securing the Machine...........................................PM-22
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups.......................................................PM-14
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.20
13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding....PM-22

14. Checking the Image/Conveyance........................PM-22
15. Confirming the S Value.........................................PM-23
16. Checking the Error Log........................................PM-23
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Installation (IN) 0.21
Installation (IN)
1. Specifications of Machine .......................................IN-1 6. Final Placement ......................................................IN-23

1.1 Dimensions and Weight ................................................................. IN-1 6.1 Securing the Machine...................................................................IN-23
1.2 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine...................................... IN-1 6.2 Securing the Cable.......................................................................IN-24
1.3 Servicing Space .............................................................................IN-2 7. DX Console Installation Procedures ....................IN-24
1.3.1 Retaining with the Adjustable Feet...................................................... IN-2
1.3.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer............................ IN-3 8. Installing RU Software ...........................................IN-25
1.3.3 Installing the Machine at a User’s Site where 8.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility ......................................IN-25
Long Cassettes are Used.................................................................... IN-3 8.2 Setting the RU IP Address ............................................................IN-26
1.3.4 Using the Supporter............................................................................ IN-4 8.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address ...............................................IN-27
2. Installation Work Flowchart ....................................IN-5 8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX Console.............................IN-29
8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL ..........................................................IN-30
3. Preparation for Installation......................................IN-6
8.6 Installing RU Software ..................................................................IN-32
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation .................................................IN-6
8.7 Installation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit ......................................IN-37
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements............................................................ IN-6
3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment................................................... IN-6 9. Image/Conveyance Checks ...................................IN-39
3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit...........IN-6 9.1 Check Before Procedures ............................................................IN-39
3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection.................................................... IN-6 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks .........................................................IN-40
3.2 Unloading.......................................................................................IN-7
10. Confirming the S Value ..........................................IN-42
3.3 Transfer ....................................................................................... IN-17
10.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST ..........................................IN-42
3.4 Temporary Placement .................................................................. IN-17
10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR ..........................................IN-44
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied ........................................................ IN-18
11. Backing Up the Scanner Data ...............................IN-47
4. Installation Procedures..........................................IN-19
4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member ......................... IN-19 12. Powering OFF the DX Console/RU .......................IN-47
5. Connecting the Cables ..........................................IN-20 13. Cleaning the DX Console/RU ................................IN-48
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value......IN-20 14. Exposure Marker Instruction Label ......................IN-48
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable ....................................................IN-22
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Appendix 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE 6. Applying the Seal ................................................................Appx IN-43

GROUNDING ..................................Appx IN-1 7. Nothing ...............................................................................Appx IN-43
8. Nothing ...............................................................................Appx IN-44
Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with
the Anti-Topple Retainer ...............Appx IN-2 Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL..................Appx IN-45
1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit ................................Appx IN-2 1. Additionally Registering the Master CL
(Procedures on the CL1) .....................................................Appx IN-45
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer ..............Appx IN-3
2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2).......................Appx IN-48
Appendix 3 Assembling and Securing 3. Registering the Machine Information
the Supporter ...............................Appx IN-12 (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) ............................................Appx IN-49
1. Components of the Supporter ............................................. Appx IN-12 4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility ...................Appx IN-49
2. Assembling the Supporter ................................................... Appx IN-14 5. Verifying Switching of Master CL .........................................Appx IN-50
3. Attachment of the Options................................................... Appx IN-18
Appendix 5. Changing the RU's IP Address ...Appx IN-52
3.1 Mounting the Arm..................................................................... Appx IN-18
1. Starting the machine Maintenance Utility .............................Appx IN-52
3.2 Mounting the Base................................................................... Appx IN-20
2. Setting the RU IP Address ...................................................Appx IN-52
3.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack.................................................... Appx IN-21
3. Setting the FTP Server IP address ......................................Appx IN-52
4. Securing the Machine..........................................................Appx IN-22
5. Securing the Supporter .......................................................Appx IN-26 Appendix 6. Reinstalling the RU Software .....Appx IN-53
5.1 Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in 1. Deleting an Installed RU ......................................................Appx IN-53
Respective Fixing Modes ........................................................ Appx IN-27 2. Reinstalling the RU Software...............................................Appx IN-53
5.2 Nothing..................................................................................... Appx IN-28
5.3 Fixing the Supporter to the Floor.............................................. Appx IN-29
Appendix 7. Installing the RU Software ..........Appx IN-54
1. Verifying the connection to the DX Console .........................Appx IN-54
5.4 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall............................................... Appx IN-32
2. Installing the RU PC-TOOL .................................................Appx IN-54
5.5 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via
the Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long Type)..................................... Appx IN-34 3. Installing the RU Software ...................................................Appx IN-54
5.6 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via Anchor Nuts..................... Appx IN-36
5.7 Securing the Machine
(when the Supporter has been Fixed)...................................... Appx IN-39
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be

Performed after Improper
RU PC-TOOL Installation ............Appx IN-55
1. Corrective Procedure 1 .......................................................Appx IN-55
2. Corrective Procedure 2 .......................................................Appx IN-56
Appendix 9. Installing the Mobile Kit ..............Appx IN-57
1. Components of the Mobile Kit .............................................Appx IN-57
2. Attaching the Tape .............................................................Appx IN-57
3. Installing the Anti-Topple Retainer Kit...................................Appx IN-58
Appendix 10. Uninstallation of the 50 Micron
Upgrade Kit ..................................Appx IN-59
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Contents Performance Check (PC) 0.24
Performance Check (PC)
CR-IR 359 Performance Check List ............................ PC-1

Installation Information ............................................................................PC-1
Checklist .................................................................................................PC-1
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
05.31.2013 01 New release (FM6150) All pages
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 7-10
CR-IR 359 Service Manual
Safety Precaution
014-247-02E CR-IR 359 Service Manual

01.31.2014 FM8222
Safety-1
1. Safety Precautions n Optical Parts

l When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch.
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible
l Never remove the scanning optics unit covers.
physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing. l For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. manual.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. l Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently
discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise
due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal
1.1 General Precautions carelessly).
l Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage
WARNING switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective
housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
- No modification of this equipment is allowed. n Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
- Exceeded US Deviation limit, however instructions provided in operation and service When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the operation panel,
manuals instructing user to connect unit to center-tapped, 240V, single phase circuit. the photomultiplier and the erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous
substance may leak from the inside of a broken part.
n Power Supply n Other Working Precautions

Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power of the l When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed
under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch).
machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug still plugged, you Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described
may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit even when in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed
the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, that some servicing procedures, protective housings back exactly where they were.
such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed under power-OFF condition. In such l Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered,
cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit, because of possible electric shock hazards.
as instructed in this manual. l When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise
due care against electric shock or other hazards.
- Do not connect any unspecified device. l Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature
- Ensure sufficient space around the power plug or the inlet. because you may suffer burns.
l When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to
n Drive Mechanism wear an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body.
Static electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, belts, and other drive l Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or
mechanism parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled. retainers.
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under power-OFF l Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your hand, foot, hairs, and indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put
clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this manual. another label over them.
l Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures,
make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed
n Heavy Objects have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal and
installation of heavy objects.
n Grounding
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
n Safety Devices protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, panels, and covers) should always be restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that may impair their safety to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
features. that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual Safety-1
Safety-2
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation 1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment
As indicated in the certification and indication label attached on the right-hand side cover of Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the hospital’s
the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1, director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient environment or
Am. 2 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)” and not.
“EN60825-1 (Amendment 2).” The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum output
of 50 mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but you n Additional Protective Grounding
will not be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in the service manual. When the RU is to be installed in the patient environment, connect the RU with the medical
use grounding terminal through the additional protective grounding wire. Definition of "patient
n Precautions Against Laser Exposure environment" is given below.
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
l Patient environment
l Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, put the removed in height from the area of the patient’s body.
protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
a laser beam out of the machine.
- Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit.
- Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts.
l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance

In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance programs
described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified.
l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure

Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
- Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you may
be exposed to laser beam radiation.
- Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
- Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
- Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
- Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-3
1.4 Precautions in Retaining the Machine 1.5 Notes on Supporter Use
The installation space and the method of retaining the machine are limited in a site where a
long cassette is used. 1.5.1 Precautions in Handling the Machine in a User’s Site where
the Supporter Is Used
WARNING
Exercise care in the following when working in a user’s site where the supporter (option) is
Be sure to follow the precautions below in a site where a long cassette is used.
used.
- Always fix the machine by an optional anti-topple retainer.
- Install the machine in a space with a height of the ceiling of 1750 mm or higher.
CAUTION
When pushing the machine into the supporter or pulling the machine out of the
supporter, exercise care so that your fingers are not caught between the supporter
and machine.
1.5.2 Precautions in Preventing the Supporter from Toppling

Refer to “Appendix 3-5 Securing the Supporter” for retaining the supporter to prevent the
supporter from toppling.
{IN:Appendix 3-5_Securing the Supporter}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-4
2. Labels
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations

Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution
labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2 and IEC
60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)" and "IEC60825-1
(Amendment 2).” issued by the FDA of the U.S.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-5
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels n IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label
n HHS Certification and Identification Label
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-6
2.2 Ratings Indication Labels n Ratings Indication Labels
n Attachment Position
n Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly Use Period) Label
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-7
2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations 2.3.2 Scanning Optics Unit
Hold the portions of the green labels to dismount/mount the scanning optics unit.
2.3.1 Erasure Unit
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Safety-8
2.3.3 Covers 2.3.4 Cassette Insertion Operation Label, Cassette Right-Justifying
Label
u NOTE u
Always use a cable conforming to the specifications at a position with a caution label applied. The cassette insertion operation label differs depending on the type of the cassette used in
the user’s site.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Safety-9
2.3.5 Exposure Marker Instruction Label 2.3.6 Power Cable Caution Label
Apply the exposure marker instruction label suitable for the local language. Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for U.S.A.)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Safety-10
3. Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure 4. CLASSIFICATION

Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, a laser beam will never leak
out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical 1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service engineer or other CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation.
During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the
instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore the
2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
protective housings removed back exactly where they were. NO APPLIED PART
n Protective Housing of the Machine

The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The three covers 3. Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter
marked by ∗ in the illustration below are protective housings against laser exposure. IP00
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a

flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5. According to the mode of operation

CONTINUOUS OPERATION
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Safety-11
5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.2 Further information for IEC60601-1-2

Model name Allegro-HR is referred to as CR-IR 359 in this section.
- Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
follows.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical - Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
devices to the IEC60601-1-2 : 1993 (up to 24999), IEC60601-1-2 : 2001 (after 25001), equipment.
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
- The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
interference in a typical medical installation. parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not immunity of the CR-IR 359.
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference List of Cables
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular Name FUJIFILM Corporation Parts code General Specification
installation. 136N0377 (Europe)
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be Power Cable -
136N0376 (UK)
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to UTP cable of straight type and
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures; I/F Cable -
category 5E or more.
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
- Increase the separation between the equipment. - The CR-IR 359 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the CR-IR 359 should be observed to verify
other device(s) are connected. normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 should assure that it is used in
such an environment.
Electromagnetic environment -
Emissions test Compliance
guidance
RF emissions The CR-IR 359 uses RF energy only
CISPR 11 for its internal function. Therefore, its
Group 1 RF emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11 Class A
The CR-IR 359 is suitable for use in all
Harmonic emissions establishments other than domestic and
IEC 61000-3-2 Class A those directly connected to the public
low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic
Voltage fluctuations/ purposes.
flicker emissions Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-12
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 should assure that it is used in such an environment. customer or the user of the CR-IR 359 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic IEC 60601 test Compliance
Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level environment - level level
guidance Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be equipment should be used no closer to any
discharge (ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - part of the CR-IR 359, including cables,
±8kV air ±6kV contact ceramic tile. If floors 80MHz than the recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-2 are covered with calculated from the equation applicable to
±2kV air synthetic material, the frequency of the transmitter.
±4kV air the relative humidity
±8kV air should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%.
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2
Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
transient/burst lines lines should be that of a IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz -
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or d = 1.2 80 MHz - 800 MHz
2.5GHz
IEC 61000-4-4 lines lines hospital environment.
Surge ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality d = 2.3 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or where P is the maximum output power rating
hospital environment. of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality recommended separation distance in metres
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a (m).
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
power supply input hospital environment. Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the as determined by an electromagnetic site
(60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) CR-IR 359 requires survey,a should be less than the compliance
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation level in each frequency range.b
during power mains
70 % UT 70 % UT interruptions, it is Interference may occur in the vicinity
(30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT ) recommended that of equipment marked with the following
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles the CR-IR 359 be symbol:
powered from an
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT uninterruptible power
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery.
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(50/60 Hz) magnetic magnetic fields NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
field should be at levels affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
characteristic of a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
IEC 61000-4-8 typical location in a telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
typical commercial or broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
hospital environment. environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the CR-IR 359 is used
exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR 359 should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
such as reorienting or relocating the CR-IR 359.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-13
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the CR-IR 359
The CR-IR 359 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which
radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 359
can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the
CR-IR 359 as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
W d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the
recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the
equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum
output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects
and people.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-14
6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing equipment
and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall comply
with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. Everybody
who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a
medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements
of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. If in doubt, consult the technical
services department or your local representative.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Safety-15
7. Cautions on Network
- Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the other
systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as network
separation.
- After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected, take
appropriate countermeasures including:
- Replacing connected devices
- Connecting additional devices
- Removing devices
- Updating devices
- Upgrading devices
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 2
Product Specifications

01.31.2014 FM8222
Spec-1
1. Specifications of Machine 1.3 Available Cassette Types and Sizes

Cassette type IP size
1.1 Product Code Cassette CC (ST Cassette) 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10
Cassette PC 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12

Abbreviated product Operation panel
Description Qty. Remarks Inch (inch)
name screen contents Twin cassette 14 x 17 - twin, 10 x 12 - twin
Cassette LC
- Inch-type (Long Cassette) Triple cassette 14 x 17 - triple, 14 x 14 - triple
- For use at specification
Image reader main body
hospitals - For FMSU direct Cassette CC (ST Cassette) 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30
CR IR 359 RU2 USA 1 : E CR-IR 359 1
- English selling
(For the U.S.)
indications - With the 50 micron Metric (cm) Cassette LC (Long Cassette) 24 x 30 - twin
upgrade kit installed
Cassette CH*1 24 x 30 *2, 18 x 24
- Inch-type
- For use at specification *1: With the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed
Image reader main body *2: Use an adapter when reading a 24x30CH cassette.
hospitals - For selling by FMSU
CR IR 359 RU2 USA 2 : E CR-IR 359 1
- English franchised stores
(For the U.S.)
indications - With the 50 micron 1.4 List of Optional Items
upgrade kit installed
Image reader main body - For use at Abbreviated product name Description Qty Remarks
CR-IR 359 hospitals Metric-type
CR IR 359 RU2 : E 1 For retaining
(For European and other - English specification IR 355 FLOOR FIX KIT RH E Anti-topple retainer kit 1
the machine
foreign countries) indications
IR 355 STAND #(E) Supporter 1
IR 355 CASSETTE RACK #(E) Cassette rack 1
1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types IR 355 CASSETE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1
IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1 Except for USA
n Available IP types IR 355 IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1
- ST-VI type IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm for LCD monitor 1 Except for USA
- HR-V type (with the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed) Retainer for fixing to wall (long
IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) 1 Except for USA
- HR-VI type (with the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed) type)
IR 355 MBL KIT #(E) Mobile kit 1
n Available IP sizes
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E AC cable for BSI 1
IP type IP size
IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E AC cable for CEE 1
Inch (inch) Standard type (ST-VI) 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10
IR 362 AC CORD 100-120V UL E AC cable for USA 1 Except for USA
Standard type (ST-VI) 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30
Metric (cm) High resolution type
24 x 30, 18 x 24
(HR-V/HR-VI)*1
*1: With the upgrade kit for reading 50μ installed
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual Spec-1
Spec-2
1.5 Product Specifications 1.6 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity
n Maximum Heat Generation n Dimensions

Standby: 0.36 MJ/h or less W590 × D380 × H810 (mm) (except protrusions)
Operating: 1.05 MJ/h or less
Hibernation: 0.07 MJ/h or less
n Noise
Operating: 55 dB or less
n Warm-up Time
l Power non-interlinked setting (when RU is started up alone)

42 seconds or less
l Power interlinked setting (when RU is started up by DX Console)

98 seconds or less
n I/F cable
UTP cable of straight type and Category 5E or more
n Center of Gravity
Height: 350 mm approx.
From right-hand side: 290 mm approx.
From front: 200 mm approx.
u NOTE u
The center of gravity is as measured from the adjustable foot.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Spec-3
1.7 Moving Means for the Machine 1.8 Retaining Means for the Machine
Two-wheeled casters (direction-variable/without brake): Four casters The following two kinds of retaining means of the machine are available.
- Retaining on the adjustable feet
- Retaining through the use of a anti-topple retainer
1.8.1 Retaining the Machine on Adjustable Feet

The machine is fixed by four adjustable feet.
The long cassette cannot be used while the machine is fixed by the adjustable feet.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-4
1.8.2 Retaining the Machine by Use of Anti-Topple Retainer
The machine is fixed through the use of an optional anti-topple retainer in the following
cases:
- When the machine is to be fixed to the floor through the use of the safety as required by the
user;
- When the long cassette is to be used;
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-5
1.9 Environmental Conditions 1.10 Electrical Specifications
n Climate Conditions n Frequency

Single-phase, 50-60 Hz, ±3%
l Operating
Temperature: 15 °C (40%) to 30 °C (80 %) n Input Voltage
Relative humidity: 15 % RH (30 °C) to 80 % RH (30 °C) (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa Single-phase, 100-240 VAC ±10%
n Rated Amperage
Single-phase, 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz : 5-2.1A
n Power Consumption
Operating: 290 VA or less
Standby: 100 VA or less
Remote standby: 20 VA or less
n Grounding
l Non-operating Class D grounding (former Class 3 grounding) (100 Ω or less)
Temperature: 0 to 45 °C (Should not freeze)
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation) n Overload Protection
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa 10 A
l Transit/storage
Temperature: -10 to 50 °C (Should not freeze)
Relative humidity: 10 to 90 % RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1,060 hPa
n Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration

10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.015 mm or less in amplitude
n Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (inclination: 1/100 or less), for front, rear, right, and left
n Floor Flatness
10 mm/m or less
n Variable Magnetic Field

DC 0.3 Gauss or less
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-6
1.11 Servicing Space 1.12 Installation Space
When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured.
1.12.1 For Fixing by Adjustable Feet
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-7
1.12.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer 1.12.3 Installing the Machine where the Long Cassette Is to Be Used
l Top view l Top view and side view
l Location of holes for the anti-topple retainer
l Location of holes for the anti-topple retainer
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-8
1.12.4 Using the Supporter l Installation space required when the base is attached to the supporter
The base mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.
l Installation space required for the supporter only
l Installation space required when the cassette rack is attached to the

supporter
The cassette rack mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-9
1.13 Disposal
1.13.1 Disposal of IP
Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in each
country and region. We will provide the product safety information as needed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-10
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Spec-11
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 10, 29, 30
Machine Description (MD)

01.31.2014 FM8222
MD-1
1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration

This machine supports the following two system configurations.
1.1 Features n System Configuration 1

The machine is connected to the Console via a network.
n Features of the Machine Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX).
l Target RU HUB Console

This machine is intended for small hospital, where a daily process count of IP is between 1 to FRRB101001.ai
20.
n System Configuration 2
l Improved dust resistance
Dust resistance is improved as there is no opening on the machine. Connect the machine, Console, and printer via network.
Each machine is to be connected via Ethernet (100BASE-TX).
l Power supply
A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to the machine. Printer
l Reading IP type HR-V

The machine which the upgrade kit (option key for reading HR) for reading 50μ has been
installed, can read IP type HR.
RU HUB Console
l Removal of IP static electricity
IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing attached FRRB101002.ai
to each conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush attached to the IP conveyance
path.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names 1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions
Name Function
1.3.1 External View of Machine Operation Panel Operation panel for the RU main body.
System power switch Power switch for the RU. When this switch is pressed with the system
power switch in the RU setting and the circuit breaker in the ON state,
the RU is powered ON.
Power lamp It is lit (in green) when the circuit breaker is pushed in the "I" position
and power is turned ON. Since the circuit breaker remains in the ON
state, the POWER lamp is always lit.
Cassette loading lamp It is lit (in green) when the RU starts up normally, indicating that
cassette loading is ready. While it is not lit, a cassette cannot be
loaded.
Cassette processing lamp It is lit (in green) while the cassette loaded into the RU is being
processed. It blinks when the IP erasure is complete and goes out
when the IP is ejected to the cassette.
Cassette removal lamp It is lit (in blue) when removal of a processed cassette is ready.
Backlight OFF lamp It blinks (in green) when the RU comes into the HIBERNATION mode.
CALL lamp It is lit (in yellow) when an error of level 0 or level 1 occurs.
Circuit breaker ON (1): Main power ON

OFF (0): Main power OFF
Keep ON for usual operation.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-3
1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents
The language to be displayed on the operation panel and the window vary as shown below
depending on the “LANGUAGE” and “SCREEN TYPE” selected at the time of installation of
RU software.
u NOTE u
The Configuration setting on the DX Console need be changed according to the “SCREEN
TYPE” of the RU. The connection between the RU and the DX Console is not assured if
different selection is made.
- When SCREEN TYPE is “CLINIC”, only “1:1 connection” is available.
- When SCREEN TYPE is “HOSPITAL”, only “N:N connection” is available.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-4
1.4 Machine Components
1.4.1 Unit Locations 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-5
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions
Symbol Name Type Function
1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit - 1 SA1 Cassette IN sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is loaded, and is in
CLOSE state when the cassette is loaded.
SA2 Cassette hold PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is held, and is in
sensor CLOSE state when the cassette is held.
SA9 "15x30 cassette" PI (5 mm) The sensor determines a 15x30 cassette. It is in OPEN
identifying sensor state when the 15x30 cassette is inserted, and in CLOSE
state when a cassette of another size is inserted.
SA11 Cassette ejection PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette is ejected, is in
sensor CLOSE state when the cassette is inserted, and in OPEN
state when the cassette is ejected.
SA16 Inch/metric sensor PI (5mm) The sensor detects the type (inch/metric) of a small-sized
cassette. The sensor is in CLOSE state when a small-
sized metric cassette is loaded, and is in OPEN state
when a small-sized inch cassette is loaded.
SOLA1 Cassette hold pin Power down Holds/releases the cassette hold pin. The sensor is in
solenoid solenoid OFF state when holding and in ON state when releasing.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-6
1.5.2 Cassette Set Unit - 2

MA1 Cassette cover opening Two-phase
Drives the IP retaining arm, the cassette cover-open
mechanism driving pulse motor
mechanism and the debris fall prevention shutter.
motor
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-7

SA3 Debris fall prevention PI (5 mm) The sensor detects whether the debris fall prevention
shutter sensor shutter opens or closes, is in OPEN state when the
debris fall prevention shutter opens, and in CLOSE
state when the shutter closes.
SA7 Cassette cover opening PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the IP retaining arm, the
mechanism HP sensor cassette cover-open mechanism and the debris fall
prevention shutter are at the home position (HP), and
is in CLOSE state when they are at the home position.
SA8 Cassette cover closing PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette cover-close
mechanism HP sensor mechanism is at the home position, and is in CLOSE
state when the mechanism is at the home position.
SA10 Old/new cassette PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the IP in the cassette is
judgment sensor pressed, and is in OPEN state when the IP is pressed.
It also detects whether a new cassette or an old
cassette is inserted, is in OPEN state when the new
cassette is inserted, and stays in CLOSE state when
the old cassette is inserted.
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the cassette cover-close
position sensor mechanism is at a close-cover position, and comes
into CLOSE state.
MA2 Cassette cover closing DC motor Drives the cassette cover-close mechanism.
mechanism driving
motor
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-8

SA4 IP dropping sensor Separate The sensor detects that the IP drops. An error is
(SA4-1, transmitting detected when the sensor is in CLOSE state with
SA4-2) type sensor the IP having dropped before suction, or when it is in
CLOSE state after the IP is returned to the cassette
and before the cassette cover closes.
SA4-1: Light emitting side
SA4-2: Light receiving side
SA6 Suction arm HP sensor PI (5 mm) The sensor detects that the removal arm is at the
home position, and is in CLOSE state when the arm is
at the home position.
MA3 Suction arm driving Two-phase
Drives the removal arm.
motor pulse motor
MA4 IP transport motor Two-phase
Conveys the IP.
pulse motor
PA1 IP suction pump DC pump Sucks the IP. It sucks the IP turned ON.
SVA1 IP air leak valve Solenoid Feeds the air to the suction cup to leak the IP from the
valve suction cup. It leaks the IP when turned ON.
SVA2 IP suction path Solenoid Changes over the suction modes.
changeover valve valve ON : Two suction cups vacuum-retain an IP other
than a 15 x 30 size IP.
OFF : One suction cup vacuum-retains a 15 x 30 size
IP.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-9
1.5.5 Subscanning Unit - 1

SC1 Grip release/Dust PI (5 mm) Detects that the grip release mechanism and dust
remove HP sensor remove mechanism are at their home positions (HP).
Sensor becomes OPEN when they are at HPs.
SC3 IP sensor 1 PI (19 mm) Detect the IP. When the leading edge of IP reaches
this sensor, the signal is sent to the SND board.
Then, the IP conveyance speed changes from
normal conveyance speed to reading conveyance
speed. Sensor becomes OPEN when IP is detected.
SC9 "15x30/24x30 IP width" Reflecting-type
Detects the size of remaining IPs during bootup.
identifying sensor photo-sensor
BCRC1 Barcode reader Barcode reader Reads IP barcode.
MC1 Side-positioning IP Two-phase
Conveys the IP.
transport motor pulse motor
MC2 Grip release/Dust Two-phase Drives the grip release mechanism and dust remove
remove motor pulse motor mechanism.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-10
1.5.6 Subscanning Unit - 2

SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light
(SED27A) receiving Detects the tip of the IP to be read.
element
SZ2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5 mm) Detects that the grip release mechanism is at its home
position (HP).
MZ1 Subscanning motor Two-phase
Conveys the IP.
pulse motor
MZ2 Grip release motor Two-phase
Drives the grip mechanism.
pulse motor
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MD-11
1.5.7 Housing

SG1 IP sensor 2 PI (19 mm) Detects that the IP being conveyed is present.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-12
1.6 Board Locations 1.6.2 Erasure Unit
1.6.1 Housing
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-13
1.6.3 Scanning Optics Unit 1.6.5 Subscanning Unit
1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-14
2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.1.2 Flow of Network Setting Data
u NOTE u l Settable items and default values

The settings are made from the RU PC-TOOL. The settable items and their default values
In this chapter, the "RU Application", "RU IP Address", and "RU Configuration" are referred to
are as follows.
shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.
Setup items Setting means Default values
RU IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.10
2.1 Data Flow between RU and Console RU subnet mask RU PC-TOOL 255.255.0.0
The exchange of data between the RU and Console is described below. RU default gateway RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.0
FTP server IP address RU PC-TOOL 172.16.1.20
2.1.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing
RU secure IP address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
RU secure net address RU PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
l Flow of image data
The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the CPU board, and transferred
l Flow of network setting data
to the Console via the network.
The network setting data is not written into the CPU board only by clicking [SET] button on
l Flow of log data the RU PC-TOOL window. You need click [UPDATE] button to write the network setting data
- The log data is written into the FTP server upon RU shutdown processing or upon into the CPU board.
occurrence of a FATAL error. The contents set from the RU PC-TOOL are stored on the CPU board FLASH ROM.
- The log data is retained in the FTP server until a certain amount of that data is reached, Console RU
and, once that amount is exceeded, the data is overwritten on a first-in, first-out basis.
Console RU RU PC-TOOL CPU board

Image data
Network setting FLASH ROM
data
FTP server CPU board
COMMON FLASH ROM [SET]
Network setting
Memory (SDRAM) [UPDATE] data
Image data
Log data Log data

FRRB102001.ai
RU-specific data
FRRB102002.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-15
2.2 Error Handling 2.3 What Is Sleep Mode?
The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where it is The "Sleep mode" is such that, in order to save power, the conditions in the
inoperable. machine automatically change to the power-saving mode when the RU is not operated within
a specified period of time.
n Error Handling
When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and IP n Operation in the Sleep Mode
reading, the IP is returned to the cassette. Upon entering the Sleep mode, only the power of the CPU board is kept ON, while the power
of other components is left OFF.
n Cases where Retry Is Impossible (FATAL Error) Only the power/erasing mode indicator lamp on the operation panel lights up in green in the
(1) When the function of the CPU board stops. Sleep mode.
(2) When the power supply voltage output stops.
n Transition to the Sleep Mode
l Transition requirements
- If "Sleep mode ON" is set in the CONFIGURATION and the RU is not operated within the
preset "Sleep mode transition time" while the RU remains in READY state, the machine
transits to the Sleep mode.
- The stand-by switch is kept pressed for 4 seconds.
- When the Console is shut down.
l Setting the Sleep mode

You can specify whether the Sleep mode is to be used and the period of time in which the
machine transits to the Sleep mode in the CONFIGURATION.
- Whether the Sleep mode is to be used
Set by the “Sleep mode Change” command in the CONFIGURATION.
- Time to transit to the Sleep mode
Set by the “Sleep Mode Change Time ([min])” command in the CONFIGURATION.
n Recovery from Sleep Mode
l Recover requirements
Press the stand-by switch.
l Processing upon recovery

Upon recovery from the Sleep mode, the RU performs a home-positioning operation of the
suction arm.
In addition, the initial self-diagnosis of the mechanical components takes place, as well as
home-positioning of the RU suction arm, under one of the following conditions.
- The mechanical components are located at other than the home positions.
- One of sensors detects an IP.
- A cassette is set in the RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-16
2.4 RU Bootup Processing 2.5 RU Termination Processing
The following self-diagnoses are carried out after the power is turned ON. Connection Termination processing of the mechanism and the log data storage take place.
verification between the RU and the Console is also carried out concurrently with the self-
u NOTE u
diagnoses.
If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will not be
n Initialization of the Mechanical Components saved.
The initialization of the mechanical components consists of the following five stages.
l Before IP search stage n Flow of RU Shutdown Processing

The cassette cover opening mechanism is moved to the reference position, and the suction (1) "Shutdown processing" command
arm is moved to the home position. Two instructions are available for a case where “system shutdown of the Console is
carried out” and a case where “the stand-by switch of the RU is pressed”.
l IP search stage
The motor is rotated by an appropriate amount to convey the IP to a position where it can (2) Execute "saving of log data", and turn OFF the power.
be confirmed by the sensor, on the assumption that the IP is located at a position where it Saving of log data:
cannot be detected by the sensor within the machine. Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server.
l After IP search stage

The suction arm is moved to the home position.
l Remaining IP ejection stage

When an IP is found within the machine during the IP search stage, its size is measured and
the IP is returned to the cassette. If a cassette is not set in the RU, the message prompting
to set an empty cassette appears.
l After remaining IP ejection

The self-diagnosis of the cassette cover closing mechanism is carried out, and the cassette
hold is released.
n Initialization of the Scanner Mechanism

The scanner mechanism is initialized.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-17
3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected
Fuse mounted Power Fuse

Component to be protected
Board supply No.
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function
CPU63A board +5V F20 Barcode reader
To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply voltage +5V F13 SYN27A, SED27A
output detection function, which offers the following features:
+5V F7 PNL63A
- Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that serves to isolate a fault.
+12V F19 PNL63A
- The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly monitors
the power supply voltage output. SND27A board +24V F8 IP suction pump : PA1
- The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current detection +24V F9 Driver IC : U14
circuits (points) in which an error has occurred.
- The DC motors are protected by a driver circuit (mounted on the board) which incorporates +5V F10 Sensor :
an overcurrent protection circuit. The driver circuit always detects a current and outputs a SG1, SC3, SC9, SZ2, SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4-1, SA4-2,
SA6 ,SA7, SA8, SA9, SA10, SA11, SA12, SC1, SA16
current of up to 2 A. If it detects the current larger than 2 A, it stops outputting the current
by the protection circuit. PIF63A board +12V F1 CPU63A
+5V F20 CPU63A
3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection
+24V F3 CPU63A
Circuit and the Components to Be Protected
+24V F12 SND27A
Protection circuit +15V F4 CPU63A
Power supply Component to be protected
mounted part
-15V F5 CPU63A
SND27A board +24 V DC motor: MA2
ERS37A board +24V F1 LED
REFERENCE
The pulse motors (MA1, MA3, MA4, MC1, MZ1 and MZ2) are protected by the PIF63A board
fuse (F12).
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-18
3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram
Sensor drive board: SND27A

F8 IP suction pump: PA1
F9 DRV Pulse motor: MC2
DRV Pulse motor: MA1

Alpha II Power supply Power interface board: PIF63A
+12V F1 DRV Pulse motor: MC1

+5V
+5V F10 Sensors: SG1, SC1, SC3, SC9,
+24V
SZ2, SA1, SA2, SA3,
F2 SA4-1, SA4-2, SA6,
SA7, SA8, SA9, SA10,
+15V F4
SA11, SA12, SA16
-15V F5
DRV Pulse motor: MZ1
+24V F3
DRV Pulse motor: MZ2
F12
DRV DC motor: MA2
CPU board: CPU63A

+12V
+5V IP leading-edge detection board:
F13
+24V SED27A
Start-point detection board :
SYN27A
F20 Barcode reader
PNL board: PNL63A
+15V
F7
-15V
F19 Fuse
Fuse, and blown fuse detection circuit

+5V
LED erasure board: ERS37A
+24V
F1 LED DRV Driver circuit incorporating an overcurrent
+24V
protection circuit (upper limit of 2 A)
LED erasure board: ERS37A
DRV Driver circuit without an overcurrent
F1 LED protection circuit XL2A103004.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-19
3.2 Erasure Unit Control
n Erasure Unit Control

The erasure LED control circuit is located on the ERS board. It is for turning ON/OFF the
LED and controlling detection of unlit LED.
n Erasure Operation
Three kinds of operations are used, one for erasure after the IP reading (routine erasure) and
the other for erasure when the erasure button on the RU operation panel is pressed (primary
erasure/secondary erasure).
The difference between the two modes is whether or not an image is to be output.
- Routine erasure
A dose exposed to the IP is measured, and the erasing method is changed depending
on the detected dose. The dose is measured when the image is read by the scanner
unit (light-collecting unit).
- Primary erasure
The IP is erased similarly to routine erasure. Difference from the routine erasure is that
no image is output.
- Secondary erasure
Difference from the primary erasure is that the erasure is performed periodically
regardless of an X-ray dose exposed to the IP.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-20
3.3 LEDs on the SND27A Board and the CPU63A Board LED No.
(illumination Name Significance when the LED lights or flashes
color)
3.3.1 LEDs on the SND27A Board D18 (green) Suction arm HP Lit when the removal arm is at the home position/
Unlit when the removal arm is at another position
D21 (green) ERS37A board Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/
Unlit when not detected
D24 (green) Cassette cover opening Lit when the IP retaining arm, the cassette cover opening
mechanism HP mechanism, and the debris fall prevention shutter are at their
home positions/Unlit otherwise
D27 (green) Cassette cover closing Lit when the cassette cover closing mechanism is at the
mechanism HP home position/Unlit otherwise
D30 (green) 15x30 cassette Lit when a cassette other than the 15x30 cassette is loaded/
identification Unlit the 15x30 cassette is loaded
D33 (green) Sensor not connected Always lit after the machine power is turned ON
D36 (green) ERS37A board Lit when lighting of the erasure lamp is detected/
Unlit when not detected
D39 (green) Cassette ejection Lit when the cassette is loaded/
Unlit when the cassette is ejected
D42 (green) Cassette cover close Lit when the cassette cover closing mechanism is at the
position position of closing the cassette cover/
Unlit when the mechanism is not at the closing position
D45 (green) IP drop Lit when the IP drops/Unlit otherwise
D49 (green) IP sensor 2 Lit when the IP being conveyed is present/
Unlit when no IP is present
D51 (green) IP sensor 1 Lit when no IP is detected/Unlit when an IP is detected
D52 (green) 15x30/24x30 IP width Lit when no remaining IP is detected during bootup/
identification Unlit when detected
D53 (green) Grip release HP sensor Lit when the grip mechanism is at the home position/
Unlit otherwise
D59 (green) DSP1 Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON
D60 (green) DSP1 Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise
D61 (green) DSP2 Always flashes after the machine power is turned ON
LED No.
(illumination Name Significance when the LED lights or flashes D62 (green) DSP2 Lit when the DSP1 communicates with CAN/Unlit otherwise
color) D7 (orange) Cassette cover closing Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D6 (green) Cassette IN Lit when the cassette is loaded/ mechanism driving motor
Unlit when the cassette is not loaded D10 (orange) Cassette hold solenoid Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D9 (green) Cassette hold Lit when the cassette is held/Unlit otherwise D13 (orange) Cassette hold solenoid Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D12 (green) Debris fall prevention Lit when the shutter is closed/ D16 (orange) IP leak Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
shutter Unlit when the shutter opens
D19 (orange) Suction switchover Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
D15 (green) Old/new cassette Lit when the cassette IP is not retained or an old cassette is
judgement loaded/ D56 (orange) IP suction pump Lit when driven/Unlit when stopped
Unlit when the IP is retained and a new cassette is loaded
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-21
3.3.2 LEDs on the CPU63A Board LED No.
(illumination Significance when the LED lights or flashes
color)
D7 (green) Lit when communicating with the PC/Unlit otherwise
D8 (green) Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected
D10 (green) Lit during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D11 (green) Always flashes 45 seconds after the machine power is turned ON
D15 (green) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D16 (green) Polygon speed HR_MODE enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D17 (green) PMT artificial voltage ON enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D18 (green) PMT artificial light source forcible OFF enabled (unlit during normal operation)
D19 (green) Lit when the IP drops and during scanning/Unlit otherwise
D21 (green) For debugging use (Normally unlit)
D22 (green) For debugging use (Lit during scanning)/Unlit otherwise
D23 (green) For debugging use (Always lit 20 seconds after the machine power is turned ON)
D27 (red) Lit when the high-voltage switch is turned ON/
Unlit when the high-voltage switch is turned OFF
CN10
Lit when the LAN cable is connected with the PC/Unlit when disconnected
(green and orange)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-22
3.4 Checking the Voltage n PIF63A Board
u INSTRUCTION u
3.4.1 Checking the Voltage of the PIF63A Board / Alfha II Power Source Replace the board if the power supply voltage is out of the standard range at a measurement
point.
n Board Location and Measurement Points

Measurement Voltage standard Adjustment
Voltage
point range value
+24 V TP8 23.0 to 25.0 V 24.5 V
+5 V TP2 4.8 to 5.2 V 5.1 V
+15 V TP3 14.4 to 15.6 V 15.25 V
+12 V TP1 11.5 to 12.5 V 12.0 V
-15 V TP4 -15.6 to -14.1 V -15.25 V
n Alpha II Power Source

u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Voltage adjustment is not necessary.
- Voltage output range: +21.6 to 26.4 V (±10%) between the 5 and 8 pins and between the 1
and 4 pins of the CN51.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-23
4. Descriptions of Scanner Mechanism and n IP Conveyance
Its Operation m CPU board; Setting of reading conditions

Conditions are set according to a combination of the IP size, IP type, and the reading
mode that is preset with the Console.
4.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence m Polygon (POL); Polygon diagnostics
m Laser (LD); ON
REFERENCE
The I/O names (CPU board, polygon (POL), etc.) in the following sequence correspond to m IP sensor 2 (SG1); IP size measurement
the I/O names in illustration of the scanner controller unit, and are denoted in the form of:
n IP Moved to the Subscanning Unit
m I/O name; description of operation for that I/O name
m Leading-edge sensor (SED); IP leading-edge detection
[Example] m CPU board; Correction data initial setting
Detects the laser light reflected from the IP.
This means that the CPU board performs initial setting of the correction data.
m PMT board, CPU board; Start of image reading
{MD:4.3_Image Data Flow}
n Machine Power ON
m Grip release motor (MZ2); Gripping/releasing of driving shaft/driven shaft
m CPU board; Correction data initial setting
m Trailing edge detection (SED); The trailing edge of the IP is detected
m CPU board; Scanner self-diagnostics
(completion of reading is detected)
{MD:4.4_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}
n Reading Termination Processing
n Cassette Loading
m Laser (LD); OFF
m Polygon (POL); Start
Since it takes time for the polygon to get stable, it is started at the same time as the m Polygon (POL); Stop
cassette is loaded.
m High voltage power supply (HV); Idling
m CPU board; Erasing level detection, error determination, change-of-
S-value detection
n IP Moved to the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide

The IP moves to the post-reading conveyance guide, and the reading operation is
complete.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-24
4.2 Correction Data
Shading correction data, sensitivity data, format data, and speed correction data are located
in the FLASH ROM on the CPU board. The data is copied into the SDRAM when the power
of the machine is turned ON, and used in operation.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-25
4.3 Image Data Flow
The flow of image data is described below.
Numerals (1), (2), and so forth at the beginning of the items correspond to (1), (2), and so
forth in the image data flow illustration.
It should be noted that the image data is sent to the Console nearly concurrently with
reading.
(1) When the laser light from the scanning optics unit hits the IP, it becomes
luminescence data, which is read by the photomultiplier through the light-
collecting guide.
(2) The resulting data is sent, in the form of analog data, from the photomultiplier
board (PMT board) to the CPU board.
(3) Analog data is converted to digital data (AD conversion) on the CPU board.
(4) Digital data is output to the DSP via the FIFO, and subjected to image processing
and shading correction. Thereafter, it is temporarily stored in the SDRAM on the
CPU board.
(5) The image data stored in the SDRAM is sent to the Console via the network under
control of the main CPU located on the CPU board.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-26
4.4 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem
(1) Error code
The scanner-related error codes, which are created by a combination of the control
signal of each I/O and the reference signal of the board, are configured to facilitate
identification of their causes.
(2) Scanner unit self-diagnostics

(A) Polygon start
(B) Laser ON
(C) Scanner self-diagnostics
Spurious current is made to flow, and reading takes place. Whether the reading
can correctly take place is also checked.
(D) Laser OFF
(E) Error check for self-diagnostics
(3) Polygon diagnostics

It is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a predetermined time
after the polygon is started.
(4) Error detection during reading

During reading, an error caused by a timeout is detected.
(5) Check after reading is completed

In order to check whether abnormal is found with reading operation, error check is
performed upon completion of reading.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-27
5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components

and Their Operations
Function Description
5.1 IP Conveyance Flow Feeds an IP from a

Opens the cover of the cassette that is inserted into the
[1] cassette.
cassette set unit. Feeds the IP from the cassette and conveys
it to the erasure unit.
Cassette
Removes dust from the Operates the brush rollers to remove dust and other foreign
[2] IP surface. matter from the IP surface.
[3] Reads an image. Reads an image that is recorded on the IP.

Cassette set unit
[4] Conveys the IP. Transfers the IP, whose image has been read.
Removes dust from the Drops into the brush roller assembly the dust that was
[5] brush rollers. deposited on the brush rollers.
Erases an image. Erases an image that is recorded on the IP.
[1] [6]
Loads an IP into a Loads the IP, whose image has been erased, into the cassette,
[6] cassette. and closes the cassette cover. Ejects the cassette.
Erasure
unit
[5]
Light- [2]
collecting
unit Subscanning
unit
Scanning
optics
unit
[4]
[3]
FRRB105001.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-28
5.2 Cassette Set Unit l From cassette insertion to cassette hold
When a cassette is inserted into the machine, the SA1 and SA11 close. Also, the movable
This section describes the operations that the sensors and mechanisms in the cassette set guide assembly and 15x30 cassette movable guide assembly lowers in accordance with
unit perform during routine processing. cassette size to open/close the "15x30 (cm) cassette" identifying sensor (SA9) and the inch/
metric detecting sensor (SA16).
5.2.1 Feed Conveyance Operation The size of the inserted cassette is determined in accordance with the OPEN/CLOSE status
of the SA9 and SA16.
Cassette size SA9 SA16
n Feed Conveyance Operation
15x30 (cm) cassette CLOSE CLOSE
Small cassette size (metric):
l Conditions before the cassette insertion OPEN CLOSE
24x30 (cm), 18x24 (cm)
The sensors are under the following conditions before the cassette is inserted. The dust
Small cassette size
cover prevents foreign matter (ballpoint pen, clip or the like) or dust from dropping into the OPEN OPEN
(inch): 10x12 (inch), 8x10 (inch)
machine before the cassette is inserted.
Large cassette size:
OPEN CLOSE
14x17 (inch), 14x14 (inch), 35x43 (cm), 35x35 (cm)
When the SA1 and SA11 close, the SOLA1 is OFF, to hold the cassette.
When the SOLA1 is OFF, the SA2 opens to detect that the cassette is held.
SA1 : OPEN SA16

SA2 : CLOSE SA16
SOLA1
SA3 : OPEN
SA10
SA4 : OPEN
SA6 : CLOSE
SA11 SA8
SA7 : CLOSE
SA8 : CLOSE
SA12
SA9 : CLOSE
SA10 : CLOSE SA2
SA11
SA11 : OPEN SA4-1
SA12 : OPEN
SA16 : CLOSE SA9 SA9 SA2
SOLA1 : ON SA6
SOLA1
SA7 SA1 SA1
SA4-2 SA3
XL2A105003.ai
XL2A105004.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-29
l From cassette hold to determination of IP conveyance l IP retainer operation
When it is detected that the cassette is held, the MA1 is driven to close the debris fall When the IP can be conveyed, the MA1 is again driven, and the IP retaining arm retains the
prevention shutter. When the shutter closes, the SA3 closes and the SA7 opens. When the IP in the cassette. When the IP retaining arm moves from its home position, the SA10 opens
SA3 closes and the SA7 opens, the machine determines that the IP can be conveyed. and detects that the IP is retained.
REFERENCES REFERENCE
- The debris fall prevention shutter prevents a foreign matter (ballpoint pen, clip or the like) Pressing the cassette button by the IP retaining arm to retain the IP, the IP is prevented from
from falling into the conveyance path in the machine, even when the shutter of the cassette falling until the IP is sucked after the cassette cover opens.
inlet is open. Concurrently, discrimination of a new cassette and an old cassette also takes place. When
- The SA7 detects whether the debris fall prevention shutter is at its home position. a new cassette is inserted, the SA10 is kept open and when an old cassette is inserted, it is
kept closed.
SA10 : OPEN
SA7 : OPEN
SA3 : CLOSE
FRRB105004.ai
FRRB105005.ai
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MD-30
l Opening of the cassette cover l From suction of the IP to its conveyance
The MA1 is again driven when it is detected that the SA10 opens, to cause the cassette When the cassette cover opens, the MA3 is driven to move the IP removal arm to the sucking
cover opening pin to rise and cause the cassette cover to open (SA7 opens). position. When the IP removal arm moves to the sucking position, the SA6 opens.
If the IP drops before the conveyance due to a failure in retaining the IP, the SA4 closes. The IP is sucked by the IP suction pump (PA1).
The IP removal arm, when sucking the IP, moves it to the conveyance start position, and then
starts to convey the IP.
SA7 : OPEN SA6 : OPEN
SA4 SA5 : OPEN
FRRB105007.ai
REFERENCE FRRB105008.ai
The IP drop sensor (SA4: separate sensor) detects that the IP has dropped due to a failure in
retaining the IP or the like.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MD-31
l IP suction
<When the IP is to be vacuum-retained by the right- and left-hand suction cups>
The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns OFF and the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2)
turns ON. The PA1 operates so that the right- and left-hand suction cups vacuum-retain
the IP.
ON OFF
PA1 SVA2 SVA1
FRRB105009.ai
<When the IP is to be vacuum-retained by the reference side suction cups>

The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns OFF and the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2)
turns OFF. The PA1 operates so that the left-hand suction cup vacuum-retains the IP.
OFF OFF
PA1
SVA2 SVA1
FRRB105010.ai
<When IP suction is to be released>

The IP air leak valve (SVA1) turns ON and the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2)
turns ON. This releases IP suction.
PA1 ON ON
SVA2 SVA1
FRRB108011.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-32
5.2.2 Load Conveyance Operation l Returning the IP to the inside of the cassette
When the suction cup sucks the IP, the IP removal arm moves and moves the IP into the
cassette. When the IP is moved into the cassette, the IP retaining arm moves to retain the IP
n Load Conveyance Operation in the cassette. When the IP retaining arm moves, the SA10 opens.
l From reading to erasure of images
The IP which has been read is conveyed to the erasure unit. Images on the IP are erased
when the IP passes through the erasure unit.
l IP suction
The IP removal arm moves to the IP suction position to suck the IP when the IP is conveyed
to a predetermined position, and the SA6 opens. When the suction cup comes into contact
with the IP, the IP suction pump is turned ON to suck the IP. SA10 : OPEN
FRRB105013.ai
SA6 : OPEN l Moving the IP removal arm to the home position

When the SA10 opens and it is detected that the IP is retained, the suction cup releases the
IP it is sucking. After releasing the IP, the IP removal arm returns to the home position, and
the SA6 closes.
FRRB105012.ai
SA6 : CLOSE
FRRB105014.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-33
l Closing the cassette cover l Moving the cassette cover closing assembly
When the SA6 closes and it is detected that the IP removal arm has returned to the home When the IP retainer is released, the cassette cover closing assembly moves to the home
position, the cassette cover closing assembly moves to close the cassette cover. The SA8 position. The SA12 opens and the SA8 closes then.
opens and the SA12 closes then.
SA8 : CLOSE
SA8 : OPEN
SA12
: OPEN
SA12
: CLOSE
FRRB105017.ai
l Opening the debris fall prevention shutter

FRRB105015.ai
l Releasing the IP retainer When the cassette cover closes, the debris fall prevention shutter opens to prevent foreign
When the cassette cover closes, the IP retaining arm moves to the home position and the matter from dropping into the conveyance path. The SA7 closes and the SA3 opens then.
SA10 closes.
SA10 : CLOSE
SA7 : CLOSE
SA3 : OPEN FRRB105018.ai
FRRB105016.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-34
l Releasing the cassette hold l Removing the cassette
When the debris fall prevention shutter opens, the SOLA1 is turned ON, to release the When the cassette is removed, the shutter closes. SA1 and SA11 open, and SA9 and S16
cassette hold. close.
When the SOLA1 is turned ON, the SA2 closes.
When the cassette hold is released, the cassette can be removed.
SA16 : CLOSE
SA11 : OPEN
SOLA1 : ON
SA2 : CLOSE
FRRB105019.ai
SA9 : CLOSE
SA1 : OPEN
XL2A105005.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-35
5.3 Erasure Unit n Operation of the Erasure Unit
The operation of the erasure unit differs depending on whether the IP is being fed or loaded.
The erasure unit has three functions, that is, cleaning the IP, erasing images and cleaning the
brush roller. l Operation when feeding the IP
It cleans the IP when feeding the IP, and erases the IP and cleans the brush roller when The brush roller on the lower part of the erasure unit removes dust from the IP. The brush
loading the IP. roller does not rotate by the half-clutch spur gears.
n Configuration of the Erasure Unit, and the IP Conveyance Path l Operation when loading the IP
The erasure unit has the following two functions when loading the IP.
The IP is conveyed between the lamp assembly and the reflection plate. The IP conveyance
- Erasing the image
roller is driven by the MA4 located on the cassette set unit.
- Cleaning the brush roller
Erasure unit
IP front IP rear surface

surface
(exposure surface) Cassette set unit
rubber roller
Filter
Reflection plate
Lamp
(LED)
Brush roller
Subscanning unit
rubber roller
XL2A105001.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-36
5.3.1 IP Dust Removal by Brush Rollers and Cleaning the Brush
Roller
The brush rollers, which are mounted at the bottom of the erasure unit, are used to remove
dust and other foreign matter from the IP. The half-clutch spur gears, which are mounted
on the brush roller assembly, function so that the brush roller operation in the IP reading
sequence differs from the one in the IP erasure sequence.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-37
5.4 Subscanning Unit 5.4.2 Gripping Operation for IP Reading
The cam attached to the MZ2 and the SZ2 drive the grip release arm. While the IP is
5.4.1 IP Reading gripped/released, the IP is conveyed and read.
If the IP shifts due to the vibration of the motor or oscillation of the machine during the IP
When the IP passes over the center roller, laser light is radiated from the scanning optics reading, abnormalities in images might result.
unit.
When the laser radiated from the scanning optics unit comes against the IP, the image
recorded on the IP emits light. The light emitted from the IP is directly gathered by the light-
collecting guide or reflected by the light collecting mirror and then gathered by the light-
collecting guide.
The light collected on the light-collecting guide is fed to the photomultiplier (PMT board) and
processed as image data.
The configuration of the scanning optics unit, the light-collecting guide, and the rollers is as
follows.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-38
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MD-39
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 11, 43, 49-64, 72-83
Troubleshooting (MT)

01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-1
1. Overview of Troubleshooting n Error Classifications

RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:
1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code

1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the Console screen to display
an error code upon error detection
Trouble occurred
2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console
Console-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
Checking the Error Log
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
{MT:1.2.1_Checking the Error Log} Errors that result in image abnormalities due to a scratched IP, laser light blockage caused
by dust, or electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
1. Errors causing the Console screen to display an error code
4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to
detect an error code
{MT:1.2_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Errors that occur due to a CPU board, interrupt the progress of a process, and cause the
inability to detect an error code
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
2. Errors with inability of the RU to communicate with the Console Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU board due to an improper
FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
4. Analysis of errors causing the inability to display an error code

and the inability of the machine to boot
5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-out
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about errors
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of error encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
codes. If the error log is not backed up beforehand, the information about errors encountered during
troubleshooting may overwrite the previously logged error information. Therefore, you may
START lose the information about errors that occurred during the user’s use of the machine.
n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log

When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code displayed
on the Console represents the last-encountered error.
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the encountered
{MU:4.23_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL} trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
Back up the ERROR LOG and CONFIGURAION.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
{MU:4.18_ERROR DB}
END
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-3
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error
(1) Group the errors that occurred.
occurrence timing.
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that
occurred first). l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the Console
Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"
(Example)
indications.
- Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence groups,
because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14 minutes. Error Occurrence
- The first error in Group A is "12302". code date
n When an Error Occurred after "Time Data" Was Acquired from the Console 12256 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00257D tiphscan____ Error code that occurred second
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
12255 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00258D tiphscan____
Error codes displayed on the Console screen 3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Perform troubleshooting with this error
Error code that occurred last code. FRRB201003.ai
Error code that l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the Console
A
occurred second The resulting "occurrence date/time" indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25".
Code of the error Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds" position
that occurred first. (underlined) of the "occurrence time" field.
B Perform The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.
troubleshooting
with this error Error Occurrence Occurrence
code. code date time
FRRB201001.ai
10300 0000.00.00 00:00:19 00257D tiphscan____
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817 Error code that occurred second
n When an Error Occurred before "Time Data" Was Acquired from the 10302 0000.00.00 00:00:10 00258D tiphscan____
3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Console Perform troubleshooting with this error
code.
Error codes displayed on the Console screen
FRRB201004.ai
n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred First

Error code that occurred last
If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with the
Error code that
A error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not easily be
occurred second
accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for the encountered
Code of the error
trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct troubleshooting.
that occurred first.
Perform
B
troubleshooting
with this error
code.
FRRB201002.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-4
1.2.3 Analysis on the Error Code Table
When the error causing the failure is identified, see the “Probable Cause and Remedy” in the
error code table, and proceed with the operation.
n Error Code Table Description

The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search.
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence
conditions.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-5
n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1XYZZ 1:
2:
Image processing CPU
Scanner control (for front side)
3: Conveyance control
00 to 99: Reference number for each error category
4: Overall control
0 to 9: Error category
5: Network control
0 to 4: Error level
6: Scanner control (for back side)
1: 1 for all RU errors
FRRB201005.ai
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
l X: Error level 9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
Error level notations
FATAL error: 0
l ZZ: Reference number
- The user is notified of an error occurrence. It is managed according to each error category.
- Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette or IP,
etc.).
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is necessary
to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
- Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
- If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time with
another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 3
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-6
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch when troubleshooting is to be made with
the machine cover removed and the power supply turned ON.
The photomultiplier gets damaged if the power supply of the machine is turned ON
while the high-voltage switch is ON.
(1) Remove the front cover and the right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
(2) Remove the right-hand side board box plate.
{MC:3.2_Plate}
(3) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S11) of the CPU board.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-7
2. Error Code Table

Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU - Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
10001 File open error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file - Replace the CPU board.
residing in the DRAM.
[During bootup]
10002 File read error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
[During bootup]
10003 File format error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
[During bootup]
When the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU
- Update the version and repair the scanner parameter file.
board into the DRAM,
10004 File write error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM.
- Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
- Replace the CPU board.
Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the
DRAM.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-8
Error
Code
[During bootup]
10005 File close error (1) board into the DRAM, error is detected for the file residing in - Restore the scanner machine-specific data to repair it.
- Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the
PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately
after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the SED board connectors.
10207 SED board power supply error An error about the connection (power supply) with the leading- - Replace the SED board.
edge detection (SED) board was detected. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
[During bootup]
HV high voltage power supply - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10220 An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Replace the PMT board.
error of range. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-9
Error
Code
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10222 PMT 15V voltage error An error is detected for the PMT analog power supply signal - Replace the PMT board.
(+15VOKH, 15VOKL). - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
- Check the fuses of the CPU board. Replace the Alpha II power
supply, the PIF63A board and the CPU board if the fuse blowout
recurs immediately after replacement of the fuses.
[During bootup] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
10223 HV-ON high-voltage value error An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Replace the PMT board.
of range when HV is on. - Replace the cables connecting from the PMT board to the CPU
board.
[During bootup] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10240 SYN interval count error An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count. - Replace the scanning optics unit.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU
board.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-10
Error
Code
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10248 Polygon lock timeout (2nd) The polygon OK signal cannot be detected (twice) within the - Replace the scanning optics unit.
specified time after turning on the polygon. - Replace the cables connecting from the SYN board to the CPU
board.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the SED board connectors.
10250 Leading edge detection timeout The interrupt for detecting the leading edge did not occur - Replace the SED board.
within the specified time. - Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
- Check the error log for other errors. If any error occurs, analyze it.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.
10252 Image read error The image reading error occurred. - Replace the scanning optics unit.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-11
Error
Code
[During bootup or routine processing]
10253 FIFO overflow The image buffer FIFO was overflowed.
[During routine processing] - Check the installation of the plate.

10287 Light-shielding check It was detected that the QL value was 80 or more when - Perform the check and the removal/reinstallation of the coaxial cable
detecting S-value shift. of the PMT board.
[During bootup]
The cassette width sensors detected an abnormal - Check for abnormalities in installing the cassette hold mechanism.
combination when the cassette set unit performed a cassette - Check the detecting area of the sensor (SA2) for smears.
Cassette hold sensor hold operation. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no - Reseat the sensor (SA2) connector.
10311
combination inconsistency cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette hold sensor (SA2) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
detected a cassette hold release (CLOSED). The cassette - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present - Replace the sensors.
(OPEN).
[During bootup] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators (SA1 and SA11).
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette sensor combination
10312 an abnormal combination. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
inconsistency (1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). - Replace the sensors.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-12
Error
Code
[When an error occurs in mechanism operations]
- Check assembly of the mechanism.
[During bootup or routine processing] [When the mechanism normally works]

When a home position release operation was performed for - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
the cassette cover closing mechanism, the cassette cover - Reseat the sensor connectors.
closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven. However,
Cassette cover closing - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10325 the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
mechanism HP release error not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although - Check the SND board fuses.
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping
the motor. [When the error 12486 concurrently occurs]
- Update the version to the newest version.
- A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
update. (For design analysis)

When an attempt was made to return the cassette cover [When the mechanism normally works]
closing mechanism to its home position, the cassette cover - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
Cassette cover closing closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven. However, - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10326 mechanism home positioning the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did - Check the SND board fuses.
error not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Although - Replace the sensors or the motors.
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was
exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping [When the error 12486 concurrently occurs]
the motor. - Update the version to the newest version.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-13
Error
Code
- Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
[During bootup] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
When a home positioning operation was performed for the
Debris fall prevention shutter - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10327 cassette cover opening mechanism, it was found that the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
close error during bootup debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
shutter was closed). shutter.
- Replace the sensors.

[During bootup] - Check assembly of the mechanism.
IP hold release error during
10328 cassette cover opening mechanism, it was found that the [When the mechanism normally works]
bootup cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
held and a new cassette was detected). - Reseat the SND board connectors.

When a home positioning operation was performed for the [When the mechanism normally works]
cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one
Cassette cover opening - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10329 pulse. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP - Check the SND board fuses.
mechanism HP detection error sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period - Replace the sensors or the motors.
of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum
retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
driving/stopping the motor. - Update the version to the newest version.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-14
Error
Code
[When the mechanism normally works]
cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover
Debris fall prevention shutter - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
10332 opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven (to
open error (1) perform an approaching operation). However, the debris fall
- Reseat the SND board connectors.
- Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that the shutter was shutter.
open. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors or the motors.

cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover
Debris fall prevention shutter - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
10333 opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven (to
open error (2) perform a returning operation). However, the debris fall
- Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that the shutter was shutter.
open. - Check the SND board fuses.

When a home positioning operation was performed for the [When the mechanism normally works]
Debris fall prevention shutter cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
10334
open error (3) opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one - Reseat the SND board connectors.
pulse. However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
detected that the shutter was open. shutter.
- Check the SND board fuses.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-15
Error
Code

When a suction arm home positioning operation was
- Reseat the sensor connectors.
performed, the suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven.
Suction arm home positioning However, it was impossible to detect that the suction arm HP
10336 - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error sensor (SA6) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries
were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the
system went down. Or, the error was detected when driving/
stopping the motor.
[When the error 12485 or 12491 concurrently occurs]
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
cassette IN sensor and cassette ejection sensor in the - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette size sensor
10340 cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination. The - Reseat the SND board connectors.
combination error (2) cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
was present (OPEN). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) - Replace the sensors.
detected a cassette (CLOSED).
- Check the sensors for smears (on the light-receiving and light-
[During bootup] emitting regions).
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10343 IP drop detection during bootup dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that - Reseat the SND board connectors.
an IP was dropped. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-16
Error
Code
[During bootup] [When the mechanism normally works]

When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
holding arm from the IP holding position, the cassette IP
IP holding arm release error - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10344 holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new - Check the SND board fuses.
during bootup (1) cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, - Replace the sensors or the motors.
the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was
detected when driving the motor. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]

[During bootup]
When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding
- Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
arm from the IP holding position while the cassette cover
IP holding arm release error opening mechanism was in the cassette cover open position,
10345 - Check the SND board fuses.
during bootup (2) the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was
held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the
[When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
error was detected when driving the motor.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-17
Error
Code
Feed IP drop detection during When an IP feed operation was performed for a remaining IP - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10346 - Reseat the SND board connectors.
bootup (1) search process, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP
(CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
[During bootup] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10347 IP sensor combination error dropping sensor (SA4) and conveyor unit IP sensor 1 (SC3) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
were CLOSED (detected an IP). Therefore, the system went - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
down. - Replace the sensors.
[When a conveyance error occurs]

- Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
[During bootup] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the
IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. [When no conveyance error occurs]
Remaining IP conveyance error
10348 However, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) in the cassette set - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
(conveyor unit) unit did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time (did - Reseat the sensor connectors.
not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed - Reseat the SND board connectors.
in the conveyor unit. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-18
Error
Code
[During bootup] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP
transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, [When no conveyance error occurs]
Remaining IP conveyance error
10349 the IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
(sub scanning) within a predetermined period of time (did not detect an IP). It - Reseat the sensor connectors.
is conceivable that the IP may be jammed in the subscanning - Reseat the SND board connectors.
unit. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.

- Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
[When no conveyance error occurs]

[During bootup]
When a remaining IP length measurement process was
Remaining IP length performed, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1)
10353 measurement conveyance error were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit
- Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(1) did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined
period of time. Or, the error was detected when driving one of
the motors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-19
Error
Code

[During bootup]
10354 measurement conveyance error were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor
(2) unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within
a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected
when stopping one of the motors.


[During bootup]
10355 measurement conveyance error were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor
(3) unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within
a predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected
when driving/stopping one of the motors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-20
Error
Code
- Check to make sure that the sensors (SC3 and SC9) normally work
by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
[During bootup] - Replace the sensors.
10356 Nonstandard IP detection When a remaining IP length measurement process was
performed, a nonstandard IP size was detected. [When a conveyance error occurs]

- Check to make sure that the sensor (SC3) normally work by means
of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
[During bootup] - Replace the sensors.
When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed,
the IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven. [When a conveyance error occurs]
Remaining IP side-positioning
10358 However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
error (1) CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the
motor. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP
10359 Remaining IP search error transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven. However,
one of the motor had an error.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-21
Error
Code
When an IP feed operation was performed within the cassette
Feed IP drop detection during - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10360 for a remaining IP ejection process, the IP dropping sensor - Reseat the SND board connectors.
bootup (2) (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
dropped. - Replace the sensors.


When a home positioning operation was performed for the - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
cassette cover opening mechanism, the cassette cover - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Cassette cover opening opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven. - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10361 mechanism home positioning However, it was impossible to detect that the cassette - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) was OPEN or - Check the SND board fuses.
CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor - Replace the sensors or the motors.
status was not detected, and the system went down. Or, the
error was detected when driving/stopping the motor. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-22
Error
Code

When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the IP - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Remaining IP load conveyance transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, IP - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10364
error during bootup (1) sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the - Check the SND board fuses.
error was detected when driving one of the motors. - Replace the sensors or the motors.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-23
Error
Code

[During bootup]
When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the IP
transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, IP
Remaining IP load conveyance - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10365 sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find
error during bootup (2) that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping one of the
motors.

10373 Cassette hold release error An error was detected when releasing the cassette hold.

10379 Cassette hold error An error was detected when holding cassette.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-24
Error
Code

[During routine processing]
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor
Cassette cover opening (MA1) was driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter.
mechanism error However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
(SA7) was CLOSED. Or, the error was detected when driving
the motor.
[During routine processing] - Update the version to the newest version.

10382 IP fall prevention driving error An error was detected when driving the cassette cover - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) for IP fall prevention. update. (For design analysis)

10386 Opening cover error An error was detected when driving the cassette cover - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) to open the cover. update. (For design analysis)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-25
Error
Code
Driving of the suction arm driving motor (MA3), turning on/
off of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning on/off of the suction
10389 Feed IP suction error switching valve (SVA2), and turning on of the IP suction pump
(PA1) were performed in the feed IP suction operation. Error
was detected in either operation.

Turning off of the leak valve (SVA1), turning off of the suction
switching valve (SVA2), driving of the cassette cover opening - Update the version to the newest version.
10390 Feed IP error mechanism driving motor (MA1), driving of the suction arm - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
driving motor (MA3), and driving of the the IP transport motors update. (For design analysis)
(MA4) were performed in the IP-feed operation. Error was
detected in either operation.

[During routine processing] [When the mechanism normally works]

The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
was driven to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10391 IP holding arm release error (1) holding position after IP suction. However, it was found that - Check the SND board fuses.
the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
held and a new cassette was detected). Or, the error was
detected when driving the motor. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-26
Error
Code
Turning on of the IP leak valve (SVA1), turning on of the - Update the version to the newest version.
10392 Feed IP leak error suction switching valve (SVA2), and turning off of the - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
IP suction pump (PA1) were performed in the feed-leak update. (For design analysis)
operation. An error was detected in either operation.


The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
for IP holding was driven. However, it was found that the - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10393 Feed IP holding error cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was - Check the SND board fuses.
held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were - Replace the sensors or the motors.
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the
error was detected when driving the motor. [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-27
Error
Code

The IP transport motor (MA4) was driven to return an IP to
Pre-length-measurement IP the cassette after an IP drop. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in
position detection error (2) the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was
present) within a predetermined period of time. Or, the error
was detected when driving/stopping the motor.

The IP transport motors (MA4/MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped
10396 Feed IP conveyance error in feed-conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an
error.

Feed IP conveyance retry The IP transport motors (MA4/MC1/MZ1) were stopped in
10397 - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
stopped error feed-conveyance operation, and one of the motors had an update. (For design analysis)
error.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-28
Error
Code
When a turn roller nip configuration home positioning was
performed, the turn roller nip configuration driving motor
(MC2) was driven. However, it was impossible to detect that
10400 Turn roller nip HP perform error the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) was OPEN
or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor
status was not detected, and the system went down. Or, the
error was detected when driving/stopping the motor.
When an IP return conveyance operation was performed

during routine processing for the purpose of retrying to read a
BCR read retry conveyance
10404 barcode, the IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven.
error However, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) did not CLOSE (did
not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.

10414 Subscanning conveyance error The IP transport motors (MC1/MZ1) were driven/stopped in - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
reading conveyance, and one of the motors had an error. update. (For design analysis)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-29
Error
Code
[During routing processing]
The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to
perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However,
Post-reading conveyance error IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not
(1) detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was
exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping
the motor.


The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven to
perform an IP erasure conveyance operation. However, IP
10420 Erasure conveyance error sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find
that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping one of the
motors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-30
Error
Code
Turning on of the leak valve (SVA1), turning on of the suction
IP suction error (after IP - Update the version to the newest version.
10421 switching valve (SVA2), and driving of the suction arm driving - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
reading) motor (MA3) were performed in the IP-loading operation. update. (For design analysis)
Error was detected in either operation.
[When an IP drops]
- Check for abnormalities of the IP retaining arm mechanism.
After the cassette IP holding arm was released, it was found [When no IP drops]
that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to - Check for abnormalities of the sensors.
10422 Load IP drop (1) IP detection). Therefore, retries were performed. However,
the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was [When the error 12485 concurrently occurs]
detected when driving the motor. - Update the version to the newest version.
[During routine processing] emitting regions).
After the cassette cover was closed, it was found that the IP - Reseat the sensor connectors.
10423 Load IP drop (2) dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). - Reseat the SND board connectors.
Therefore, retries were performed. However, the maximum - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
retry count was exceeded. - Check the SND board fuses.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-31
Error
Code

[During routine processing] - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) - Reseat the sensor connectors.
was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10424 IP holding error the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
was not held and an old cassette was detected). Although - Check the SND board fuses.
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
exceeded. Or, the error was detected when driving the motor.


When a suction positioning preliminary conveyance operation
was performed for a load IP, the IP transport motor (MA4) was
IP suction positioning - Check the SND board fuses.
10425 driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not
preliminary conveyance error CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period
of time. Or, the error was detected when driving/stopping the

motor.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-32
Error
Code

When a suction positioning conveyance operation was - Reseat the sensor connectors.
performed for a load IP, the IP transport motor (MA4) was
IP suction positioning - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10426 driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
conveyance error not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a - Check the SND board fuses.
predetermined period of time. Or, the error was detected - Replace the sensors or the motors.
when driving/stopping the motor.

Debris fall prevention shutter [When the mechanism normally works]
10427 (MA1) was driven to release a held IP in the load sequence. - Reseat the SND board connectors.
open error However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter - Check the SND board fuses.
sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
shutter.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-33
Error
Code

(MA1) was driven to release a held IP in the load sequence.
However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor
10428 IP hold release error (1) (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was
detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum
retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was detected when
driving the motor.


(MA1) was driven to release a held IP in the load sequence.
However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor
10429 IP hold release error (2) (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was
detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum
driving the motor.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-34
Error
Code

The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1)
Cassette cover opening was driven to achieve cassette cover opening mechanism
home positioning. However, it was found that the debris fall
10430 mechanism home positioning prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter
error was closed). Although retries were performed, the maximum

driving the motor.

In the load IP leak operation, the following was performed:
driving of the IP transport motor (MA4), driving of suction arm - Update the version to the newest version.
10432 IP suction relief error driving motor (MA3), turning off of the IP leak valve (SVA1), - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
turning off of the suction switching valve (SVA2), and turning update. (For design analysis)
off of the IP suction pump (PA1). Error was detected in one of
the operations.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-35
Error
Code

[During routine processing] emitting regions).
After the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor - Reseat the sensor connectors.
IP drop after cassette cover (MA1) was driven to retract the cassette cover opening pin, - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10433
opening (1) it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(due to IP detection). Or, the error was detected when driving - Check the SND board fuses.
the motor. - Replace the sensors or the motors.

emitting regions).
[During routine processing] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
IP drop after cassette cover After a held IP was released in the load sequence, it was
10434 - Reseat the SND board connectors.
opening (2) found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
IP detection). - Check the SND board fuses.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-36
Error
Code

The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven.
However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN
10435 IP conveyance error (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined
period of time. It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed
between the erasure unit and conveyor unit. Or, the error was
detected when driving/stopping the motor.


The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism
Cassette cover closing - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10436 HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined - Check the SND board fuses.
mechanism drive error (1) period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum - Replace the sensors or the motors.
driving/stopping the motor. [When the error 12486 concurrently occurs]
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-37
Error
Code
The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2)
Cassette cover closing - Update the version to the newest version.
10439 was driven and stopped in the operation of home-positioning - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
mechanism drive error (2) the closing cover, and an error was detected in either update. (For design analysis)
operation.

The operation for driving the cassette cover closing
Cassette cover closing - Update the version to the newest version.
10440 mechanism was retried, and the cassette cover closing - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
mechanism drive retry error mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven and stopped. An update. (For design analysis)
error was detected in either operation.

The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) [When the mechanism normally works]
Debris fall prevention shutter was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
10441
open error (4) operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism. - Reseat the SND board connectors.
However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). shutter.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-38
Error
Code

When the cassette cover opening mechanism was moved - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Bootup cassette cover opening from the reference position to the home position, it was found - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10443 mechanism home positioning that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
error (the shutter was open). Although retries were performed, - Check the SND board fuses.
the maximum retry count was exceeded. Or, the error was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
detected when driving the motor.


[During bootup] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven in the operation - Check if the motor is working.
Subscanning grip roller of positioning the subscanning grip roller to the reference - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10444
positioning error side before IP search, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) - Check the SND board fuses.
did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was - Replace the sensors or the motors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-39
Error
Code

- Check if the motor is working.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to freely rotate
Subscanning grip roller free - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10445 the subscanning grip roller, but the subscanning grip sensor
rotation error (SZ2) did not open within the specified time period. Or, error
was detected when driving/stopping the motor.



[During routine processing] - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to make - Check if the motor is working.
Subscanning grip roller home- the subscanning grip roller in the reference position, but - Reseat the SND board connectors.
10446
positioning error the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the - Check the SND board fuses.
specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/ - Replace the sensors or the motors.
stopping the motor.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-40
Error
Code

- Check if the motor is working.
In the operation of rejecting grip, the subscanning grip motor
10447 Rejection grip roller error (MZ2) was driven, but the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2)
did not close within the specified time period. Or, error was

[During bootup] - Reseat the sensor connectors.
When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed, - Check if the motor is working.
Remaining IP side-positioning
10451 the IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven - Reseat the SND board connectors.
error (2) to achieve IP positioning. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
housing unit was CLOSED. - Check the SND board fuses.


Cassette cover closing When an attempt was made to place the cassette cover - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
10456
mechanism HP sensor error closing mechanism in its reference position, the cassette - Reseat the sensor connectors.
cover CLOSE position sensor (SA12) was not OPEN. - Reseat the SND board connectors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-41
Error
Code
[During bootup]
Bootup cassette new/old The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1)
determination error was driven to determine new/old cassette, and error was update. (For design analysis)
detected.


The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven
to perform an IP return conveyance operation in the feed
10461 Feed conveyance retry error conveyance retry sequence. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in
the housing unit did not OPEN within a predetermined period
of time. Or, error was detected when driving/stopping one of
the motors.


The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to
Post-reading conveyance error perform a post-IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP
(2) sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Or, error
was detected when driving one of the motors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-42
Error
Code
IP conveyance before IP A feed-conveyance error occurred before measuring the
measurement error IP length, and the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven to update. (For design analysis)
recover, but error was detected.

Arranging IP position An error was detected when the IP transport motor (MA4)
conveyance error was driven in the processing for positioning IP for feed- update. (For design analysis)
conveyance.

10472 Roller grip 2 release error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for releasing the grip of roller 2. update. (For design analysis)

10473 Roller 2 grip error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for engaging the grip of roller 2. update. (For design analysis)

10474 Roller 1 grip release error Error was detected when driving the subscanning grip motor - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
(MZ2) for releasing error the grip of roller 1. update. (For design analysis)

The turn roller nip configuration driving motor (MC2) was
driven to perform a nip operation of the nip in the turn roller
10476 Turn roller nip error (2) nip configuration. However, it was impossible to detect that the
turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) was CLOSED
within a predetermined period of time.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-43
Error
Code
External erasure data [During bootup] - Update the version to the newest version.
10710
acquisition error It failed to read the erasure data file. - Replace the CPU board.
[ During bootup ] - Reseat the ERS board connectors.

It was found that the ERS board was not mounted in the - Reseat the SND board connectors (CN5 and CN6).
10731 ERS board position error correct position. For the correct board position, refer to the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
MD volume. - Replace the ERS board.
[During bootup]
Configuration initialization
10900 The Iconfiguration data (Irset.cfg) could not be loaded into the - Again set the configuration information in EDIT CONFIGURATION.
failure SDRAM from the flash ROM on the CPU board.
- Check that the CPU board DIP switch (S7) is set as follows:
Dip-SW No.2: OFF
Dip-SW No.3: OFF
[During bootup]
Dip-SW No.4: OFF
10904 RU type error The RU type acquired by DIPSW of CPU board was not
correct.
- If any error occurs immediately after replacing the CPU board,
execute "Initialize APL".
[During bootup]
Image signal monitor value after replacement of the fuses.
11205 When diagnosing the simulated data transfer, the A/D - Reseat the PMT board connectors.
(simulated current) error conversion data for simulated image were out of range. - Replace the PMT board.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-44
Error
Code
[During bootup] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
LD drive current value error
11230 The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times - Check that there is no excessive rise in the ambient temperature.
(during bootup) the factory default value.
The laser drive current value (LDIF) is affected by the ambient
temperature.

The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
Shifted sensitivity (±50 to
11268 (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and - Replace the light-collecting guide.
±70%) (WND&LOG) it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to
±70%.

Shifted sensitivity (70% or The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
11269 - Replace the light-collecting guide.
more) (WND&LOG) (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it
was detected if the value was ±70% or more.
[During bootup]
- Turn ON the HV switch of the CPU board. Check that the red LED
11280 Initialization HV-OFF status It was found that the high voltage of the photomultiplier (PMT on the upper right of the switch is lit.
board) was OFF.
[When the cassette is set in the RU]

- Remove the cassette.
[During bootup]
Bootup improper cassette [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
11315 It was found that a cassette was improperly loaded (inserted
loading detection obliquely or into a nonreference position).
- Check to make sure that the sensors (SA1 and SA11) normally work
by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-45
Error
Code
- Remove the cassette.
[During bootup]
It was found that a cassette was incompletely inserted.
Bootup incomplete cassette [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
11316 The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette
insertion detection was present (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11)
- Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
incompletely inserted cassette was detected.
The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that a cassette was
Improper cassette loading monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
11341 present (CLOSED). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection (1) The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold - Replace the sensors.
was released (CLOSED).
The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a cassette
was present (CLOSED).
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
incompletely inserted cassette was detected.
The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was
Improper cassette loading monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
11342 present (OPEN). - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
detection (2) The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold - Replace the sensors.
(OPEN).
The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a cassette
was present (CLOSED).
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-46
Error
Code
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette
hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring.
a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Although retries - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
11373 Cassette hold retry error were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. An - Check the SND board fuses.
error results also when the following operation takes place. - Replace the solenoid or the sensors.
- When the cassette is loaded upside down;
- When the cassette is loaded front side back.

11375 Cassette not detected hold). However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no
- Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
cassette was present (OPEN).

The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
11379 Cassette hold release error release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Although retries were - Replace the sensors.
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.

Debris fall prevention shutter was driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter. However, - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
11381
close error it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
was OPEN (the shutter was open). Although retries were - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. shutter.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-47
Error
Code
was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that
11382 Old cassette loading the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSE (old type
cassette). Although retries were performed, the maximum
retry count was exceeded. It was therefore concluded that an - Check the SND board fuses.
old cassette was loaded. - Replace the sensors or the motors.

It was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was OPEN
11390 Feed IP suction error (did not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air
- Check that the IP is correctly sucked.
leak sequence. Although an IP feed operation was retried, the
- Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm.
maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check for errors in the IP suction pump.
- Check for errors in the IP air leak valve.

to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor
11396 Feed IP conveyance error (1) 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an
IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check the SND board fuses.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-48
Error
Code
to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP sensor
11397 Feed IP conveyance error (2) 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect
an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. - Check the SND board fuses.
[During bootup]
performed, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit and
- Check to make sure that the sensors (SC3, SG1 and SC9) normally
"15x30/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor (SC9) detected work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
an abnormal combination. It was therefore concluded that a - Replace the sensors.
11398 Nonstandard IP size nonstandard IP size was encountered.
[ During routine processing] [When a conveyance error occurs]
In the feed-conveyance operation, the IP sensor 2 (SG1) in - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
the housing unit and "15x30/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
(SC9) were in the unlikely combination, It was therefore
concluded that a nonstandard IP size was encountered.
The barcode could not be read during routine processing. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the
11403 Barcode reading retry error Although the barcode reading operation was retried, the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately
maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-49
Error
Code
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during
routine processing to perform a barcode reading retry
Barcode reading retry - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the Alpha II power supply, the
11405 conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the PIF63A board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs immediately
conveyance error side-positioning conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect after replacement of the fuses.
an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
During routine processing, the IP size detected in an IP length

11406 Nonstandard IP size measurement process and the IP type detected in a barcode
reading operation formed an abnormal combination.
Unacceptable IP generation/ The IP type detected in a barcode reading operation during

11407
type detection routine processing was other than specification.


The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
perform a reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor
Subscanning conveyance error - Check the SND board fuses.
11414 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that - Replace the sensors (SC3) or the motors.
(1) no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time. - Check the CPU board fuses. Replace the PSU27A power supply,
Or the leading-edge detection interrupt did not occur within a the PSU27B board and CPU board if the fuse blowout recurs
immediately after replacement of the fuses.
predetermined period of time.
- Reseat the SED board connectors.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the cables connecting from the SED board to the CPU
board.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-50
Error
Code
The IP transport motors (MZ1 and MC1) were driven to
Subscanning conveyance error perform a reading conveyance operation. As a result, a
11415 [When no conveyance error occurs]
(2) leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. However, IP
sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not OPEN within a monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
predetermined period of time. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors (SC3) or the motors.

The IP transport motors (MZ1/MC1) were driven for a reading
Subscanning conveyance error conveyance operation, and a leading-edge detection interrupt
11416 [When no conveyance error occurs]
(3) occurred. The IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit became
OPEN, but a tailing-edge detection interrupt did not occur monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
within the specified time. - Check the SND board fuses.
- Replace the sensors (SC3) or the motors.
[During bootup]
Empty cassette ejection When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an - Remove the cassette.
11454
request empty cassette was detected. It was therefore requested that - Make sure that no IP remains inside the machine.
the cassette be ejected.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-51
Error
Code
The cassette IP holding arm performed an IP holding
operation to determine whether the cassette type was old [When the mechanism normally works]
Old cassette loading during or new. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
11460
bootup sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old - Reseat the sensor connectors.
cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, - Reseat the SND board connectors.
the maximum retry count was exceeded. It was therefore - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
concluded that an old cassette was encountered. - Check the SND board fuses.

driven to perform a nip operation of the nip in the turn roller
11475 Turn roller nip error (1) nip configuration. However, it was impossible to detect that
the turn roller nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) was OPEN
within a predetermined period of time.

Insufficient erasure due to over The over X-ray dose was detected in the erasure mode
- Again erase the IP.
11480 - Confirm the S value, and carry out sensitivity correction when
X-ray dose processing, so the message was displayed and the needed.
insufficiently erased IP was returned to the cassette.
[During bootup]
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
11495 -
bootup unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then
the cassette was ejected.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-52
Error
Code
[During bootup]
Request for an empty cassette When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, the
11498 -
having a specified size insertion of an empty cassette having a specified size was
requested.
[During bootup]
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed, an
11499 -
bootup unread IP in the machine was returned to a cassette and then
the cassette was ejected.
11510 Unread IP ejection The IP was ejected into the cassette without being read. -
<User operation>
This error occurs if no menu is selected at the time of image
Patient information not output.
11511 -
registered <Occurrence condition analysis>
The patient information relevant to the processed IP was not
registered in the CL.
11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL -
[During routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
An attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data connection between the CL and RU.
11531 Retransmission retry failure from the RU to the CL after communication with the CL is - Check that the IP address of the “master CL” set in the RU is correct.
suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
is lost and the cassette is ejected.
Erasure time extension due Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate. Therefore, the message
appeared, and a process was performed in the erasure
11700 to erasure lamp illumination extension mode in which the erasure time was extended. For the
- Replace the lamp assembly.
failure number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-53
Error
Code
A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate.
Inadequate erasure due to The erasure degeneration mode then prevailed due to
inadequate erasure. An unerased IP was ejected into the
11701 erasure lamp illumination cassette. The message appeared and the user made a mode
failure selection. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.
A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination

time was exceeded. Therefore, the message appeared to
Erasure lamp life end advance
11702 indicate that the lamp life end is about to be reached. For the - Replace the lamp assembly.
notice predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time,
refer to the MD volume.
The life end warning message appeared because a

predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was
11703 Erasure lamp life end 1 exceeded. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp
illumination time, refer to the MD volume.
The life end message appeared because a predetermined

cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. For
11704 Erasure lamp life end 2 the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time,
Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an ERS board

Erasure time extension due to
11732 failure. Therefore, the erasure time was extended. For the - Replace the lamp assembly.
ERS board failure number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.
A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate

due to an ERS board failure. The erasure degeneration mode
Erasure degeneration due to
11733 then prevailed, and an unerased IP was ejected into the - Replace the lamp assembly.
ERS board failure cassette. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the
MD volume.
An IP that was inadequately erased due, for instance, to an

11760 Inadequately erased IP ejection erasure lamp illumination failure was returned to the cassette, - Replace the lamp assembly.
and the cassette was ejected.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-54
Error
Code
Erasure lamp cleaning preliminary message was displayed
Erasure lamp unit cleaning
11780 since the number of days since the last cleaning date or the - Clean the erasure filter.
preliminary message number of erasure processing exceeded the specified value.
Erasure lamp cleaning warning message was displayed since

Erasure lamp unit cleaning
11781 the number of days since the last cleaning date or the number - Clean the erasure filter.
warning of erasure processing exceeded the specified value.
The message appeared and the error was logged because

Right-side cover air filter life the life end of the right cover air filter was reached, that is,
11901
end indication an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded.
Replace the air filter.

Erasure unit brush roller life the life end of the erasure unit brush roller was reached, that
11902 - Replace the brush roller.
end indication is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded.
Replace the brush roller.

Erasure lamp filter life end the life end of the erasure lamp filter was reached, that is,
11904 - Replace the erasure filter.
indication an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded.
Replace the lamp filter.

the life end of the IP suction pump was reached, that is, an
11905 IP suction pump life end IP conveyance count of 135,000 (3 years) was exceeded.
- Replace the IP suction pump.
Replace the pump.
The message appeared because a predetermined cumulative

11906 Laser life end laser illumination time was exceeded.
- Replace the scanning optics unit.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-55
Error
Code
[During shutdown processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
Log information save error connection between the CL and RU.
11907 An error occurred when an attempt was made to save error
during shutdown process log/trace information in the FTP server.
- Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
Cassette insertion before The message appeared and the cassette was ejected
11950 console connection because the cassette was inserted before the connection to -
establishment the console was established.
The message appeared because the cassette was not

inserted all the way in and two seconds elapsed.
An error results also when the following operation takes place.
- When the cassette is slantly loaded;
11951 Cassette setting failure - When the cassette is inserted into an opposite side to
-
reference;
- When a cassette of an inch type is loaded into a metric-type
machine.
- Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
- Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
[During MUTL operation]
12001 File open error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file open sequence.
connection between the CL and RU.
- Make sure that the IIS (Internet information service) is installed.
and the hub.
12004 File write error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file write sequence.

SED board power supply error
12207 An error about the connection (power supply) with the leading- - Take action when the error code 10207 occurs.
(during routine processing) edge detection (SED) board was detected.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-56
Error
Code
HV high voltage power supply
12220 An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Take action when the error code 10220 occurs.
error of range.

12223 HV-ON high-voltage value error An error was detected as the HV high voltage data were out - Take action when the error code 10223 occurs.
of range when HV is on.
[During routine processing] - Reseat the PMT board connectors.

An error about the HV detection value signal of PMT board - Replace the PMT board.
Difference value error of HV
12224 was detected. The difference between the minimum and - Replace the Alpha II power supply.
high voltage power supply maximum monitor values is out of range when compared to - Replace the PIF63A board.
the setting value. - Replace the CPU board.
- Reseat the connectors connecting with the scanning optics unit.

[During routine processing] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
12231 LD monitor value error warning The difference between minimum and maximum of the laser - Replace the Alpha II power supply.
drive current monitor value is out of specification. - Replace the PIF63A board.

- Replace the scanning optics unit.
12233 LD light intensity error The laser light intensity is less than 50%.
- Replace the Alpha II power supply.
- Replace the PIF63A board.

12240 SYN interval count error An error was detected for the out-of-range SYN interval count.
- Take action when the error code 10240 occurs.
Polygon surface counter [During bootup or routine processing]

12245 - Same as the error code 10248.
timeout The interrupt was not notified within 150 ms of LD ON.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-57
Error
Code
[During bootup or routine processing] - Replace the scanning optics unit.
SYN interval count difference
12246 The difference between the minimum and maximum SYN - Replace the Alpha II power supply.
value error interval counts during reading was out of the specified range. - Replace the PIF63A board.

The interrupt status occurred as there was an error of interval
12247 Polygon improper index for the index signal, which is generated for every rotation of
- Same as the error code 10248.
polygon.

12248 Polygon lock timeout (1st) After polygon "ON", the polygon "OK" signal cannot detect - Same as the error code 10248.
within predetermined period of time (1st time).

12249 Polygon lock error An error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is - Same as the error code 10248.
detected.

12254 Trailing edge detection timeout The interrupt for detecting the tailing edge did not occur within -
the specified time.

The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
Shifted sensitivity
12268 (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and - Again carry out sensitivity correction.
(±50 to ±70%) (LOG) it was detected if the value was within the range of ±50 to
±70%.

Shifted sensitivity The calculated SK (current SK) and the initialized SK
12269 - Again carry out sensitivity correction.
(70% or more) (LOG) (SKSTART) were compared and converted to S-value, and it
was detected in case the value was ±70% or more.

12288 Scanner retry The operation of the polygon or HV ON was retried.
-
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-58
Error
Code
was driven to perform a home position release operation for
Cassette cover closing - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12325 the cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette
mechanism HP release retry cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not OPEN
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

Cassette cover closing was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the
12326 mechanism home positioning cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette
retry cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Check the SND board fuses.
performed. - Replace the sensors or the motors.

Cassette cover opening was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning
12329 mechanism home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
retry (1) However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
(SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. - Check the SND board fuses.
Therefore, a retry was performed. - Replace the sensors or the motors.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-59
Error
Code
Cassette cover opening was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the
12330 mechanism home positioning cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette
retry (2) cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE

[During bootup or routine processing] - Check assembly of the mechanism.
Cassette cover opening was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the [When the mechanism normally works]
12331 mechanism home positioning cassette cover opening mechanism. However, the cassette - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
retry cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not OPEN - Reseat the SND board connectors.

The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven by one pulse [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning to perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12336
retry (1) However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not CLOSE - Reseat the sensor connectors.
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-60
Error
Code
The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven to perform [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12337
retry (2) the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not CLOSE within - Reseat the sensor connectors.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.

The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven to perform [When the mechanism normally works]
Suction arm home positioning a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12338
retry the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not OPEN within - Reseat the sensor connectors.
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.

When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP
IP holding arm release retry holding arm from the IP holding position, it was found that the [When the mechanism normally works]
12344
during bootup (1) cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry - Reseat the SND board connectors.
was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-61
Error
Code
When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding
IP holding arm release retry arm from the cassette cover opening position, it was found [When the mechanism normally works]
12345
during bootup (2) that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a - Reseat the SND board connectors.
retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

Cassette cover opening was driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning
12361 mechanism home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
retry (1) However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
(SA7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

retry (2) cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-62
Error
Code
retry cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not OPEN

- Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation or of the spring.
12373 Cassette hold retry hold). However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that
a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). Therefore, a retry
- Replace the solenoid or the sensors.
was performed.

Cassette undetected in cassette The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
12376
hold sequence hold). However, the cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected - Replace the sensors.
that no cassette was present (OPEN).

The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to - Check for abnormalities of the solenoid operation.
12379 Cassette hold release retry release a cassette hold). However, the cassette hold sensor - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
(SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Therefore, a retry - Replace the sensors.
was performed.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-63
Error
Code
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor [When the mechanism normally works]
Debris fall prevention shutter (MA1) was driven to close the debris fall prevention shutter. - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
12381
close retry However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter - Reseat the SND board connectors.
sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). Therefore, a - Check that no debris falls in an opening of the debris fall prevention
retry was performed. shutter.

12382 Old cassette loading retry was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that
the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSE (old type
cassette). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

When a suction arm home position was checked, it was found
12383 Suction arm home positioning that the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN. Therefore,
-
the suction arm was returned to its home position.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-64
Error
Code

12386 IP drop detection (1) After the cassette cover was opened, it was found that the IP emitting regions).
dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). - Reseat the sensor connectors.


12388 IP drop detection (2) After IP suction, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) emitting regions).
was CLOSED (due to IP detection). - Reseat the sensor connectors.

It was found that the IP drop sensor (SA4) was OPEN (did [When the mechanism normally works]
12390 Feed IP suction retry not find that no IP was present) prior to the IP feed air leak - Check that the IP is correctly sucked.
sequence. Therefore, an IP feed operation was retried. - Check for deformation or an installation failure of the suction arm.
- Check for errors in the IP suction pump.
- Check for errors in the IP air leak valve.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-65
Error
Code
[During routine processing] - Check assembly of the mechanism.
was driven to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP [When the mechanism normally works]
12391 IP holding arm release error (2) holding position after IP suction. However, it was found that - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
held and an new type cassette was detected). - Check the SND board fuses.

was driven to hold an IP. However, it was found that the
12393 Feed IP fall prevention retry cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was
not held and a old type cassette was detected). Therefore, a
retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP
12396 Feed IP conveyance retry (1) sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-66
Error
Code
to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP
12397 Feed IP conveyance retry (2) sensor 1 (SC3) in the conveyor unit did not CLOSE within

An IP length measurement process was performed with IP
sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit in the feed conveyance
12399 IP length measurement retry sequence. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) CLOSED within a
short period of time. Therefore, the IP length measurement monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
process was retried. - Check the SND board fuses.

driven by one pulse to perform a home positioning operation
Turn grip roller mechanism
12400 for a turn roller nip configuration. Howerver, the turn roller
home positioning retry (1) nip configuration HP sensor (SC1) did not CLOSE within
a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was
performed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-67
Error
Code
Turn grip roller mechanism driven to perform a home positioning operation for a turn roller
12401
home positioning retry (2) nip configuration. Howerver, the turn roller nip configuration
HP sensor (SC1) did not CLOSE within a predetermined
period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.

Turn grip roller mechanism driven to perform a home positioning operation for a turn roller
12402
home positioning retry nip configuration. Howerver, the turn roller nip configuration
HP sensor (SC1) did not OPEN within a predetermined period
of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The barcode could not be read during routine processing.

12403 Barcode reading retry Therefore, the barcode reading operation was retried.

to perform a postreading conveyance operation. However, IP
12419 Post-reading conveyance retry sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-68
Error
Code
emitting regions).
After an IP hold release operation was performed, it was
12422 Load IP drop retry (1) found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to
IP detection). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.
emitting regions).
After the cassette cover was closed, it was found that the IP
12423 Load IP drop retry (2) dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection).
Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

was driven to prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12424 Load IP hold retry the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the - Reseat the sensor connectors.
IP was not held and an old type cassette was detected). - Reseat the SND board connectors.
Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-69
Error
Code
was driven to release an IP hold in the load sequence. [When the mechanism normally works]
12428 Load IP hold release retry (1) However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
(SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new type cassette - Reseat the SND board connectors.
was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

was driven to release an IP hold in the load sequence. [When the mechanism normally works]
12429 Load IP hold release retry (2) However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
(SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new type cassette - Reseat the SND board connectors.
was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

was driven to perform a home positioning operation for the
Cassette cover opening - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12430 cassette cover opening mechanism. However, it was found
mechanism HP drive retry that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was
CLOSED (the shutter was closed). Therefore, a retry was - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-70
Error
Code
Cassette cover closing [When the mechanism normally works]
12436 was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism
mechanism drive retry HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined
period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed. - Check the SND board fuses.

12438 mechanism home positioning cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette
retry cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE
[During bootup or routine processing] [When an error occurs in mechanism operations]

The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) - Check assembly of the mechanism.
cassette cover closing mechanism. However, the cassette [When the mechanism normally works]
12439 mechanism home positioning cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
retry error within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were - Reseat the SND board connectors.
performed, the maximum retry count was - Check the SND board fuses.
exceeded. - Replace the sensors or the motors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-71
Error
Code
Cassette cover closing The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2)
was driven to place the cassette cover closing mechanism [When the mechanism normally works]
12440 mechanism close positioning in the close position. However, the cassette cover CLOSE - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
error position sensor (SA12) did not CLOSE within a predetermined - Reseat the SND board connectors.
period of time. - Check the SND board fuses.

When a home position check was performed on the cassette
Cassette cover closing cover closing mechanism, the cassette cover closing [When the mechanism normally works]
12441
mechanism HP check mechanism HP sensor (SA8) was OPEN. Therefore, the - Check for breakage of the sensor actuators.
cassette cover closing mechanism was placed at its home - Reseat the SND board connectors.
position. - Check the SND board fuses.
[During bootup]
IP found in remaining IP
12442 When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, an IP - Set an empty cassette.
ejection cassette during bootup was found in the cassette.

[During bootup]
Bootup cassette cover opening When the cassette cover opening mechanism was moved [When the mechanism normally works]
from the reference position to the home position, it was - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12443 mechanism home positioning found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) - Reseat the sensor connectors.
retry was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, a retry was - Reseat the SND board connectors.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-72
Error
Code
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to freely rotate
Subscanning grip roller free - Reseat the SND board connectors.
12445 the subscanning grip roller, but the subscanning grip sensor
rotation error (SZ2) did not open within the specified time period. Or, error
was detected when driving/stopping the motor. - Replace the sensors or the motors.
The subscanning grip motor (MZ2) was driven to make - Reseat the sensor connectors.
Subscanning grip roller home- the subscanning grip roller in the reference position, but - Reseat the SND board connectors.
12446
positioning error the subscanning grip sensor (SZ2) did not close within the - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
specified time period. Or, error was detected when driving/ - Check the SND board fuses.
stopping the motor. - Replace the sensors or the motors.


Cassette cover opening - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12449 was driven to release an IP hold in the load sequence.
mechanism operation error However, it was found that the cassette cover opening
mechanism HP sensor (SA7) was CLOSED. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.

- Check to make sure that the sensors (SA1, SA2 and SA11) normally
[During bootup] work by means of the monitor function of the RU PC-TOOL.
When a remaining IP ejection process was performed, a
No remaining-IP ejection empty - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
12452 remaining IP was detected in the machine. However, it was - Replace the sensors.
cassette during bootup found that there was no ejection cassette in the cassette set
unit. [When the cassette is not set in the RU]
- Set the cassette.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-73
Error
Code
[When a plurality of IPs are present in the machine]
- Once turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, and then turn
it ON again. (Restarting the machine, operation of automatically
returning the IP to the cassette will be repeated.)
[During bootup]
When a remaining IP search process was performed, the IP [When no IP or a single IP is present in the machine]
Two IPs remaining during dropping sensor (SA4) in the cassette set unit and IP sensor
12455 - Check for mixture of debris in the IP conveyance path.
bootup 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit were both - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
CLOSED (due to IP detection). It was therefore concluded - Reseat the sensor connectors.
that there were a plurality of IPs in the machine. - Reseat the SND board connectors.

[During bootup]
When the cassette IP holding arm held an IP to determine [When the mechanism normally works]
Old/new cassette judgment whether an old or new cassette is used, it was found that the - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.
12460
retry during bootup cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was - Reseat the sensor connectors.
not held and an old cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry - Reseat the SND board connectors.
was performed. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-74
Error
Code
[During routine processing] - Check for abnormalities in rotation of the conveyance roller.
to perform a feed conveyance operation. However, IP [When no conveyance error occurs]
12474 Feed IP conveyance error (3) sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within - Check to make sure that the sensors normally work by means of the
performed. - Check the detecting areas of the sensors for smears.

[ During bootup or routine processing ]When a home position

check was performed on the turn grip roller mechanism, the
Turn grip roller mechanism HP
12477 turn grip roller mechanism HP sensor (SC1) was OPEN.
check Therefore, the cassette cover closing mechanism was placed
at its home position.

- Not problem. No countermeasure is necessary.
12485 Pulse motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the pulse motor. [When the error does not concurrently occur with the error 13485]

12486 DC motor error Error occurred when driving/stopping the DC motor. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12487 Sensor error Error occurred when acquiring the sensor status. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-75
Error
Code
12488 Fuse error Error occurred when acquiring the fuse condition. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12489 Solenoid error Error occurred when turning on/off the solenoid. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12490 Pump error Error occurred when turning on/off the pump. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12491 Valve error Error occurred when turning on/off the valve. - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version

12510 Message format error An illegal command was received from the CL.
-
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
12520 Message transmission failure An attempt to transmit a message from the RU to the CL connection between the CL and RU.
failed. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
and the hub.
A REQUEST message is transmitted from RU to CL, however,
12521 RES message receiving timeout RU cannot receive a RESPONSE message, thus resulting in
a time-out. sure that the FTP server is correctly set.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-76
Error
Code
and the hub.
[During bootup or routine processing] - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
12522 ACK receiving time-out A message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot connection between the CL and RU.
receive ACK, thus resulting in a time-out. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make

Although the SET command was transmitted from the RU, a
SET command CL receiving signal other than OK was received as a response from the
12523 -
error CL. After the processed IP returns to a cassette, the cassette
is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU
panel.

Unlit erasure lamp detection - Update the version to the newest version.
12750 An error was detected when acquiring the status of lamp - A driver defect is suspended if the problem is not solved by version
error being unlit. update. (For design analysis)

12753 Erasure lamp turning off error An error was detected when turning off the erasure lamps.

12754 Erasure lamp lighting error An error was detected when turning on the erasure lamps.

It was detected that the ERS-board-mounted fuse for port 1
12770 ERS board port 1 failure was blown. For the ERS board location and port numbers,
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-77
Error
Code
12817 Blown fuse F7 of CPU board It was detected that the fuse F7 of CPU board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

12845 Blown fuse F4 of SND board It was detected that the fuse F4 of SND board was blown.
- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.

- Replace the fuse.
and the hub.
The FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from
12990 FTP server access error the RU to the CL. Or, the FTP server may be accessed, but a
connection cannot be established. sure that the FTP server is correctly set.

13230 Laser drive current value error The laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times - Take action when the error code 10230 or 11906 occurs.
the factory default value.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-78
Error
Code
Updating the drive current
13232 The drive current maximum value was more than the total of -
maximum value initial current value maximum value + specified value.

13275 Format adjustment data error When format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data is -
inputted.

13276 File restore error An error occurred when restoring the SCN data.
- Check that file extension is “.dat”.

Correction recording
13277 It failed to create the shading correction data. Shading - Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction.
calculation cancel correction should be performed again.

- Carry out shading correction by means of a 14 x 17 inch (35 x 43 cm)
13281 Reading IP size error The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for or 14 x 14 inch (35 x 35 cm) IP.
shading correction, so that error is detected.

SHD/POLYGON correction data It failed to create the correction data as the difference between
13282 - Carry out shading correction by means of a scratch-free IP.
error the minimum and maximum QL values of the shading data
exceeded the specified value.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-79
Error
Code
[During MUTL operation] - Carry out sensitivity correction by means of IPs exposed to doses of
13283 HVCNT value error An out-of-spec HV is inputted. 1 mR to 10 mR.

13288 SHD data write error It failed to write the SHD data into the Flash ROM.
- Replace the CPU board, and again carry out shading correction.

Bootup cassette sensor The cassette IN sensor (SA1), cassette hold sensor (SA2), - Reseat the sensor connectors.
13312
combination inconsistency cassette OUT sensor (SA11) and cassette size sensor(SA9) - Reseat the SND board connectors.
detected an abnormal combination. - Check for coating detachment or breakage of cables.
Stop command for the stopped Although the motor was already stopped, a command for
13485 -
motor stopping was sent.
and the hub.
Detection of communication - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13520 It is detected that the communication between the CL and the connection between the CL and RU.
abortion to CL RU is broken. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
[During bootup or routine processing] and the hub.
The connection is suspended and initialization of
CL communication failure - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13521 communication between the CL and RU is performed again, connection between the CL and RU.
detected because the communication between the CL and RU is - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
broken.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-80
Error
Code
The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the
RU, so that the image was retransmitted from the RU. - Check for errors on the network equipment such as the LAN cable
and the hub.
13530 CL image data receive timeout The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs
due to hardware failure of the network, thereby causing connection between the CL and RU.
frequent retries.
and the hub.
[During bootup]
FTP server data acquisition - Execute the PING command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
13900 The data cannot be gotten from FTP server and it is set to an connection between the CL and RU.
failure initial value. - Execute the FTP command in the RU PC-TOOL, and check to make
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MT-81
3. Abnormal Images No.2

Image nonuniformity
(entire 5 mm-pitch nonuniformity)
[Possible cause]
A scratch or crack is present on the gear of
<Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP the subscanning motor (MZ1).
3.1 Troubleshooting Abnormal Images
n Image Nonuniformity (Horizontal Streaks in the Subscanning Direction)

Image nonuniformity [Possible cause]
No.1
(25 mm-pitch nonuniformity) A scratch or crack is present on the spur gear
<Example> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP of the subscanning center roller.
[Countermeasure]
Replace the subscanning motor (MZ1).
“MC 9.3 IP Transport Motor (MZ1)”
[Countermeasure]
Replace the spur gear of the subscanning * Nonuniformity is observed at 5 mm intervals in
center roller. the subscanning direction. The nonuniformity
“MC 9.7 Center Roller” cannot be visually recognized.
(A microscope is needed to check.)
FRRB203002.ai
* Nonuniformity is observed at 25 mm intervals

in the subscanning direction.
The nonuniformity can be visually recognized.
FRRB203001.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-82
No.3 Image nonuniformity [Possible cause]

The cleaning brush is accidentally operated
<Example 1> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP when reading the image (areas A to E in the
left figure).
A
<Example 2> 14x14 inch (35x35 cm) IP

B
<Example 3> 14x17 inch (35x43 cm) IP

[Countermeasure]
D The cleaning brush should not be operated
while reading the image.
<Example 4> 18x24 cm IP
E
FRRB203003.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MT-83
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 11, 18, 24, 27, 31-151
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of

Parts (MC)

01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-1
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each u INSTRUCTION u

The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment 1.2 Types of Screws
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal The DT screw and the TP screw employed in the machine are of similar shape and color.
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume. Check the screw type referring to the figures below when attaching a screw.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
DT screw TP screw
following precautions should be observed.
Has four dots on the head Has no dot on the head
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the
procedures.
WARNING/CAUTION
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions".
u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTIONS Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
- Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit.
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
- Never remove the red-painted screws.
u INSTRUCTION u
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch indicators
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
as needed.
When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the photomultiplier and the
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such indicators.
erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous substance may leak from the
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the inside of a broken part.
installation location when the part or component removed
is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in the illustration
CHECK that depicts the procedures for removing the parts and
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image
components. When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
When you install the covers after a check, replacement, or adjustment, make sure that the
"n Check/ Adjustment Procedures.”
high-voltage switch is ON. After the machine is restored to normal, run an image read check
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when
to verify that a read image is normal.
installing the parts or components. However, it is not indicated
for the half-punches for improving ease of assembly or
preventing erroneous assembly procedures.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
2. Table of Contents 5.26 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Receiving Side)

5.27 Guide
MC-67
MC-68
5.28 Suction Cup MC-69
3. Cover 3. Cover MC-4 5.29 IP Transport Motor (MA4) MC-71
3.1 Cover MC-4 5.30 Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear MC-72
3.2 Plate MC-5 5.31 Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A) and (B) MC-73
5.32 Actuator Assembly MC-76
4. Housing Unit 4. Housing Unit MC-6 5.33 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6) MC-77
4.1 Alpha II Power Supply MC-6 5.34 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism
4.2 PIF63A Board MC-8 HP Sensor (SA7) MC-78
4.3 CPU Board MC-9 5.35 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) MC-79
4.3.1 Replacement Procedures MC-9 5.36 Solenoid (SOLA1) and
4.3.2 Machine Data Backup MC-9 Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) MC-80
4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board MC-11 5.37 Movable Guide Assembly MC-82
4.3.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU MC-13 5.38 “15x30 Cassette” Movable Guide Assembly MC-84
4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version MC-18 5.39 IP Suction Arm MC-85
4.3.6 Installing the HR Reading Option Key MC-21 5.40 IP Suction Link Shaft MC-87
4.3.7 Restoring the Machine Data MC-22 5.41 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly MC-88
4.3.8 Confirming the S Value MC-23 5.42 Guide Plates (A) and (B) MC-90
4.3.9 S Value Correction/LED Initialize MC-23
4.4 SND Board MC-24 6. Erasure Unit 6. Erasure Unit MC-92
4.5 Antistatic Member MC-25 6.1 Erasure Unit MC-92
4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) MC-26 6.2 Reflection Plate MC-94
4.7 Main Power Switch Assembly MC-27 6.3 Brush Roller Assembly MC-96
4.8 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet MC-28 6.4 Brush Roller MC-97
4.9 Operation Panel Assembly MC-29 6.5 Filter MC-99
4.10 LAN Cover MC-31 6.6 Lamp Assembly MC-101
5. Cassette Set Unit 5. Cassette Set Unit MC-32 7. Light-Collecting Unit 7. Light-Collecting Unit MC-103
5.1 Cassette Set Unit MC-32 7.1 Light-Collecting Unit MC-103
5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly MC-35 7.2 PMT Board MC-106
5.3 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism 8. Scanning Optics Unit 8. Scanning Optics Unit MC-108
Driving Motor (MA1) MC-37 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit MC-108
5.4 Cable Junction Bracket MC-38
5.5 Shutter Drive Arm MC-39 9. Subscanning Unit 9. Subscanning Unit MC-112
5.6 Spur Gear (Reference Side) MC-40 9.1 Subscanning Unit MC-112
5.7 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) MC-41 9.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-114
5.8 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly MC-42 9.3 Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side) MC-115
5.9 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly 9.4 Rubber Belt, Flywheel
Driving Shaft MC-44 (Opposite Reference Side) MC-116
5.10 Shutter Assembly MC-46 9.5 Subscanning Motor (MZ1) MC-116
5.11 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) MC-48 9.6 IP Transport Motor (MC1) MC-117
5.12 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism 9.7 Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2) MC-117
Driving Gear MC-49 9.8 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) MC-118
5.13 Cassette Hold Release Arm MC-50 9.9 Light-Collecting Shaft
5.14 Cassette IP Holding Arm MC-51 (Light-Collecting Mirror, Antistatic Member) MC-119
5.15 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly MC-53 9.10 Rubber Roller (A, B) MC-121
5.16 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) MC-54 9.11 Rubber Roller (C, D) MC-123
5.17 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism 9.12 Rubber Roller (E) MC-125
Driving Motor (MA2) MC-55 9.13 Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-128
5.18 IP Suction Link Mechanism MC-56 9.14 Rubber Roller (F) MC-129
5.19 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) MC-58 9.15 Grip Release Arm MC-130
5.20 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft MC-59 9.16 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and
5.21 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly MC-61 Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2) MC-131
5.22 Hose MC-63 9.17 Subscanning Grip Assembly MC-133
5.23 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) MC-64 9.18 IP Sensor (SC3) MC-135
5.24 IP Suction Pump (PA1) MC-65 9.19 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor
5.25 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Emitting Side) MC-66 (SC9) MC-136
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-3
9.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-137
9.21 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) MC-139
9.22 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) MC-141
9.23 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-143
9.24 Center Roller MC-145
10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse 10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations MC-147
Locations 10.1 Fuse Classification and
Replacement Procedures MC-147
10.2 CPU Board Fuses MC-148
10.3 SND Board Fuses MC-148
10.4 PIF63A Board Fuses MC-149
11. List of Jigs and Tools 11. List of Jigs and Tools MC-150
11.1 Jigs and Tools MC-150
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-4
3. Cover REFERENCE
You can remove the front cover only by loosening the screws.
3.1 Cover n Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Reinstall the cover.
n Removal Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
(1) Remove the covers.
#1 Front cover
#2 Louver
#3 Right-hand side cover
#4 Rear cover
#5 Left-hand side cover
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-5
3.2 Plate n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the plates.
(1) Remove the cover.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
(2) Remove the plates.
(A) Front plate
(B) Right-hand side board box plate
(C) Right-hand side power supply unit plate
(D) Rear plate
(E) Left-hand side plate
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-6
4. Housing Unit (2) Remove the power supply.

#1 Remove the screws and remove the bracket (x3).
#2 Unclamp the clamps.
#3 Disconnect the connectors (PIF1/PIF2).
4.1 Alpha II Power Supply #4 Remove the screws and remove the cable and washer (W4).
#5 Loosen the screws.
CAUTION #6 Remove the screws.
#7 Remove the power supply.
When servicing the power supply, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may
cause damage to electronic parts on the power supply.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the following components.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Right-hand side cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Right-hand side power supply unit plate
- Right-hand side board box plate
{MC:4.7_Main Power Switch Assembly}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-7
n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the power supply.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
u NOTE u
After removed the connector (terminal) of the power, be sure to re-connect to the
original position. If the wrong connection position of the connector (terminal) has been
used, the equipment will be damaged.
XL2A03040003.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-8
4.2 PIF63A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the board.
CAUTION Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
(2) Remove the board.
#1 Disconnect the connectors.
#2 Remove the screw.
#3 Remove the board.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-9
4.3 CPU Board 4.3.2 Machine Data Backup
The FLASH ROM of the CPU board stores the RU machine data (configuration information, u NOTE u
scanner information and log information). Since the CPU board shipped as a service part When the CPU board is replaced, network settings on the RU all restore to the default
does not contain the machine data set, it is necessary to restore the RU as exactly it was settings. However, since the Console keeps the settings before the replacement, it cannot
before the replacement by updating the software version and adjusting the machine data be connected if the network settings have been modified to site-specific values. Temporarily
after replacement. change the network settings for re-connection. You need take a note of the addresses for the
purpose.
For the adjustment of the machine data, take either of the following procedures depending on
the RU conditions. (1) Turn ON the power of the Console.
- When the RU can boot up, back up the machine data, and restore the backed up machine
data after the replacement of the CPU board. (2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU.
- When the machine cannot boot up and the machine data cannot be backed up, restore
(3) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
the machine-specific data by means of the machinespecific data CD-ROM attached to
the machine. If no machine-specific data CD-ROM is available, adjust the machine data {MU:1.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
through format adjustment, and shading/sensitivity correction. (4) Connect the recording medium to the Console.
u NOTE u
4.3.1 Replacement Procedures When the machine data is to be backed up in an arbitrary place in the hard disk of the
Console, the procedure (4) need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure (5).
Replace the CPU board according to the procedures mentioned in the following reference
list. (5) Select the RU whose machine data is to be backed up from the “LIST OF
Reference Part concerned EXISTING RU”.
Configuration(C)
{4.3.2} Machine Data Backup EACH RU SETTING

CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
{4.3.3} Replacing the CPU Board RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION

BACKUP RESTORE
ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
{4.3.4} Setting the IP Address of the RU and Console
ALL RUs SETTING
{4.3.5} Updating the RU Software Version

RBMC07101.AI
{4.3.7} Restoring the Machine Data
{4.3.8} Confirming the S Value
{4.3.9} S Value Correction/LED Initialize
u NOTE u
When the IP address of the RU of “172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console of
“172.16.1.20” (initial value) are employed, the procedure (7) in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”
and the procedures of “4.3.4 Setting the IP addresses of the RU and the Console” need not
be taken.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-10
(6) Back up the "CONFIGURATION", "SCN OPTICAL DATA", "HISTORY LOG".
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
BACKUP
CONNECTION TEST
CONFIGURATION
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
EXECUTE #2
#1
ALL RUs SETTING
BACKUP
#3 SCN ALL DATA
EXECUTE #4
BACKUP
#5 HISTORY LOG
EXECUTE #6
RBMC04101.AI
(7) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.
(8) Disconnect the power cable and the I/F cable from the RU.
(9) Eject the recording medium from the console.
(10) Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.

{MC:4.3.1_Replacement Procedures}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-11
4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board (2) Remove the board.
#2 Remove the screws.
CAUTION #3 Remove the board.
u INSTRUCTION u
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. When disconnecting the connector (CN13), hold the position as indicated in the figure
and disconnect it straight. Otherwise, the cable might get damaged.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Rear cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
{MC:4.10_LAN Cover}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-12
(3) Make the DIP switch (S7) settings of a new CPU board to be installed. l Meaning of DIP switch settings
u INSTRUCTIONS u Normal
No Item Meaning
setting
- The DIP switch (S6) is mounted as a spare. Do not change its setting.
- Make the DIP switch settings of a new CPU board to be installed equal to those of the 1 For design OFF Nothing
removed CPU board. If differently set, the machine will not work normally. 2 Machine selection OFF Sets the type of the machine.
Set all to OFF in the machine.
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 Standard machine/ ON Set to adjust the type of the machine.
High-capacity machine Set to ON in the machine.
6 15x30 IP usable/nonusable ON Set to ON for using an IP of 15x30 size.
7 Restoring applications OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PC-
(for troubleshooting) TOOL with the IP address of the RU fixed to
“172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console
When the IP addresses of fixed to “172.16.1.20” .
the RU and the FTP server OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed.
are unknown. ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed.
8 Restoring applications OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PCTOOL
(for troubleshooting) OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed.
ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed.
When the IP addresses of
the RU and the FTP server
are known.
* If both No.7 and No.8 switches are ON, the function of the No.8 switch has priority.
REFERENCE
Refer to the following for details of “CPU Board Setting Display”.
{MU:7.3 [2-1]_CPU Board Setting Display}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-13
4.3.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU 2. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on
The IP address of the RU is set to the default after the replacement of the CPU board. Set
the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
the IP address of the RU to the address before the replacement of the CPU board.
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
REFERENCE
u NOTE u
This chapter describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made as
Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
follows:
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
IP address of the RU: 172.16.1.11
does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the RU power and repeat
IP address of the FTP server: 172.16.1.21
from the procedure 1.
1. Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-14
REFERENCE 4. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once.
The IP address of the RU is set in the procedures 3 to 5.
u NOTE u
3. Make sure that “Reader Unit IP Address” is selected, and then press the [Select] Set the IP address of the RU specified on the DX Console.
button.
5. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button.
→ The address setting window appears.
→ In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified
address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-15
REFERENCE 7. Press the [Select] button.
The IP address of the FTP server is to be set in the procedures 6 to 9.
6. Press the button twice, and select “FTP Server IP Address”.
8. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once.
u NOTE u
Specify the IP address of the DX Console.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-16
9. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button. REFERENCE
In the procedures 11 to 14, “Check of the connection with the DX Console” is performed.
11. Press the button, and select “Network Check”.
10. Set the following addresses according to the conditions before the replacement
of the CPU board.
- Subnet Mask
{MU:3.3_Subnet Mask}
- Default Gateway
12. Press the [Select] button.
{MU:3.5_Default Gateway}
- Secure Host
{MU:3.6_Secure Host}
- Secure Net
{MU:3.7_Secure Net}
→ The “Network Check” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-17
13. Press the [Check] button.
14. Confirm the display on the operation panel.
u NOTES u
- “OK” is displayed in the GOOD indication when “Default Gateway” is specified.
- Take the troubleshooting procedures when the NO GOOD indication appears.
{Troubleshooting}
15. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-18
4.3.5 Updating the RU Software Version (4) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
#1
u NOTE u
- Before procedures, please confirm the part number of the software.
{Front cover : ● Software for this machine}
- In case of the error code "10904" occured after the replacement of the CPU board and the #2
starting of RU, it is necessary to install the RU application by restoring the RU application
procedures.
{MU:4.22_Initialize APL}
FRRB401007.ai
The RU software version is updated to update the RU software in the latest conditions. After l [GOOD indication]
the updating, set the master CL. "value = 0 = 0x0" should be displayed.
(1) Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the Console. l [NO GOOD indication]
Another message is displayed.
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
(5) Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
(2) Click on [START].
#2
#1
RBMC04105.AI
FRRB401008.ai
(3) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”, and click on [FTP]. l [GOOD indication]
"Transfer complete" should be displayed.
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION l [NO GOOD indication]
#1 ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IRxxx Vx.x Another message is displayed.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
#2
ALL RUs SETTING
RBMC04106.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-19
(6) Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF (10) Check the precautions for the installation.
EXISTING RU”, and click on [VERSION UP].
LIST OF EXISTING RU
CAUTION
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION Never turn OFF the power of the RU nor the Console during the write into the FLASH
#1 ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IRxxx Vx.x ROM. If turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and cannot restart.
(11) If a linac cassette is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the linac
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
cassette is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
RU IP ADDR
When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the DX Console display.
BACKUP RESTORE
#2 While the flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u NOTE u
ALL RUs SETTING
RBMC04109.AI
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
(7) Click on [OK]. If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 7 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
RBMC04110.AI
(8) Verify the “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK].
RU VERSION
#1 x.x
#2
RBMC04111.AI
(9) Click on [OK].
RBMC04112.AI
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-20
(12) Verify that the FLASH ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
key.
#1
#2
"Enter" RBMC04114.AI
(13) Click on [OK].
RBMC04115.AI
(14) Verify the RU software version.
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION

#1 ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
#2
RU IP ADDR
l GOOD indication
BACKUP RESTORE
The text is displayed in black.
l NO GOOD indication
The text is displayed in red or the
ALL RUs SETTING
version number is not displayed.
RBMC04116.AI
u NOTE u
If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure (1), and again perform the
installation.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-21
4.3.6 Installing the HR Reading Option Key 3. Input the RU’s IP address (example: 172.16.1.11), and press the [Enter] key.
CAUTION
The following procedures are necessary only in a machine into which the 50 micron
upgrade kit (HR reading option key) has been installed. Do not take the procedures in
a machine without the 50 micron upgrade kit (HR reading option key) installed.
1. Insert the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM (HR reading option key CD-ROM) into
the drive of the DX Console.
→ The installation menu automatically appears.
2. Enter “1” and press the [Enter] key.

→ The message “Installation Completed” appears.
4. Check to make sure that the message indicating the completion of the installation
is displayed, and press the [Enter] key.
→ The message for prompting the input of the RU’s IP address appears.
5. Remove the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM (HR reading option key CD-ROM)
from the drive of the DX Console.
6. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-22
4.3.7 Restoring the Machine Data (1) Select the RU whose machine data is to be restored from the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU”.
The machine is not properly adjusted after the replacement of the CPU board. Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
Restore the backup data created in “4.3.2 Machine Data Backup”, and restore to the
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
conditions before the replacement of the CPU board. RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IRxxx Vx.x
u INSTRUCTIONS u
BACKUP RESTORE
- If the RU was not able to boot up before the replacement of the CPU board and you were ALL RUs SETTING
not able to back up the machine data, restore the machine-specific data by means of the RBMC07101.AI
machine-specific data CD-ROM attached to the machine. (2) Restore “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN OPTICAL DATA” and “HISTORY LOG”.
- If no backup data or machine-specific data is available, take the procedures for the “format
RESTORE
adjustment” and “shading/sensitivity correction” to adjust the machine. Also perform “shading
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
CONFIGURATION
speed correction” when needed.

RU IP ADDR
EXECUTE #2
l Format adjustment
BACKUP RESTORE
#1
{MU:7.3 [5-4]_Format Adjustment} ALL RUs SETTING
l Shading/sensitivity correction (when the IP type ST is used)

{MU:7.3 [5-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)}
RESTORE
l Shading correction (when the IP type HR is used) #3 SCN ALL DATA
{MU:7.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)} EXECUTE #4
l Shading speed correction (when the IP type ST is used)

{MU:7.3 [5-5-4]_Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))}
RESTORE
l Shading speed correction (when the IP type HR is used) #5 HISTORY LOG
{MU:7.3 [5-5-3]_Shading Speed Correction (HR)} EXECUTE #6
RBMC04104.AI
(3) Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.

(4) Turn ON the main power switch of the RU.
(5) Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-23
4.3.8 Confirming the S Value
(1) Confirm the S value.
{IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
4.3.9 S Value Correction/LED Initialize

(1) Correct the S value and initialize LED data.
{MU:7.3 [5-5-8]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
{MU:7.3 [5-8-3]_PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-24
4.4 SND Board (3) Remove the board.
#1 Unclamp the clamp.
CAUTION #3 Remove the screws.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to #4 Remove the board.
#2 #2 #2 #2
CN7 CN14 CN12 CN11
(1) Remove the following components. #2
CN6
{MC:3.1_Cover} #2
- Front cover #2 CN10
#4 CN5
- Rear cover
- Right-hand side cover #2
- Left-hand side cover CN4 #1
{MC:4.9_Operation Panel Assembly} #2 #2 #2
{MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly} CN3 CN2 CN9
(2) Raise the insulation sheet.
#3
#2 Unclamp the clamp. TP3x6 (x4)
#3 Raise the insulation sheet.
XL2A03040009.ai
#1 #3
TP3x6 (x3)
#2
XL2A03040008.ai
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-25
4.5 Antistatic Member n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the antistatic member.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Rear cover
- Left-hand side cover
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly}
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit}
(2) Remove the antistatic member.
#2 Remove the antistatic member.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-26
4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) #3 Disconnect the connector.
#5 Remove the sensor.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Rear cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Front plate
- Rear plate
- Left-hand side plate
{MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly}
{MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit}
{MC:9.8_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:8.1_Scanning Optics Unit} (1) Reinstall the sensor (SG1).
{MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
(2) Remove the sensor (SG1).
#2 Remove the sensor assembly.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-27
4.7 Main Power Switch Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the main power switch assembly.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
(2) Remove the main power switch assembly.
#1 Remove the cover.
#3 Disconnect the FAST-ON terminals.
#4 Remove the main power switch assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Disconnect by using the tool to press the latch shaded in the figure below.
Latch
RBMC04018.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-28
4.8 Main Power Switch and the Power Supply Inlet n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the main power switch and the power supply inlet.
(1) Remove the following components. u NOTES u

{MC:3.1_Cover} - Reinstall the main power switch and the power supply inlet in the orientation as
indicated in the figure.
- Front cover
- Check that the main power switch is OFF.
{MC:4.7_Main Power Switch Assembly}
(2) Remove the main power switch and the power supply inlet.
#1 Remove the main power switch.
#2 Remove the power supply inlet.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-29
4.9 Operation Panel Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the operation panel assembly
(1) Remove the following components. (2) If the operation panel is replaced with a new one, reassemble the machine and
then perform the installation procedure.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover u INSTRUCTION u
- Right-hand side cover When the operation panel is supplied as a service part, its display language and display
(2) Remove the main power switch assembly. screen are not defined. If the operation panel is replaced with a new one, be sure to
#1 Disconnect the connector. perform the installation procedure as directed under "n Check/Adjustment Procedures".
#3 Operation Panel Assembly
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-30
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
After operation panel replacement, delete the RU that is registered in the RU PC-TOOL's
"LIST OF EXISTING RU," and then perform the installation procedure.
u NOTE u
When the operation panel is supplied as a service part, its display language and display
screen are not defined. The display language and display screen for the operation panel can
only be defined during the RU software installation process. Therefore, when the operation
panel is replaced with a new one, be sure to reinstall the RU software.
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.

{MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility}
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," delete the RU for which the operation panel has
been replaced.
u NOTE u
Before deleting the RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU," note down the RU's IP address.
{IN:Appendix 6-1_Deleting an Installed RU}

3. Install the RU software.
u NOTE u
As regards the "Operation Panel Language Display (LANGUAGE)" and "Screen Display
(BRAND TYPE)," which are to be specified during the installation process, select the
same settings as those for the previously used operation panel.
{IN:Appendix 7-3_Installing the RU Software}

4. Turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON.
5. Check the following points.

nonuniformity.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MC-31
4.10 LAN Cover
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
(2) Remove the LAN cover.
#1 Disconnect the connector.
#3 Remove the LAN cover.
(1) Reinstall the LAN cover.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-32
5. Cassette Set Unit (2) Remove the blacket.
5.1 Cassette Set Unit
u NOTE u
Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be careful about the following points when
removing, reinstalling and moving.
- Secure a sufficient working space before the operation. Blacket
- Hold the position where the green label is stuck.
- Lift the unit in a natural posture.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
XL2A0305004.AI
- Rear cover
(3) Raise the insulation sheet.
- Left-hand side cover #1 Remove the screws.
{MC:4.9_Operation Panel Assembly} #2 Unclamp the clamp.
#3 Raise the insulation sheet.
#1 #3
TP3x6 (x3)
#2
XL2A03040008.ai
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-33
(4) Route the cables (front face) out of the housing. (5) Route the cable (right-hand side) out of the housing.
#1 Unclamp the clamps. #1 Unclamp the clamps.
#2 Disconnect the connectors. #2 Put the cable aside.
#3 Put the cables aside.
u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to put aside the cables out of the housing. The cables and the connectors might
Be sure to put aside the cables out of the housing. The cables and the connectors might get damaged when removing/reinstalling the cassette set unit.
get damaged when removing/reinstalling the cassette set unit.
#2
#3 #1
#3 #1
RBMC05002.AI
#2 (6) Remove the screws.

CN6 #1 Remove the screws from the rear.
#2 #2 Remove the screws from the front.
CN5 Never remove.
#2
#1
#2 #1
CN4
RBMC05001.AI
#2
#1
BR4x8 (x2)
BR4x8 (x2)
RBMC05003.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-34
(7) Remove the cassette set unit. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and raise the cassette set unit above the (1) Reinstall the cassette set unit.
frame.
#2 Remove the cassette set unit.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
u NOTE u
- Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the cassette set unit.
Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be sure to secure a sufficient working Reinstall the cassette set unit after you have lifted the unit above the housing frame.
space before the operation, and work in a natural posture. Otherwise, the cassette set unit might come into contact with the housing and get
damaged.
- Reinstall the cassette set unit while aligning the frame of the cassette set unit with the
positioning pin on the housing.
#1
Positioning pin
#2
Frame
RBMC05004.AI
Positioning pin
RBMC05005.AI
- Tighten the screws on the front before reinstalling the cassette set unit.
Tighten first. RBMC05006.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-35
5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly #2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and raise the dust-tight cover assembly
straight to remove.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Rear cover
{MC:4.9_Operation Panel Assembly}
(2) Remove the dust-tight cover assembly.
REFERENCE
Refer to the Service Parts List for the detailed development view of the dust-tight cover
assembly.
{SP:03A_ CASSETTE SET UNIT 1}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-36
(1) ReInstall the dust-tight cover assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Tighten the screws while pressing the half punch of the dust-tight cover assembly
against the frame notch.
u NOTE u
Be sure to lower the dust-tight cover assembly straight for reinstallation, not to allow the
assembly to tilt. If the dust-tight cover assembly is tilted, the sensor or the gear might
get damaged.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-37
5.3 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the motor (MA1).
(1) Remove the following components. u NOTE u

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
(2) Remove the motor (MA1).

#3 Remove the motor.
Connector
#1 RBMC05011.AI
#3
#2
TP4x8 (x2)
RBMC05010.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-38
5.4 Cable Junction Bracket #3 Remove the screws.
#4 Lift up the shutter driving arm.
#5 Remove the cable junction bracket.
u INSTRUCTION u
(1) Remove the following components. Always remove the bracket with the shutter driving arm lifted up. Otherwise, the sensor
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} installed on the bracket might interfere with the shutter driving arm, resulting in the
(2) Remove the cable junction bracket. damage of the sensor.

#2 Disconnect the connectors. Shutter driving arm
#4
#1 Sensor
#2
#5
SA1 #2
SA3
#3
#1 DT3x6 (x2)
RBMC05012.AI
RBMC05013.AI
(1) Reinstall the cable junction bracket.
u INSTRUCTION u
Always reinstall the bracket with the shutter driving arm lifted up. Otherwise, the sensor
installed on the bracket might interfere with the shutter driving arm, resulting in the
damage of the sensor.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-39
5.5 Shutter Drive Arm n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the shutter driving arm.

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Reinstall while putting the protrusion of the shutter drive arm inside the spur gear (black).
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} Spur gear (black)
(2) Remove the shutter driving arm.
#1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Remove the shutter driving arm.
Protrusion
RBMC05016.AI
#2
#1
E4
RBMC05015.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-40
5.6 Spur Gear (Reference Side) (3) Remove the spur gear (black).
#2 Remove the spur gear (black).
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm}
(2) Rotate the gear of the motor (MA1) to a position at which the sensor (SA7) and
spur gear (black) actuator do not interfere with each other.
#1 Rotate the motor.
#2 Check that the actuator does not interfere with the sensor.
#2
Actuator #1
BR3x6
(3B)
#2
Motor (MA1)
RBMC05018.AI
(1) Mount the spur gear (black).
Sensor (SA7) u NOTE u
Reinstall while holding up the arm.
#1
RBMC05017.AI Arm
RBMC05019.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-41
5.7 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the spur gear (white).

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} - Ensure that the mounted spur gears are properly oriented.
(2) Remove the spur gear (white).

#1 Remove the screw. Outside Inside
#2 Remove the spur gear (white).
#3 Remove the spur gear.
Short Long
RBMC05021.AI
- Reinstall while holding up the arm.
#1
BR3x6
(3B)
Arm
#2 #3 #4
RBMC05020.AI
RBMC05022.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-42
5.8 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly (3) Route the cable out of the cassette set unit.
#2 Put the cable aside.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to put aside the cables out of the cassette set unit. The cables and the
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} connectors might get damaged when removing/reinstalling the cassette cover opening
{MC:5.3_Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)} assembly.
{MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)}
{MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)}
(2) Remove the guides.
#1 Remove the screws. #1
#2 Remove the guides.
#2
#1
RBMC05024.AI
#2 #1
#1 #2 TP3x6
TP3x6
RBMC05023.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-43
(4) Remove the cassette cover opening assembly while rotating the shaft end. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u (1) Reinstall the cassette cover opening assembly.
Exercise care not to have the sensor or the cable damaged when removing the cassette Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
cover opening assembly.
Sensor
Cable
Shaft
RBMC05025.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-44
5.9 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft #4 Remove the screw.
#5 Move the cam (inner).
#6 Draw out the straight pin.
{MC:5.3_Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)}
#6
{MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} #5
{MC:5.8_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly}
(2) Move the cam (opposite reference side).
u NOTE u #4
When you remove the cam, the straight pin may drop. Be sure to keep track of the TP3x6
RBMC05029.AI
straight pin.
(3) Move the bearing (opposite reference side).
#1 Remove the screw. #1 Remove the E-ring.
#2 Move the cam (outer). #2 Move the bearing.
#2
#3 #2
#1
E6
#1
TP3x6
RBMC05028.AI
RBMC05030.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-45
(4) Remove the cassette cover opening assembly driving shaft. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the cassette cover opening assembly driving shaft. (1) Reinstall the cassette cover opening assembly driving shaft.
#2 Remove the bearing.
u NOTES u
- Tighten the two cams (reference side) having the marking of the driving shaft first.
Marking
#1
RBMC05033.AI
- Mount the cams in the orientations as indicated in the figure, and check that the two
#2
inner cams and the two outer cams are in the same orientation respectively.
RBMC05031.AI
Cam mounting
orientation
#4 Remove the cams.
#5 Remove the cams on the reference side similarly to the opposite reference side.
REFERENCE
The four cams have the same shape, but the attachment orientation differs between the
two inner cams and the two outer cams.
#3
#4
RBMC05034.AI
#5
RBMC05032.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-46
5.10 Shutter Assembly #3 Disengage the claws of the shutter assembly from the frame holes and remove the
assembly.
REFERENCE Claw
Removal/reinstallation procedures of the shutter assembly are mentioned for the shutter
assembly on the reference side. As for the center and the opposite reference side shutter
assembly, follow the similar procedures as those for the reference side.
#3
(2) Remove the shutter assembly. Hole
#2 Pull the shutter assembly toward you (toward the rear).
RBMC05036.AI
#1 #2 (3) Disassemble the shutter assembly.

TP3x6 (x2)
Guide
Shutter
RBMC05035.AI
Torsion coil spring

RBMC05037.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-47
(1) Reinstall the shutter assembly.
u NOTES u
- Check that the tip of the torsion coil spring is located inside the shutter groove when
assembling the shutter assembly.
Groove
Shutter
Torsion coil spring
RBMC05038.AI
- Align the tip of the torsion coil spring with the groove of the guide plate (frame notch)
when reinstalling the shutter assembly.
Torsion coil spring
Groove
RBMC05039.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-48
5.11 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the sensor bracket assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12).

(2) Remove the sensor bracket assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12).
#3 Remove the sensor bracket assembly.
#4
SA8
#1 #3
#4
SA12
#2 #4
DT3x6 (x2) SA10
RBMC05040.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-49
5.12 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear.

{MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)}
(2) Remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear.
u NOTES u
- When you remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear, the straight pin
may drop. Be sure to keep track of the straight pin.
- When you remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear, the cassette
cover closing assembly may drop. To prevent damage by the drop, support the
cassette cover closing assembly on the hand beforehand.
#1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to support the cassette cover closing
assembly.
#2 Remove the cassette cover closing mechanism driving gear.
#4 Lower the cassette cover closing assembly to its lowermost position.
#3 #1
#2
#4
#5
RBMC05042.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-50
5.13 Cassette Hold Release Arm n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the cassette hold release arm.

(2) Remove the cassette hold release arm assembly.
#2 Remove the cassette hold release arm assembly.
#2
#1
TP3x6
RBMC05043.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-51
5.14 Cassette IP Holding Arm (3) Remove the levers.
#1 Move the cassette IP holding arm to its uppermost position.
#2 Remove the levers.
{MC:5.4_Cable Junction Bracket} #1
{MC:5.12_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear}
{MC:5.13_Cassette Hold Release Arm}
(2) Removing the driving arm. Notch Notch
#1 Remove the tension coil springs.
#2 Removing the driving arms.
#2 #2
RBMC05046.AI
#1 #1
L=42 mm L=42 mm
#2 #2
RBMC05045.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-52
(4) Remove the cassette IP holding arm. n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the cassette IP holding arm.
u INSTRUCTION u
Reinstall the cassette IP holding arm with its face with a hole facing upward.
Hole
RBMC05047.AI
RBMC05048.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-53
5.15 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the cassette inlet guide assembly.
(1) Remove the following components. u INSTRUCTION u

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Tighten the screws while pressing against the half punches of the frame.
{MC:5.14_Cassette IP Holding Arm}
(2) Remove the cassette inlet guide assembly.
RBMC05050.AI
#2 Remove the cassette inlet guide assembly.
#1
TP3x6 (x4)
#2
RBMC05049.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-54
5.16 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) (3) Remove the sensor (SA11).
(2) Remove the sensor assembly.
#1
SA11
#2
RBMC05053.AI
#2
DT3x6
(1) Mount the sensor (SA11).
#1
RBMC05051.AI
#3 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to remove the sensor assembly from the
frame hole.
#3
#4
RBMC05052.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-55
5.17 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) #4 Remove the motor.
WP screw
#1 Disconnect the connector. Notch
#4
#2 Disconnect the connector from the bracket.
RBMC05055.AI
#2 n Reinstallation Procedures
#3
BR3x6 (x3)
#1
MA2
RBMC05054.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-56
5.18 IP Suction Link Mechanism (3) Remove the IP suction link mechanism (opposite reference side).
#1 Remove the arm.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the gear.
REFERENCE
You need not remove the cable junction bracket when only the IP suction link
mechanism on the opposite reference side is to be removed.
(2) Rotate the motor, and move the IP suction arm to its lowermost position.
u NOTE u #2
When you remove the IP suction link mechanism, the IP suction arm may drop. Move BR3x6
the IP suction arm to its lowermost position beforehand to prevent damage by the drop. (3B)
#3 #1
RBMC05057.AI
Motor (MA3) #4 Remove the spur gear.

#5
#4
RBMC05056.AI
IP suction arm
RBMC05058.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-57
(4) Remove the IP suction link mechanism (reference side). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the arm. (1) Reinstall the IP suction link mechanism.
#3 Remove the gear.
u NOTE u
Exercise care in the mounting orientation of the spur gear when putting the gear on the
opposite reference side.
#3
Inside Outside
#1
#2
BR3x6
(3B)
Long Short
RBMC05059.AI
RBMC05060.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-58
5.19 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) n Reinstallation Procedures

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
{MC:5.18_IP Suction Link Mechanism}
REFERENCE
Remove the IP suction link mechanism only on the opposite reference side to remove
the suction arm driving motor (MA3).

#1 Disconnect the connector. Connector
RBMC05062.AI
#2
TP4x8 (x2)
#3
#1
MA3
RBMC05061.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-59
5.20 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft (3) Remove the cassette cover closing assembly driving shaft.
#1 Move the bearings.
#2 Remove the cassette cover closing assembly driving shaft.
(2) Move the spur gears.
#1 #1
REFERENCE
When you move the spur gear, the straight pin may drop. Be sure to keep track of the
straight pin.
#1 Remove the E-rings.

#2 Move the spur gear while supporting it on your hand from downward.
#1 #1
E6 E6
#3 #2
#3
RBMC05064.AI
#3 Remove the bearings.

#2 #2 #4 Remove the spur gears.
#3 #4
#4 #3
RBMC05065.AI
RBMC05063.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-60
(1) Reinstall the cassette cover closing assembly driving shaft.
u NOTE u
Reinstall while putting a shaft end with two holes facing toward the reference side.
Hole
RBMC05066.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-61
5.21 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly (2) Remove the bearings.
#2 Remove the bracket.
n Removal Procedures #3 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to support the cassette cover closing
(1) Remove the following components. assembly.
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} #4 Remove the screws.
{MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} u NOTE u
{MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} Be sure to hold the cassette cover closing assembly in your hand. If the cassette cover
{MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} closing assembly is tilted, the actuator might come into contact with the frame notch and
{MC:5.11_Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)} get damaged.
{MC:5.14_Cassette IP Holding Arm}
{MC:5.15_Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly} Notch
{MC:5.20_Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft}
#2
#1 #4 #5 Actuator #5 #4
TP3x6 TP4x8 TP4x8
#3
RBMC05067.AI
REFERENCE
The bearing on the reference side is a flanged bearing. The bearing on the opposite
reference side has no flange.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-62
(3) Remove the cassette cover closing assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure to move the cassette cover closing (1) Reinstall the cassette cover closing assembly.
assembly horizontally to the position where the actuator can be drawn out from the
frame notch.
#2 Check that the actuator does not interfere with the frame notch.
#2
Notch
Actuator
#1
RBMC05068.AI
#3 Remove the cassette cover closing assembly.
#3
RBMC05069.AI
REFERENCE
Refer to the Service Parts List for the detailed development view of the cassette cover
closing assembly.
{SP:03I_CASSETTE SET UNIT 9}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-63
5.22 Hose n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Attach the hose.
REFERENCE Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
The shape and configuration of the hose differ between a machine with an IP of 15x30 size
u NOTE u
applicable and a machine with an IP of 15x30 size not applicable. Refer to the corresponding
Connect the hose to the IN joint of the IP suction pump.
procedures.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Rear cover
(2) Remove the hoses.
#1 Remove the hose.
#2 Remove the hose. IN RBMC05072.AI
l Machine supporting a 15x30 l Machine not supporting a 15x30

cassette cassette
#1
#1
#2
RBMC05070.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-64
5.23 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) #4 Remove the screw.
#5 Remove the IP air leak valve assembly.
REFERENCE l Machine supporting a 15x30 l Machine not supporting a 15x30

The shape of the IP air leak valve assembly differs between a machine with an IP of cassette cassette
15x30 size applicable and a machine with an IP of 15x30 size not applicable. Refer to the
corresponding procedures.
(1) Remove the following components. #5 #5
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Rear cover
(2) Remove the IP air leak valve assembly (SVA1/SVA2).
#1 Remove the hoses. #4 #4
#2 Disconnect the connectors. DT3x6 DT3x6
RBMC05076.AI
(1) Mount the IP air leak valve assembly (SVA1/SVA2).
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the IP air leak valve
assembly.
l Machine supporting a 15x30 l Machine not supporting a 15x30

cassette cassette
#1 #1
#2 #3 #2 #2 #2 #3 #2
PA1 SVA2 SVA1 PA1 SVA1
RBMC05075.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-65
5.24 IP Suction Pump (PA1) #5 Remove the IP suction pump.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Rear cover
(2) Remove the IP suction pump (PA1).
#1 Remove the hoses. #5
#4 Cut the cable tie.
RBMC05078.AI
#1
#4 (1) Mount the IP suction pump (PA1).
u NOTES u
- Put the IN hose connection between the hooks to reinstall the IP suction pump.
- Put the cable tie to align with the notches.
- Connect the hose to the IN joint of the IP suction pump.
Notch
#2 #3
PA1
RBMC05077.AI
Hook
IN RBMC05079.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-66
5.25 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Emitting Side) (3) Remove the sensor (SA4).
u NOTE u
n Removal Procedures Do not damage or soil the light emitting surface of the IP dropping sensor. Failure to
(1) Remove the following components. observe this precaution may degrade the sensor performance.
{MC:3.1_Cover} #1 Pull out the bracket.

- Rear cover #2 Unclamp the clamp.
(2) Remove the bracket. #3 Disconnect the connector.
#4
BR3x12 #5
#1
#3
SA4-1
#2
#2
#4 RBMC05081.AI
#1
REFERENCE
The IP dropping sensor on the light emitting side differs from the one on the light
receiving side in the number of connector pins. The connector for the light emitting side
#3
has three pins.
DT3x6 (x2)
RBMC05080.AI
Mount the sensor (SA4).
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-67
5.26 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4: Light Receiving Side) (3) Remove the sensor (SA4).
u NOTE u
n Removal Procedures Do not damage or soil the light receiving surface of the IP dropping sensor. Failure to
(1) Remove the following components. observe this precaution may degrade the sensor performance.
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} #1 Remove the screw.

(2) Rotate the motor, and move the cassette cover opening assembly to its #2 Disconnect the connector.
uppermost position. #3 Remove the sensor.
#2
SA4-2
#3
#1
Cassette cover opening assembly BR3x12
RBMC05083.AI
Motor (MA1)
REFERENCE
RBMC05082.AI The IP dropping sensor on the light receiving side differs from the one on the light
emitting side in the number of connector pins. The connector for the light receiving side
has four pins.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-68
5.27 Guide (4) Remove the guide.
#2 Remove the guide (reference side).
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the screws.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the guide (opposite reference side).
(2) Rotate the motor, and move the debris fall prevention shutter assembly to a
position where it closes.
#2
Should be closed.
#1
Motor (MA1)
DT3x6
#4 #3
DT3x6 (x2)
RBMC05086.AI
Debris fall prevention n Reinstallation Procedures

shutter assembly
RBMC05084.AI (1) Reinstall the guide.
(3) Rotate the motor, and move the IP suction arm to a position where you can Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
access the guide screw with a screwdriver.
u INSTRUCTION u
Reinstall the guide (opposite reference side) while aligning the tip of the guide with the
Guide Motor (MA3)
bracket notch.
#2 Notch
#1
RBMC05087.AI
RBMC05085.AI
IP suction arm
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-69
5.28 Suction Cup #3 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and remove the suction cup assembly.
Exercise care not to

REFERENCE damage the hose.
Removal/reinstallation procedures of the suction cup are mentioned for the suction cup
on the opposite reference side. As for the reference side suction cup, follow the similar
procedures as those for the opposite reference side.
n Removal Procedures #3
{MC:5.27_Guide}
(2) Remove the suction cup assembly.
#1 Remove the hose.
RBMC05089.AI
(3) Remove the suction cup.
#1 Remove the KL ring.
#2 Remove the suction cup.
#3 Remove the packing.
REFERENCE
Remove the suction cup by means of a Phillips screwdriver while pressing down the
#2 hose joint with a wrench or the like.
DT3x6 (x2)
Hose joint #1
KL8
#1
RBMC05088.AI #2
#3
RBMC05090.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-70
(1) Reinstall the suction cup.
u NOTES u
- Check that no foreign matter attaches to the sucking surface of the suction cup.
- Make sure that the KL ring is mounted in the right orientation as indicated in the figure.
Otherwise, the suction cup assembly cannot be correctly mounted on the IP suction
arm.
Orientation of the
attachment of the KL ring.
RBMC05091.AI
- Check that there is no excess of the hose in an area surrounded by the dotted line in
the figure. Otherwise, the hose might be pulled and get damaged when moving the IP
suction arm.
RBMC05092.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-71
5.29 IP Transport Motor (MA4) REFERENCE
When the arm of the IP suction link mechanism is located at a position where you
cannot access the screws, it is recommended that you rotate the motor (MA3) to move
n Removal Procedures the IP suction arm to its lowermost position.
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Motor (MA3)
Arm
RBMC05056.AI
IP suction arm
#2
#1
TP4x8 (x2) n Reinstallation Procedures
#3 (1) Mount the motor (MA4).
MA4
RBMC05093.AI
u NOTE u
Reinstall with the connector located in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
Connector
RBMC05094.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-72
5.30 Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the side-positioning transport roller driving gears.

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Exercise care in the mounting orientation of the gear (A).
(2) Remove the side-positioning transport roller driving gears.
#1 Remove the gear (A). Inside Outside
#2 Remove the gear (B).
Long Short
#2
RBMC05096.AI
#1
RBMC05095.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-73
5.31 Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A) and (B) (4) Remove the bearing.
#2 Remove the spur gears.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the spur gears.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the bearings.
{MC:5.30_Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear}
Should be closed.
Motor (MA1) #1 #2 #1 #4 #4 #3 #2 #1
E4 E6 E4
RBMC05098.AI
Debris fall prevention

shutter assembly
RBMC05084.AI
(3) Rotate the motor, and move the IP suction arm to its uppermost position.
Motor (MA3)
RBMC05056r.AI
IP suction arm
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-74
(5) Remove the housing. #4 Remove the screws.
#5 Rotate the housing, and disengage the hook of the housing from the frame hole.
u NOTES u #6 Remove the housing (reference side) while supporting the side-positioning transport
- The housing is fragile at the locations as indicated in the figure. Exercise care not to roller (B) on your hand.
hold the locations shown in the figure when removing/reinstalling the housing.
- The housing has a hook on its back. Exercise care not to damage the hook when
removing/reinstalling the housing.
Exercise care not to damage.
Hook
#5
#6
RBMC05099.AI
#4
DT3x6 (x2)
#2 Rotate the housing, and disengage the hook of the housing from the frame hole. Roller (B)
#3 Remove the housing (opposite reference side).
RBMC05101.AI
(6) Remove the side-positioning transport roller (B).

#1 Move the shaft end on the reference side of the roller along the frame notch.
#2 Remove the roller.
#2 Notch
#3
#1
DT3x6 (x2)
#1
RBMC05100.AI
#2
RBMC05102.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-75
#3 Remove the E-rings. n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the side-positioning transport rollers (A) and (B).
#3 Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
E8
u NOTE u
Attach the rollers (A) and (B) so that the E-ring is located inside the damper.
#3 Damper
E8
RBMC05103.AI
(7) Remove the side-positioning transport roller (A).

#2 Move the roller to the opposite reference side.
#3 Remove the roller. E-ring
RBMC05106.AI
#1 REFERENCE
E8 The shaft on the reference side of the roller (A) is shorter than that of the roller (B).
#2 A
B
#3 B
RBMC05104.AI
#4 RBMC05107.AI
E8
RBMC05105.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-76
5.32 Actuator Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the actuator assembly.

{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit} Reinstall the actuator assembly by passing the tip of the actuator through the stopper
hole.
(2) Remove the actuator assembly.
u NOTE u
Remove the actuator assembly while holding the shaded part.
Stopper hole
Actuator tip
RBMC05109.AI
RBMC05111.AI

#2 Remove the actuator assembly.
#1
DT3x6 #2
RBMC05110.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-77
5.33 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6) (4) Remove the sensor (SA6).
#2
Should be closed.
#1
Motor (MA1) SA6
RBMC05113.AI
Debris fall prevention
shutter assembly
RBMC05084.AI
(3) Rotate the motor, and move the gear of the IP suction link mechanism to a
position where you can access the sensor.
Gear Motor (MA3)
Sensor (SA6)
RBMC05112.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-78
5.34 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) n Reinstallation Procedures

#1
#2
SA7
#4
#3
DT3x6
RBMC05114.AI
(3) Remove the sensor (SA7).
RBMC05115.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-79
5.35 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) n Reinstallation Procedures

{MC:5.16_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)}
#3
#2 #1 #4 #1
DT3x6 SA9
RBMC05116.AI
(3) Remove the sensor (SA9).
RBMC05117.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-80
5.36 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) #4 Support the solenoid assembly on your hand.
#6 Support the cassette hold pin on your hand.
n Removal Procedures #7 Remove the solenoid assembly.
(1) Remove the following components. #8 Disconnect the connector.

Cassette hold pin
(2) Remove the solenoid assembly. #6
#1 Remove the tension coil spring.
#7
#8
SA2
#2
#4
#5
DT3x6 (x2)
RBMC05119.AI
(3) Remove the solenoid (SOLA1).

#1 Remove the cassette hold pin.
#1 #2 Remove the screws.
L=38 mm #3 Remove the solenoid.
#2
#3 #3
SOLA1
#2
#1
RBMC05118.AI
#2
TP3x6 (x2)
RBMC05120.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-81
(4) Remove the sensor (SA2). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Move the actuator to a position where it does not interfere with the sensor. (1) Reinstall the solenoid (SOLA1) and the sensor (SA2).
#2 u NOTES u
- Reinstall with the cable facing as indicated in the figure.
- Reinstall with the pin facing upward.
Pin GOOD NO GOOD
#1
Actuator
RBMC05121.AI
Cable
RBMC05122.AI
- Reinstall by passing the cassette hold pin through the frame hole.
Frame hole
RBMC05123.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-82
5.37 Movable Guide Assembly (3) Remove the bracket.
#2 Remove the bracket from the shaft of the movable guide assembly.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the bracket.
Shaft
{MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} #2
#3
{MC:5.9_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft}
(1) Remove the tension coil spring.
#1 Remove the tension coil spring from the shaft of the movable guide assembly.
#2 Remove the screw. #1
#3 Remove the pin bracket. DT3x6 (x2) RBMC05125.AI

(4) Remove the movable guide assembly.
#2
Shaft DT3x6
#3
#1
#4
L=68 mm
RBMC05124.AI
RBMC05126.AI
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of the movable guide assembly, see the "Service Parts
List" volume.
{SP:03M_CASSETTE SET UNIT 13}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-83
(1) Mount the movable guide assembly.
u NOTE u
Reinstall the tension coil spring by engaging it with the shaft of the movable guide
assembly and the pin bracket groove.
Groove Groove
RBMC05128.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-84
5.38 “15x30 Cassette” Movable Guide Assembly REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly, see
the "Service Parts List" volume.
n Removal Procedures {SP:03L_CASSETTE SET UNIT 12}
(1) Reinstall the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly.
{MC:5.6_Spur Gear (Reference Side)} u NOTE u
{MC:5.7_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} Reinstall by inserting the roller into the hole of the guide plate (A).
Hole of the guide (A)
{MC:5.9_Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft}
{MC:5.16_Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)} Roller
{MC:5.35_"15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9)}
(2) Remove the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly.
#1 Remove the tension coil springs.
#3 Remove the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly.
#2
DT3x6 (x4)
RBMC05130.AI
#3
#1 #1
L=50 mm L=40 mm
RBMC05129.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-85
5.39 IP Suction Arm (3) Remove the IP suction arm.
#1 Move the shaft end on the opposite reference side upward along the groove.
#2 Move the shaft end the reference side downward along the groove.
n Removal Procedures #3 Disengage the shaft end on the reference side from the groove.
Groove
#2
{MC:5.25_IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Emitting Side)}
{MC:5.27_Guide} #3
{MC:5.28_Suction Cup}
{MC:5.29_IP Transport Motor (MA4)} #1
REFERENCE
The IP dropping sensor (SA4: light emitting side) and the suction cup may be removed
integrally with the bracket to remove the IP suction arm.
Shaft end
(2) Remove the bearings and the slide bearings.
RBMC05132.AI

#4 Remove the IP sunction arm.
#2 Remove the slide bearings.
#4
#1 #1
#2 #2
RBMC05133.AI
RBMC05131.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-86
(1) Reinstall the IP sunction arm.
u NOTE u
Reinstall the slide bearings in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
RBMC05134.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-87
5.40 IP Suction Link Shaft #5 Remove the bearings.
(2) Remove the IP suction link shaft. #5
#2 Move the bearing.
#3 Move the IP suction link shaft and the bearing. RBMC05136.AI
#4 Remove the IP suction link shaft.

(1) Reinstall the IP suction link shaft.
u NOTE u
#3 Reinstall while facing the longer of small-diameter-regions toward the reference side.
Small-diameter-region
#4
#1
Long
E6
#2
RBMC05135.AI
RBMC05137.AI
Short
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-88
5.41 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly (3) Remove the pin.
#2 Remove the pin.
{MC:5.30_Side-Positioning Transport Roller Driving Gear}
{MC:5.31_Side-Positioning Transport Rollers (A and B)}
(2) Remove the arms and the bearings.
#1 Remove the screws. #1 #2
#2 Remove the arms. TP4x8
RBMC05139.AI
(4) Remove the debris fall prevention shutter assembly.

#1 Move the shaft end on the reference side along the frame notch.
#2 Disengage the shaft end on the opposite reference side from the frame hole.
#3 Remove the debris fall prevention shutter assembly.
Notch
#3 #3
#1
#2 #2
#2
#1 #1
TP3x6 TP3x6
RBMC05138.AI
#3 RBMC05140.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-89
#4 Remove the torsion coil springs. n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the debris fall prevention shutter assembly.
u NOTE u
Reinstall the debris fall prevention shutter assembly by engaging the torsion coil spring
#5 #4 with the notch of the debris fall prevention shutter assembly and the pin groove.
#4 #5
Notch
Groove
RBMC05141.AI
RBMC05142.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-90
5.42 Guide Plates (A) and (B) (2) Remove the guide plate (A).
#2 Remove the guide plate.
{MC:5.5_Shutter Drive Arm} #2
{MC:5.14_Cassette IP Holding Arm} #1
{MC:5.15_Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly} DT3x6 (x5)
{MC:5.17_Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)}
RBMC05143.AI

(3) Remove the guide plate (B).
{MC:5.19_Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)}
{MC:5.20_Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft} #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the guide plate.
{MC:5.21_Cassette Cover Closing Assembly}
{MC:5.32_Actuator Assembly}
#2
REFERENCE
Only the IP suction link mechanism on the opposite reference side may be removed to
remove the guide plates (A) and (B).
#1
DT3x6 (x3)
RBMC05144.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-91
(1) Reinstall the guide plates (A) and (B).
u NOTE u
Reinstall by passing the roller of the “15x30 cassette” movable guide assembly, if
equipped, into the hole on the guide plate (A).
Hole on the guide (A)
Roller
RBMC05145.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-92
6. Erasure Unit n Removal Procedures

{MC:3.1_Cover}
6.1 Erasure Unit - Front cover
- Louver
CAUTION
(2) Remove the erasure unit.
Before turning on the lamp, make sure to install the erasure unit into the machine.
Do not turn on the lamp by connecting the erasure unit to the machine and turning on
the power while the erasure unit is outside the machine.
#3 Pull out the erasure unit by the fingertips by approx. 100 mm.
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure unit, exercise care in handling as the unit is hot.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-93
#4 Pull out the erasure unit while carrying under it on the hand. #2 Slowly push to the innermost while assuring that the spur gear is engaging. If the
gear does not engage, slightly rotate the spur gear and then insert.
#3 Tighten the screws.

#4 Connect the connectors.
(1) Reinstall the erasure unit.
u NOTES u
Do not forcibly push the erasure unit into the housing if it cannot be pushed to the
innermost. Otherwise, the spur gear of the erasure unit might get damaged.
#1 Place the erasure unit, and slowly push it partway to within approx. 50 mm from the
innermost.
(2) Reinstall the following components.

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Louver
Push in partway.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-94
6.2 Reflection Plate n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mounting the reflection plate.
n Removal Procedures #1 Mount the reflection plate with its notches facing downward.
#2 Reinstall the screws.
#2
TP3x6 (x4)
(2) Remove the reflection plate.
#2 Remove the reflection plate.
u NOTES u #1
- Do not strongly grasp the reflection plate and the filter, when removing the reflection
plate. Otherwise, the lamp located inside the filter might get damaged.
- Do not damage the reflection face of the reflection plate that has been removed. If it
gets damaged, IP erasure might not be performed normally.
#1
DT3x6 (x4) Reflection plate
RBMC06006.AI
(2) Check that the width around the center of the reflection plate is 6 ± 1 mm. If it is
out of the range, remove the reflection plate, and proceed to the procedure (3).
#2
Filter
Reflection plate
RBMC06005.AI
RBMC06007.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-95
(3) Adjust the reflection plate.
#1 Push around the center of the reflection plate, and adjust a warp of the reflection
plate.
#2 Repeat the procedures (1) and (2), and make sure that the warp of the reflection
plate is within an appropriate range.
#1
RBMC06008.AI
(4) Reinstall the following components.

014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-96
6.3 Brush Roller Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the brush roller assembly.

{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} - Reinstall the brush roller assembly by inserting its latches into the bracket holes.
(2) Remove the brush roller assembly.

#2 Remove the brush roller assembly.
Latch
#2
#1 RBMC06010.AI
BR4x25 - Check that the latch and the protrusions of the brush roller assembly are correctly
retained.
RBMC06009.AI
Protrusion
Latch
RBMC06027.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-97
6.4 Brush Roller (4) Remove the stoppers.
#1 Push the claws at both ends of the stopper.
#2 Remove the stoppers.
{MC:6.3_Brush Roller Assembly}
(2) Remove the spur gear.
#2
#1 Open the claws of the spur gear, and remove the gear.
#1
#2
Claw RBMC06012.AI
(5) Remove the brush rollers.

#1 #1 Remove the brush rollers.
RBMC06028.AI

(3) Remove the half clutch spur gears.
#1 Remove the E-ring. #2
#2 Remove the half clutch spur gear.
#3 Remove the half clutch spur gear.
#1
#3
#2
#1 #2
E4
RBMC06013.AI
RBMC06011.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-98
(1) Reinstall the brush roller.
u NOTES u
- Reinstall the brush roller by facing a shorter shaft end toward the claw of the case and
fitting the bearing into the groove.
Longer shaft end
Shorter shaft end

Groove
Claw Groove RBMC06014.AI
- Check that the stopper latch engages inside the case to prevent the stopper from
coming off.
- Reinstall the half clutch spur gear on the longer shaft end in the orientation as indicated
in the figure. If reversely installed, the brush roller assembly will not work normally.
Longer shaft end
RBMC06015.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-99
6.5 Filter (3) Remove the filter.
u NOTE u
#3 Remove the filter from the half punch.
Exercise care not to smear the filter surface when removing/reinstalling the filter.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} #3
{MC:6.2_Reflection Plate}
#2 Remove the cover. #2
#3 #1
TP3x6
RBMC06017.AI
#1 #4 Remove the filter.

TP3x6 (x4)
u NOTE u
Do not bring the filter into contact with the lamp when removing the filter.
#2
Lamp
RBMC06016.AI
Bracket
#4
RBMC06018.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-100
(1) Reinstall the filter.
u NOTES u
Place the filter by aligning the position of the half-punches, and insert the filter into an
aperture of the bracket.
Half-punch
Bracket
RBMC06018a.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-101
6.6 Lamp Assembly (3) Remove the lamp assembly.
n Removal Procedures #3 Disconnect the connectors.
(1) Remove the following components. #4 Remove the screws.
#1
TP3x6 (x4)
#2
RBMC06016.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-102
#5 Remove the lamp assembly.
(1) Reinstall the lamp assembly.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-103
7. Light-Collecting Unit (2) Disconnect the connectors.

#2 Retain the disconnected cables with the clamp.
7.1 Light-Collecting Unit u INSTRUCTION u
Disconnect the connector (CN2) vertically while holding it on the position as indicated in
the figure. Otherwise, the cable gets damaged.
CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are
wearing gloves.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Front plate
(3) Remove the screws.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the acrylic part of the light-collecting unit with a screwdriver
when removing the screws.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-104
(4) Remove the light-collecting unit. n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, raise the light-collecting unit, and (1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit.
disengage from the hooks of the subscanning unit.
#2 Draw out the light-collecting unit with its upper part tilted forward, and remove.
u NOTES u
u INSTRUCTION u
- Insert the light-collecting unit along the guide of the subscanning unit.
Be sure to check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is disengaged from the
hooks of the subscanning unit before removing the light-collecting unit. Otherwise, the
tip of the light-collecting unit might get damaged.
- Check that the bracket of the light-collecting unit is correctly engaged with the hooks of
the subscanning unit.
#3 Place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure.

u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to place the light-collecting unit in the orientation as indicated in the figure. If
reversely placed, load is applied to the adhesive part of the photomultiplier, causing the
light-collecting unit to be damaged.
- Make sure that the connector (CN2) is correctly connected. Otherwise, an image with a
transparent portion will result.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-105
(2) Check to make sure that the ferrite core is clamped as shown below. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{MU:4.23_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
Ferrite core
Clamp (2) Restore the machine-specific data
{MU:4.16_RESTORE}
(3) Initialize the LED data.
{MU:7.3 [5-8-3]_PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize}
(4) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(5) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

Do not clamp the board cables
l No abnormal S-value is exhibited and image read normally takes place.
of the scanning optics unit. RBMC07013.AI
(3) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the light-
collecting unit, and carry out “Initialize the LED data” of the MUTL, when the light- l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
collecting unit is replaced with a new one. nonuniformity.
u INSTRUCTION u
When the light-collecting unit has been replaced with a new one, restore the attached l There is no error occurrence.
machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:7.1_Light-Collecting Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-106
7.2 PMT Board (3) Remove the board assmbly.
#1 Loosen the screws.
CAUTION
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Front plate
(2) Disconnect the connectors. #2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, slowly raise the board assembly, and
#1 Disconnect the connectors. remove it.
u INSTRUCTION u
Disconnect the connector (CN2) vertically while holding it on the position as indicated in
the figure. Otherwise, the cable gets damaged.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-107
(4) Remove the board. (2) Check to make sure that the ferrite core is clamped as shown below.
#2 Remove the board.
Ferrite core
Clamp

of the scanning optics unit. RBMC07013.AI
(3) When the board is replaced with a new one, recover the machine, and then
confirm the S-value.
n Reinstallation Procedures {IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
(1) Reinstall the board. (4) If the PMT board is replaced with a new one, perform the "SCN ALL DATA" backup
procedures.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
u NOTE u
Put the connector and the bracket in the orientation as indicated in the figure for (5) Check the following points.
reinstallation.
Bracket
nonuniformity.
Connector
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-108
8. Scanning Optics Unit u NOTE u

Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the label
indicating how to place the scanning optics unit.
8.1 Scanning Optics Unit
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
CAUTION
Never touch the window of the scanning optics unit. If fingerprints or the like are left
on the window, the scanning optics unit must be replaced.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
u NOTE u
If you are going to use the scanning optics unit that was used in another machine, install
it and then make a shading speed correction. After shading correction, back up the "SCN
OPTICAL DATA".
{MU:7.3 [5-5-4]_Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))}
{MU:7.3 [5-5-3]_Shading Speed Correction (HR)}
Window of scanning optic unit
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-109
n Removal Procedures (3) Remove the scanning optics unit.
(1) Remove the following components. #1 Loosen the screws.
#2 Hold the green label and pull up the scanning optics unit.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
#3 Draw out the scanning optics unit forward in parallel, and remove it.
- Front cover
{MC:3.2_Plate} u NOTE u
- Front plate Raise the scanning optics unit to a position where the four holes on the unit do not
{MC:9.2_Post-Reading Guide Assembly} interfere with the screw head, and pull out the unit.
{MC:9.8_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}
(2) Disconnect the connectors.

Green label
Green label
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-110
(4) Place the scanning optics unit. n Reinstallation Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u (1) Reinstall the scanning optics unit.
Place the scanning optics unit in the orientation as shown in the figure, according to the Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
label indicating how to place the scanning optics unit. u INSTRUCTIONS u
- When the scanning optics unit is to be replaced, install the unit after peeling a dust tight
tape applied to the window of the scanning optics unit.
- Check that the scanning optics unit is correctly put on the retaining screw.
- Tighten the retaining screw while pressing the scanning optics unit against the
positioning pin.
Positioning pin
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-111
(2) Make sure that the cable is routed as shown in the figure below, after the light- n Check/Adjustment Procedures
collecting unit is installed.
{MU:4.23_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
Ferrite core (2) Restore the machine-specific data.

Clamp
{MU:4.16_RESTORE}
(3) Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
(4) Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

nonuniformity.
of the scanning optics unit. l There is no error occurrence.
Clamp
RBMC08009.AI
(3) Restore the machine-specific data from the CD-ROM attached to the scanning
optics unit, after the machine is restored exactly as it was.
u INSTRUCTION u
When the scanning optics unit has been replaced with a new one, always restore the
attached machine-specific data, referring to “n Check/Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:8.1_Scanning Optics Unit n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-112
9. Subscanning Unit (3) Disconnect the connectors.

9.1 Subscanning Unit
{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Rear cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Front plate
- Rear plate
- Left-hand side plate
{MC:9.8_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}
{MC:8.1_Scanning Optics Unit}
(2) Disconnect the connectors.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-113
(4) Set aside the cable out of the housing. (6) Remove the subscanning unit.
#1 Draw out the subscanning unit halfway.
#2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and remove the subscanning unit.
(5) Remove the screws. n Reinstallation Procedures

#1 Remove the screws from the front.
(1) Reinstall the subscanning unit.
#2 Remove the screws from the rear.
Never remove.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-114
9.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.

{MC:3.1_Cover} Put the post-reading conveyor guide assembly on the guide of the subscanning unit,
- Front cover and then reinstall.
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Front plate
(2) Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.
#2 Hold the position as indicated in the figure, and remove the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-115
9.3 Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures u NOTE u

(1) Remove the following components. Rotate the flywheel, and check to make sure that the Kapton® belt does not come off.
{MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit}
(2) Remove the Kapton® belt and the flywheel.
#2 Remove the Kapton® belt.
#4 Remove the flywheel.
u NOTE u
When removing/reinstalling the Kapton® belt, exercise care not to turn the belt inside
out. The machine might not work normally.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-116
9.4 Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) 9.5 Subscanning Motor (MZ1)
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. (1) Remove the following components.
{MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit}
(2) Remove the rubber belt and the flywheel. {MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)}
(2) Remove the motor (MZ1).
CAUTION #1 Unclamp the clamps.
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to #2 Remove the screws.
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body #3 Remove the motor assembly.
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. #4 Unclamp the clamps.
#1 Remove the rubber belt. #6 Remove the motor.
#3 Remove the flywheel.
u NOTE u
Reinstall the rubber belt with its glossy face facing outward. If the rubber belt is placed inside n Reinstallation Procedures
out, the machine might not work normally. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-117
9.6 IP Transport Motor (MC1) 9.7 Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

(1) Remove the following components. (1) Remove the following components.
{MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit}
(2) Remove the motor (MZ1). (2) Remove the motor (MC2).
#1 Remove the screws. #1 Remove the screws.
#2 Remove the motor. #2 Remove the motor.
n Reinstallation Procedures Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-118
9.8 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the sensor (SZ1).
(1) Remove the following components. u INSTRUCTION u

{MC:3.1_Cover} Place the sensor in the orientation as indicated in the figure when reinstalling the sensor.
- Front cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Front plate
(2) Remove the sensor (SZ1).
#3 Retain the disconnected cable with the clamp.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-119
9.9 Light-Collecting Shaft (Light-Collecting Mirror, Antistatic (3) Remove the tension coil spring and the bearing on the opposite reference side.
Member) u NOTE u
When installing the bearing, make sure that the direction of the guide protrusion is
shown in below.
(1) Remove the following components. #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit} #2 Remove the KL ring.
{MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)} #3 Remove the hook.
{MC:9.4_Rubber Belt, Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)}
(2) Remove the spur gear and the bearing on the opposite reference side.
#3 Remove the KL ring.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-120
(4) Remove the light-collecting shaft. n Reinstallation Procedures
CAUTION
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not be hurt the reflective surface of the collector mirror with contacting the
Reinstall the light-collecting shaft by putting its protrusion under the pin on the frame.
surrounding.
#1 Move to the opposite reference side.

#2 Remove the light-collecting shaft.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-121
9.10 Rubber Roller (A, B) n Removal Procedures
n Roller Location {MC:9.1_Subscanning Unit}

{MC:9.6_IP Transport Motor (MC1)}
{MC:9.7_Grip Release/Dust Remove Motor (MC2)}
{MC:9.12_Rubber Roller (E)}
Rubber roller (B) {MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly}
(2) Remove the bracket and the spur gear.
Rubber roller (A) #1 Remove the screws.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-122
(3) Remove the upper screws and loosen the lower screw that secures the guide. (4) Remove the rubber roller (A, B).
#2 Loosen the screws. #2 Remove the rubber roller (A, B) assembly.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of the rubber roller (A, B) assembly, see the "Service
Parts List" volume.
{SP:07F_SUB SCANNING UNIT 6}
REFERENCE
The shaft of the roller (A) on the opposite reference side is longer than that of the roller (B).
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-123
9.11 Rubber Roller (C, D) n Removal Procedures

{MC:9.13_Conveyor Guide Assembly}
{MC:9.10_Rubber Roller (A, B)}
Rubber roller (C)
(2) Remove the spur gear and the bracket.
Rubber roller (D)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-124
(3) Remove the conveyor guide (A) and the conveyor guide (B). (4) Remove the rubber roller (C, D).
#2 Remove the conveyor guide (A). #2 Remove the rubber roller (C, D) assembly.
#4 Remove the conveyor guide (B).
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of the rubber roller (C, D) assembly, see the "Service
Parts List" volume.
{SP:07G_SUB SCANNING UNIT 7}
REFERENCE
The shaft of the roller (C) on the opposite reference side is longer than that of the roller (D).
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-125
9.12 Rubber Roller (E) n Removal Procedures

(2) Remove the spur gear on the reference side.
Rubber roller (E)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-126
(3) Remove the spur gear on the opposite reference side. (4) Remove the housing.
#1 Remove the E-ring. [Reference side]
#2 Remove the spur gear. #1 Remove the tension coil spring.
#4 Remove the housing.
[Opposite reference side]
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-127
(5) Remove the rubber roller (E). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the KL-ring. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#2 Remove the rubber roller (E).
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-128
9.13 Conveyor Guide Assembly (3) Remove the conveyor guide assembly.
#2 Remove the conveyor guide assembly.
n Removal Procedures #3 Disconnect the connector.
(2) Remove the connector.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-129
9.14 Rubber Roller (F) n Removal Procedures

(2) Remove the rubber roller (F).
[Reference side]
[Opposite reference side]
#7 Remove the rubber roller (F).
Rubber roller (F)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-130
9.15 Grip Release Arm (3) Remove the grip release arm.
#1 Move the arm.
n Removal Procedures #3 Remove the grip release arm.
(2) Remove the bearing.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-131
9.16 Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip (3) Remove the motor assembly.
Sensor (SZ2) #1 Rotate the shaft, and bring the actuator away from the sensor.
#3 Remove the motor assembly.
#1 Place the subscanning unit with its front facing upward.
(4) Remove the motor (MZ2) and the sensor (SZ2).

014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-132
(1) Reinstall the motor (MZ2) and the sensor (SZ2).
u NOTES u
- Reinstall with the connector facing in the orientation as indicated in the figure.
- When reinstalling the motor assembly, tighten the screw while pressing the bracket
against the shaft.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-133
9.17 Subscanning Grip Assembly (3) Remove the subscanning grip assembly.
n Removal Procedures #3 Move the bearing.
{MC:9.3_Kapton® Belt, Flywheel (Reference Side)}
{MC:9.16_Subscanning Grip Motor (MZ2) and Subscanning Grip Sensor (SZ2)}
#4 Move the bracket, and remove the pin of the subscanning grip assembly from the
guide hole.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-134
#5 Remove the subscanning grip assembly. - Put the spring between the cams. If the spring is disengaged, rotate the shaft and put
the spring between the cams.
- Make sure that the flange of the subscanning grip assembly is correctly fitted into the
cam groove. Otherwise, abnormalities in images will result.
Flange Flange
(1) Reinstall the subscanning grip assembly.
u NOTES u Groove Groove
- Reinstall the subscanning grip assembly by inserting its pin into the guide hole.
GOOD NO GOOD
RBMC09111.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-135
9.18 IP Sensor (SC3) n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the sensor (SC3).

(2) Remove the sensor (SC3).
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-136
9.19 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) n Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Mount the sensor (SC9).

{MC:3.1_Cover}
- Front cover
- Louver
- Rear cover
{MC:3.2_Plate}
- Rear plate
(2) Remove the sensor (SC9).
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-137
9.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) n Removal Procedures

(2) Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper).
#2 Remove the hook.
#6 Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper).
REFERENCE
You need not remove the bracket on the reference side.
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-138
(1) Reinstall the driven shaft grip roller (upper).
REFERENCE
Place the driven shaft grip roller (upper) with the shaft end having a hole facing the
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-139
9.21 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) n Removal Procedures

{MC:9.17_Subscanning Grip Assembly}
(2) Remove the hook.
#2 Remove the hook.
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-140
(3) Remove the driven shaft grip roller (lower). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the E-ring. (1) Reinstall the driven shaft grip roller (lower).
#3 Remove the guide (white).
#4 Remove the driven shaft grip roller (lower). REFERENCE
Place the driven shaft grip roller (upper) with the shaft end having a small rubber roller
facing the opposite reference side.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-141
9.22 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) n Removal Procedures

(2) Remove the hook.
#2 Remove the hook.
Driving Shaft Grip Roller (lower)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-142
(3) Remove the driving shaft grip roller (lower). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the E-ring. (1) Reinstall the driving shaft grip roller (lower).
#3 Remove the guide (white).
#4 Remove the driving shaft grip roller (lower). REFERENCE
Place the driving shaft grip roller (lower) with the shaft end having a small rubber roller
facing the opposite reference side.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-143
9.23 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) (1) Remove the following components.
n Roller Location
{MC:9.22_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)}
(2) Remove the guide.
#2 Remove the guide.
Driving Shaft Grip Roller (upper)
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-144
(3) Remove the driving shaft grip roller (upper). n Reinstallation Procedures
#1 Remove the screw. (1) Reinstall the driving shaft grip roller (upper).
#4 Remove the driving shaft grip roller (upper). REFERENCE
#5 Remove the bearing. Place the driving shaft grip roller (upper) with the shaft end having a hole facing the
REFERENCE
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-145
9.24 Center Roller n Removal Procedures

(2) Remove the center roller.
#4 Remove the center roller.
REFERENCE
Center Roller
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-146
(1) Reinstall the center roller.
REFERENCE
Place the center roller with the shaft end having the free roller (x3) facing the opposite
reference side.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-147
10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations n Fuse Replacement Procedures
CAUTIONS
10.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
n Fuse Classification - When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and
replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage. At that time, check the Rated
l How to understand fuse notations amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below. - To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
(1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
Rated amperage of
1.6A
Fuse classification
symbol
[Remove]
Fuse
RBMC10005.AI
Pin
RBMC10004.AI
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-148
10.2 CPU Board Fuses 10.3 SND Board Fuses
n Fuse Location n Fuse Location
n Fuse Information
Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F8 LM 48 V 1A
F9 LM 48 V 2A
F10 LM 48 V 2A
n Fuse Information
F7 LM 48 V 1A
F13 LM 48 V 1.6 A
F19 LM 48 V 1A
F20 LM 48 V 1.6 A
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-149
10.4 PIF63A Board Fuses
n Fuse Location
n Fuse Information
F1 LM 48 V 1A
F2 LM 48 V 5A
F3 LM 48 V 3.2 A
F4 LM 48 V 1.6 A
F6 LM 48 V 5A
F7 LM 48 V 3.2 A
F8 ST 250 V 8A
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-150
11. List of Jigs and Tools
11.1 Jigs and Tools

No applicable component
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MC-151
BLANK PAGE
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Control Sheet
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 39-41, 59, 165-170
Maintenance Utility (MU)

01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-1
1. Overview of RU Service Utility 1.2 RU Operation Panel
The RU Service Utility consists of six kinds of utilities including the User Utility, Machine Change the RU settings or check its operation from the RU operation panel. The menu
Maintenance Utility, RU PC-TOOL, Client PC, CLIENT PC-TOOL, and MUTL. items displayed on the operation panel screen can be selected/executed by the four control
The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by end users as well, while the buttons.
Machine Maintenance Utility, RU PC-TOOL, Client PC, CLIENT PC-TOOL and MUTL offer
maintenance tools used exclusively by service engineers.
The User Utility and Machine Maintenance Utility are operated from the operation panel of
the RU machine, the RU PC-TOOL and MUTL are operated from the DX Console, and the
Client PC and CLIENT PC-TOOL are operated on the client PC.
1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility

The architecture of the RU Service Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.
n Tree Diagram
RU Service Utility
{MU:2._User Utility}
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance Utility}
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL} n To Execute the Menu Item “Mode change”

{MU:5._Client PC} To change the mode, press the control button below “Mode change”.
{MU:6._CLIENT PC-TOOL}
{MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
u INSTRUCTION u
The menus of the MUTL for "For Design" should never be used for routine servicing
procedures. In the Maintenance Utility volume, their functions and procedures are not
described.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
1.3 Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes 1.3.1 Description of Buttons
Described in this section is the procedure for selecting the menu items displayed on the The buttons to be used in the menu selection in the respective modes are mentioned below.
operation panel.
Button Function
The following is the menu selection window for the Machine Maintenance Utility.
Return button Returns to the User Utility window.
button Moves the cursor one item up from the current selection.
button Moves the cursor one item down from the current selection.
Select button Displays the setting window of the item selected by the
/ buttons.
Confirm button Sets the item selected by the / buttons in the RU.
Check button Used when executing the “Network Check” and “Loop Back Test” in
the Machine Maintenance Utility.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-3
1.3.2 Procedures for Menu Selection 3. Press the Select button.
The procedures for selecting “Loop Back Test” in the Machine Maintenance Utility are
described as an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility.
2. Press the button seven times and select “Loop Back Test”.
→ The window of the selected menu appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-4
1.4 Method of Setting the Addresses 1.4.1 Description of Buttons
The procedures for setting addresses such as the Reader Unit IP Address and Subnet Mask The buttons to be used to set the addresses are mentioned below.
from the operation panel are described. Button Function
The following is the window for setting the Reader Unit Address.
Return button Returns to the menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance
Utility. The address being changed is canceled.
button Moves the cursor one digit left from the current digit.
button Increments the value of the current digit by one.
button Decrements the value of the current digit by one.
button Moves the cursor one digit right from the current digit.
Confirm button Sets the changed address in the RU and returns to the menu selection
window of the Machine Maintenance Utility.
u NOTE u
When the addresses for the Subnet Mask, Secure Host and Secure Net are to be effective,
The following address items are set from the operation panel. be sure to turn OFF the RU power after the addresses are set, and then turn it ON again.
- Reader Unit IP Address The changed address is not set in the RU only by pressing the [Confirm] button.
- Subnet Mask
- FTP Server IP Address REFERENCES
- Default Gateway - The [Return] button appears only when the cursor is at the leftmost digit. To return to the
- Secure Host menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance Utility, move the cursor to the leftmost
- Secure Net digit by pressing the [←] button. Then press the [Return] button.
- The [Confirm] button appears only when “OK” is selected. To return to the menu selection
window of the Machine Maintenance Utility, after the set address is made effective, move
the cursor to “OK” by pressing the [→] button. Then press the [Confirm] button.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-5
1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the Address 3. Press the button once, select “OK”, and press the Confirm button.
The procedures of changing the address from “172.016.001.010” to “172.013.001.018” are

1. Press the button five times and then press the button three times.
2. Press the button six times and then press the button eight times.
→ An alarm sound beeps 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, and the
display returns to the menu selection window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-6
2. User Utility n Tree Diagram

The architecture of the User Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.
The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by both the end user and service engineer. User Utility
u NOTE u
Equipment info*
The menu items appearing in the “User Utility” depend on the settings of the EDIT
CONFIGURATION specified at the time of installation. Scanner Cleaning*
Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for details of the EDIT CONFIGURATION settings.
{MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} Set alarm volume*
Set alarm silencing option*

See the Instruction Manual.
2.1 Overview of User Utility Set button volume*
Panel brightness*
n User Utility Window
Panel OFF timer*
Set Hibernation timer*
{MU:2.3_Select master IIP console}
For more detail on those marked by *, see the Instruction Manual.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-7
n Overview of Functions
The overview of the User Utility functions is presented below.
l Equipment info
"Equipment description", "Number of IP read", "Number of IP conveyance", "Total time of
laser ON", and "Total time of erasure lamp ON", and "Date of installation" are displayed.
The respective values are those specified by the EDIT HISTORY of the RU PC-TOOL. Refer
to “4.12 EDIT HISTORY” for details of the EDIT HISTORY.
{MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
l Scanner Cleaning
The light-collecting mirror is rotated to clean the light-collecting face of the light-collecting
guide and perform its home-positioning.
l Set alarm volume

Used to set the volume of the alarm sound.
l Set alarm silencing option

Used to set how to stop the alarm sound.
l Set button volume

Used to set whether to enable or disable the sound when a button is touched. This is also
used to set the volume of the button touch sound.
l Panel brightness
Used to set the contrast of the LCD panel.
l Panel OFF timer

Used to set the time until the backlight is automatically turned OFF when no button operation
takes place.
l Set Hibernation timer

Used to set the time until the RU automatically enters the sleep mode when the RU is idle.
l Select master IIP console

Refer to “2.3 Select master IIP console” for details of the master IIP console.
{MU:2.3_Select master IIP console}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-8
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility 2.3 Select master IIP console
The procedures for starting and exiting the User Utility are described below. Set the DX Console to be used as a master CL among those registered during the installation
or those registered by the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. The setting can be done
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility only when “HOSPITAL” is selected in the “SCREEN TYPE” setup during the installation or
version-update of the RU software.
CAUTION 2.3.1 Function

When starting the User Utility, make sure that all the processing, such as reading, has
been completed and the machine is in READY state. The master CL can be changed. Up to four DX Console can be registered. One of them can
be set as the RU’s default master CL.
1. Press the [Utility] button.
CAUTION
Even when the master CL is changed, the IP address of the FTP server that is set in
the RU remains unchanged. Information to be stored in the FTP server, such as error
logs, is written into the FTP server of the IP address that is set in the RU.
2.3.2 Procedures
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility
u NOTE u
1. Press the [Back] button. Do not change the master CL unless an emergency arises or the machine is faulty.
Changing the master CL erases the "ERROR LOG", "HISTORY LOG", and other data
necessary for the user.
For the master CL change procedure, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" in the
Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 4._Setting the Master CL}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-9
3. Machine Maintenance Utility u NOTE u

If the Machine Maintenance Utility is started up during bootup, the [Return] button in the lower
The Machine Maintenance Utility offers a maintenance tool used exclusively by the service right corner of the Machine Maintenance Utility window is hidden. This provision is made
engineer. to prevent an initialization process from being inadvertently started during maintenance, as
Setup of the RU’s IP address, the check of network connection from the RU side or the like is “Under maintenance” does not appear on the RU operation panel if the Machine Maintenance
operated from the operation panel of the RU. Utility is started up during bootup.
Setup items include the followings:
- Reader Unit Address
- Subnet Mask
- FTP Server IP Address
- Default Gateway
- Secure Host
- Secure Net
- Network Check
- Loop Back Test
- HV On/Off
Note that the setup items of the Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set from the DX
Console or the client PC.
n Machine Maintenance Utility Window
3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance Utility
n Tree Diagram of Machine Maintenance Utility

Machine Maintenance
{MU:3.2_Reader Unit IP Address}
{MU:3.4_FTP Server IP Address}
{MU:3.7_Secure Net}
{MU:3.8_Network Check}
{MU:3.9_HV On/Off}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-10
3.2 Reader Unit IP Address 3.2.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the RU to "172.016.001.011" are described as
an example.
2. Select “Reader Unit IP Address”.
Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
3.2.1 Function selection method.
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
Used to set the IP address of the RU in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU.
Setting the IP address of the RU specified here in the CL attains the network connection from 3. Set the IP address.
the CL to the RU.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address is set to "172.016.001.010".
- Do not change the IP address setting of "172.016.001.010" when the machine is to be used
under the conditions as shipped from the factory.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility.

{MU:3.10.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-11
3.3 Subnet Mask 3.3.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the subnet mask to "255.255.255.000" are described as an
example.

2. Select “Subnet Mask”.
Used to set the subnet mask in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. With the {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
subnet mask set, networking devices capable of exchanging data can be limited. 3. Set the subnet mask.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU63A board, the subnet mask is set to "255.255.000.000".
- Do not change the subnet mask setting of "255.255.000.000" when the machine is to be
used under the conditions as shipped from the factory.
method.
u NOTE u
The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm]
button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup
contents effective.

5. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-12
3.4 FTP Server IP Address 3.4.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the FTP server to "172.016.001.021" are

2. Select “FTP Server IP Address”.
3.4.1 Function Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
selection method.
Used to set the IP address of the FTP server which contains the HISTORY LOG, ERROR {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
LOG, configuration information or the like in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU.
Setting the IP address of the FTP server attains the network connection from the RU to the 3. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
FTP server.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address of the FTP server is set to
"172.016.001.020".
- Do not change the FTP IP address setting of "172.016.001.020" when the machine is to be
used under the conditions as shipped from the factory.
method.
u NOTE u

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-13
3.5 Default Gateway 3.5.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the gateway to "172.016.001.001" are described
as an example.
2. Select "Default Gateway".
Used to set the IP address of the gateway, if the machine is networked via the gateway,
3. Set the IP address of the Gateway.
in the flash ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the gateway
attains the network connection with a machine with different network settings connected with
the gateway.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address of the gateway is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the gateway is not to be used.
The following diagram shows an example of network connection between networks with
different subnet mask settings.
method.
u NOTE u

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-14
3.6 Secure Host 3.6.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the Secure Host to "172.016.001.021" are

2. Select "Secure Host".
Used to set the IP address of a machine connectable with the RU via the telnet in the flash
ROM on the CPU63A board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the Secure Host disables 3. Set the IP address of the Secure Host.
the connection with a networking device with an IP address except the setup IP address via
the telnet. This assures certain security.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU63A board, the IP address of the Secure Host is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the Secure Host is not to be
used.
method.
u NOTE u
contents effective.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-15
3.7 Secure Net 3.7.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the network address of the Secure Net to "172.016.000.000" are

2. Select "Secure Net".
selection method.
Used to set the network address connectable with the RU via the telnet in the flash ROM {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
of the RU. Setting the network address of the Secure Net disables the connection with
a networking device out of the setup range of the network addresses via the telnet. This
3. Set the IP address of the Secure Net.
assures certain security.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU63A board, the network address of the Secure Net is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the Secure Net is not to be
used.
method.
u NOTE u
contents effective.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-16
3.8 Network Check 3.8.2 Procedures
The procedures of a setup example where the FTP server is connected with the network and
the gateway is not used are described.
2. Select "Network Check".
selection method.
Used to check whether the network connection with the PC specified as the FTP server {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
and the gateway is made by executing the PING command from the RU. The result of the
network check appears on the operation panel. 3. Press the [Check] button.
u INSTRUCTION u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, remedy the error with reference to the
Troubleshooting Volume.
{Troubleshooting}

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-17
3.9 HV On/Off 3.9.2 Procedures
The procedures for turning OFF the HV switch (software switch) are described as an
example.
2. Select "HV On/Off".
selection method.
Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
REFERENCE
3. Select “OFF” and press the [Confirm] button.
If the high-voltage switch of the SCN23A is set to OFF, the HV switch (software switch)
cannot be turned ON (although ON or OFF is selectable, the setting is not effective).

u NOTE u
REFERENCE
After you exit from the Machine Maintenance Utility and return to the main window, the
HV-OFF error window (error code: 11200) appears. Press the [Confirm] button on the
error window. The display returns to the main window, and “HV-OF” blinks on the top of
the window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-18
3.10 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility 3.10.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility during Initialization
How to start and exit the Machine Maintenance Utility is described. 1. Turn ON the RU circuit breaker.
REFERENCE
The RU does not become READY unless it is connected to the DX Console (the operation
panel reads the error message “DX Console communication error”). However, even when the
RU is not connected to the DX Console, the Machine Maintenance Utility can be started, for
instance, to set the RU’s IP address.
The Machine Maintenance Utility is started up by one of the following three methods
depending on the RU state.
- To start the Machine Maintenance Utility during bootup of the RU.
{MU:3.10.1_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility during Initialization}
- To start the Machine Maintenance Utility while the RU is in the READY state.
{MU:3.10.2_Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility during READY State}
- To start the Machine Maintenance Utility when an error occurs in the RU.
{MU:3.10.4_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility when Error Occurred}
Refer to the following procedures for exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-19
2. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. 3.10.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility during READY
Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on State
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel. 1. Press the [Utility] button.
u NOTE u
→ The “Utility” window appears.
2. Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the Machine Maintenance Utility does not start up, exit the user utility by pressing the
[Back] button. Then, repeat the above procedures.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-20
3.10.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility 3.10.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility when Error Occurred
n When the [Return] Button Is Not Displayed in the Lower Left Corner of the
1. If “System down” appears, press the leftmost button while pressing the third
button from the left.
Operation Panel

n When the [Return] Button Is Displayed in the Lower Left Corner of the
Operation Panel
1. Press the [Return] button.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-21
4. RU PC-TOOL 4.1.2 Tree Diagram

RU PC-TOOL
4.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:4.3_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
{MU:4.10_INSTALL}
RU PC-TOOL Ver.2.5 {MU:4.4_NEW}
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
{MU:4.11_VERSION UP}
EACH RU SETTING {MU:4.5_DELETE}
CONNECTION TEST {MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME ru1 {MU:4.6_MUTL}
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION NEW
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru1 172.16.1.10 XXXXXX V1.0 {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:4.7_PING}
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE {MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:4.8_MON}
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION {MU:4.15_BACKUP}
{MU:4.9_FTP}
EDIT CL NAME
{MU:4.16_RESTORE}
BACKUP RESTORE
ERROR LOG {MU:4.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
EXECUTE EXECUTE
{MU:4.18_ERROR DB}
I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
ALL RUs SETTING ALL RUs SETTEING

UNINSTALL VERSION UP
{MU:4.19_UNINSTALL:ALL RUs}
FRCH4404.EPS
{MU:4.20_VERSION UP:ALL RUs}

REFERENCE
The version of the RU PC-TOOL is displayed on the upper left of the RU PC-TOOL window.
Configuration
{MU:4.21_CDPath}
Operation
{MU:4.22_Initialize APL}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-22
4.2 Outline of RU PC-TOOL n Resetting the “Under Maintenance” Message
Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. The “Under
RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer. Maintenance” message disappears, and the button control is accepted on the operation
Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the DX panel. IP conveyance takes place.
Console to RU, are performed on the DX Console connected to the RU via the network.
Note that, however, that the blinking “Under Maintenance” message appears on the top of
the operation panel even if you reset the “Under Maintenance” message appearing at the
4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel center of the operation panel.
“Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, indicating that the RU is under
maintenance.
n “Under Maintenance” Message

When a command to change the contents on the flash ROM is executed from the RU PC-
TOOL, “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, and the message of
“Can't process the cassette” appears at the center.
While “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, no button control can
be accepted. No IP conveyance takes place even if you insert a cassette.
REFERENCE
The blinking “Under Maintenance” message on the top of the operation panel indicates that
a command to change the contents of the flash ROM has been executed from the RU PC-
TOOL.
n To Terminate the “Under Maintenance” Message

The blinking “Under Maintenance” message disappears by turning OFF the RU power and
then turning it ON.
The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM:
- MUTL - INSTALL
- VERSION UP - EDIT HISTORY
- EDIT CONFIGURATION - EDIT CL NAME
- RESTORE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-23
4.2.2 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display
If a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is executed while the RU is
running, the Error window as shown below appears on the DX Console. The command for
changing the contents of the flash ROM is not executed.
The commands for changing the contents of the flash ROM include:
- MUTL - INSTALL
- VERSION UP - EDIT HISTORY
- EDIT CONFIGURATION - EDIT CL NAME
- RESTORE
CAUTION
Do not execute a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM while the RU
is running. The program stored in the flash ROM is corrupted and the machine cannot
start.
REFERENCE
The RU is running in the following states:
- The RU is being initialized.
- The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process.
- The User Utility is started by the RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-24
4.3 LIST OF EXISTING RU 4.4 NEW
4.3.1 Function 4.4.1 Function

Upon installing the RU software, a data file corresponding to each machine is created in the Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU NAME"
FTP server. The list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server are listed up in “LIST and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew.
OF EXISTING RU”. Used to execute the following commands in the RU input in the “RU NAME” and “RU IP
ADDR” fields if not displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” field.
- MUTL - PING
- MON - INSTALL
4.4.2 Procedures
Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding RU
has not been installed normally. 1. Click on [NEW].
REFERENCES
- For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE" field, uninstall it and then install the
RF software again.
2. Input the RU name and the IP address of the RU.
- If "VERSION" is displayed in red, it indicates that the version of the RU software has not
been updated. Update the version as needed.
3. Execute the respective commands.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-25
4.5 DELETE 4.6 MUTL
4.5.1 Function 4.6.1 Function

Used to delete a folder of the RU stored in the FTP server and also to delete it from "LIST OF Used to start the maintenance utility (MUTL) of the RU service utility.
EXISTING RU". MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of the
When reinstallation is required in such a case where the machine is to be used with the IP reading start position and reading width, as well as board and mechanical checks.
address of the RU changed, use the “DELETE” command.
4.6.2 Procedures
4.5.2 Procedures
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
Refer to “Appendix 6-1_Deleting an Installed RU” for the details of deleting procedures in the
Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 6-1_Deleting an Installed RU}
2. Click on [MUTL].
Refer to “7. MUTL (maintenance utility) functions” for functions of the respective MUTL
commands and the detailed procedures.
{MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-26
4.7 PING 3. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
4.7.1 Function
Used to execute the "PING" command for the RU.
When you click on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears where you can check
whether or not the network connection from the DX Console to the RU is normal. If the
network connection is determined to be normal as the result of the PING execution, the
message indicating the result of execution OK appears on the “command prompt” window.
REFERENCE
4.7.2 Procedures
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem.
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
2. Click on [PING]. l [NO GOOD indication]

Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
→ The “command prompt” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-27
4.8 MON l I/O name
The I/O name is displayed.
Symbol Name
4.8.1 Function SA1 Cassette IN sensor
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes SA2 Cassette hold sensor
its status. SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor
The barcode information is displayed if read, as well as the status of OPEN or CLOSE. SA4 IP dropping sensor
The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs (barcode readers) are displayed,
SA6 Suction arm HP sensor
although ON or OFF is not displayed for the motors.
SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor
SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor
SA10 Cassette IP holding sensor
SA11 Cassette ejection sensor
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor
SA16 Inch/metric sensor
SC1 Turn roller grip/dust removal HP sensor
SC3 IP sensor 1
SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor
SG1 IP sensor 2
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor
l Status SZ2 Grip release HP sensor

Displays one of statuses, OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ depending on the change of BCRC1 Barcode reader
the I/O conditions. * The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.
l Other information
Displays the barcode information when the barcode is read.
l Status changed time

Displays the time when the I/O status changes.
REFERENCE
The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse.
The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted.
If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-28
4.8.2 Procedures 3. Click on [START].
2. Click on [MON].
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
has changed.
l Checking the sensor operation by reading an image

I. Exit from the “Under maintenance” window of the RU.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears.
II. Register the exposure menu or the like on the DX Console, and insert the
cassette.
→ The sensor status (open/close) is displayed on the “REAL TIME MONITOR” window.
l Checking the sensor operation by means of the MUTL mechanical check

command
I. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
II. Click the item to be checked by the mechanical check.
→ The sensor status (open/close) is displayed on the “REAL TIME MONITOR” window.
REFERENCES
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However, the
items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to
resume the monitor function. The status change of the I/O of the RU since [STOP] is
clicked until [START] is clicked is not displayed.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-29
4.9 FTP 3. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
4.9.1 Function
Used to check the network for the RU selected from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and to check
the operation of the FTP server for the DX Console.
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the DX Console are normal.
If the network connection and the FTP server are determined to be normal as the result of the
FTP execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on two windows.
4.9.2 Procedures
u NOTE u
{Troubleshooting}
2. Click on [FTP].
4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
→ Two windows appear.
u NOTE u
{Troubleshooting}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-30
4.10 INSTALL l Selection of “SCREEN TYPE”
Select whether the display on the operation panel of the RU is for use in a hospital or use in
a clinic.
CAUTION l Selection as to whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used.
Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power, the Select whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used in the RU to be installed.
RU fails to start up because the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted.
l Setting of configuration information
Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for the details of setting the configuration information.
4.10.1 Function {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Used to install the RU software into the RU entered in the "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" l Registration of the master CL
fields. Upon installation, an RU folder is created in the FTP server. Refer to “4.14 EDIT CL NAME” for the details of registration of the master CL.
{MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME}
l Recognizing the device type to be installed
The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the
installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the 4.10.2 Procedures
settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board of the RU to identify the type.
Refer to the Installation volume for the details of the installing procedures.
u NOTE u {IN: Appendix 7._Installing the RU Software}
If the CPU63A board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP
switches mounted on the CPU63A board are correct. 4.10.3 Message on the Error Window
If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software will be installed, and the RU will
not start up. If the RU software is re-installed in the RU where the software has been already installed, the
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board” following error message appears.
for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU63A board.
{MC:4.3.3_Replacing the CPU Board}
l Selection of software version

A list of installable versions of the software stored in the RU-APL CD-ROM is displayed.
l Selection of software display language

A list of languages to be displayed on the operation panel of the RU is displayed.
l Selection of "BRAND TYPE"

Select "BRAND TYPE" to be displayed on the operation panel of the RU when the machine
starts up. Since “BRAND TYPE” differs depending upon its destination, "BRAND TYPE"
suitable for the destination need be selected when installing the software.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-31
4.11 VERSION UP 4.11.2 Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.5 Updating the RU Software
CAUTION Version” for details of the procedures for version updates.
{MC:4.3.5_Updating the RU Software Version}
Never turn OFF the RU power during version update.
The contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up.
4.11.1 Function
Used to execute RU software version updates.
l Recognizing the device type to be updated in version

The RU selected before starting the version update is accessed, to automatically recognize
the device type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on
the CPU63A board of the RU to identify the device type.
u NOTE u
switches mounted on the CPU63A board are correct.
If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software is updated in version, resulting in
the RU unable to boot up.
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board”

A list of version-updatable ones of the software packages included in the CD-ROM is
displayed.
REFERENCE
The "VERSION" indication of the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” may appear
in red. This indicates that the RU software has not been updated in version. Update the
software version as needed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-32
4.12 EDIT HISTORY 4.12.2 Procedures

4.12.1 Function
Used to view the HISTORY information (including the number of IP’s processed by the RU,
lighting time of the erasure lamp, etc.,) of the RU, and clear the information when a unit has
been replaced or other occasions. The following five kinds of information can be displayed
and edited.
l USE 2. Click on [EDIT HISTORY].

Displays the date when the RU software is installed or updated in version. Also displays the
total time count when the RU power has been ON.
{MU:4.12.3_Details of USE}
l IP
Displays the number of IP7s processed by the RU for each IP size and the count of each part
driven. Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure are all subject to counting.
{MU:4.12.4_Details of IP}
l BARCODE
Displays the count that each IP with different barcode is processed.
{MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE}
l LASER
Displays lighting time and lighting count for the laser of the scanner unit. Image reading,
secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated in MUTL, are subject to
counting.
{MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER}
l LAMP
Displays the lighting time and the lighting count of the erasure lamp. Image reading,
secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated in MUTL, are subject to
counting. Lighting time and lighting count for preheating are also subject to counting.
REFERENCE
{MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP}
Clicking on [EDIT HISTORY], “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of
the RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-33
3. Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. 4.12.3 Details of USE
Refer to the detailed description of each item for the details of the contents appearing on
the screen.
4. Click on [SET].
u NOTE u
The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device
information you can check by the user utility of the RU.
To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or
turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON.
Item name Function
Displays the date when the RU software is installed or

I INSTALLATION DATE
updated in version. A specific date can be entered manually.
A total count of a period of time when the RU power is turned
TOTAL POWER ON
II ON is displayed. A specific numerical value can be entered
TIME
manually.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-34
4.12.4 Details of IP Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item in “IP”.

Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
II SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
TOTAL READING Counts the total count that normal reading takes place per IP
III
COUNTER size, and displays the total in “ALL IP SIZES”.
Displays the total count that normal reading, secondary erasure
TOTAL PROCESSING
IV and erasure take place. A specific numerical value can be
COUNTER ALL IP SIZES
entered manually.
Displays the respective total numbers that the air filter, the
PARTS PROCESSING erasure lamp, the brush roller, the IP suction pump, and the
V
COUNTER damper are used. Specific numerical values can be entered
manually.
u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-35
4.12.5 Details of BARCODE
Item name Function
I BARCODE NUMBER Displays the barcode number of the IP read by the RU.
Displays the total count of IP conveyance for each barcode. A
II READING COUNTE
specific numerical value can be entered manually.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-36
4.12.6 Details of LASER Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item of “LASER”.

TOTAL TIME FOR THE Displays the total laser lighting time. A specific numerical
III
LASER ON value can be entered manually.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total laser lighting count. A specific numerical
IV
THE LASER ON value can be entered manually.
u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-37
4.12.7 Details of LAMP ・ THE ERASURE LIGHTING
Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item of “LAMP”.

TOTAL TIME FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting time. A specific
III THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually.
LIGHTING
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting count. A specific
IV THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually.
LIGHTING
・ THE ERASURE LAMP CLEANING

Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item.

TOTAL COUNT FOR THE Displays the total erasure IP count. A specific numerical value
III
IP ERASING can be entered manually.
u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-38
4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION 4.13.2 Procedures

4.13.1 Function
Used to edit the configuration information for the RU.
However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in Machine
Maintenance Utility cannot be set with EDIT CONFIGURATION.
The set information is written into the flash ROM of the RU.
2. Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
CAUTION
The LED panel of the RU lights up while the flash ROM of the RU is being updated.
Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the
RU will no longer boot up.
REFERENCE
Clicking on [EDIT CONFIGURATION], “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation
panel of the RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-39
3. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items. Item name Function
Sets the identification code (1-digit alphanumeric character) with
EQUIPMENT CODE which the user identifies the RU which has read the image when a
1
(A-Z) plurality of RU’s are used. The identification code is printed on the
output film.
Sets the erasure mode which can be selected by the “Mode
change” button of the RU.
The setting is effective only when “HOSPITAL” was selected in
RANGE OF ERASE setting “SCREEN TYPE” at the time of installation.
2
MODE - ERASE 1, ERASE 2 (default):
Can select secondary erasure or primary erasure.
- ERASE 1:
Can select only primary erasure.
Sets the period of time since “primary erasure” or “secondary
erasure” is selected by the “Mode change” button of the RU until
ERASE MODE TIME
3 “Image reading” is automatically restored in the unit of second.
OUT (0-999[s])
When “0” is set, the mode is kept changed to “primary erasure” or
“secondary erasure”.
Determines whether the alarm sounds when a cassette is set.
Confirmation Alarm
4 - ON (default) : Alarm sounds.
when cassette is set
- OFF : Alarm does not sound.
Select the IP reading speed mode.
- FR : Read the large size IP image in the high-speed
mode.
- SR (Default) : Read all the IP images in the standard-speed
mode.
IMAGE READING
5 * Only valid for 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) size and 14"x14" (35cm x
MODE
35cm) size
* Only valid for FCRView (CR-VW 674)
* If connect to the console other than FCRView (CR-VW 674),
settings on the console is necessary.
●Setup items of the console
l Setup items of the console

If connect to the console other than FCRView (CR-VW 674), set the IP image reading mode
of each Exposure Menu under the User Utility at the console.
1. Start the User Utility and click "Menu Setting".
2. Select the Exposure Menu which you want to change the IP image reading mode,
and click "Edit".
3. Select "Exposure Parameter 3", and then select "Image reading mode".
4. Click "OK".
5. Repeat step 2 to 4 if needed.
6. Click "OK" and close the User Utility.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-40
Item name Function Item name Function
Selects the kind of IP (inch or metric) to be used in the machine. Determines whether the warning on the erasure lamp life is to
- INCH (default): be only written into the error log or written into the error log and
Select when inch IP’s are to be used. displayed in the error message.
6 IP Size Code Setting WARNING OF LAMP
- METRIC:
11 - LOG ONLY (default):
Select when metric IP’s are to be used. LIFE
Only write into the error log
* Need not be set for this machine.
- LOG & MESSAGE:
Determines whether or not the patient’s name registered in the DX
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
Console is to be displayed on the operation panel.
DISPLAY
This is effective only when “CLINIC” is selected in “SCREEN Determines whether the warning on the part life is to be only
7 PATIENT&MENU
TYPE” setting for installation. written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
NAME - ON : The patient’s name is displayed. in the error message.
- OFF (default) : The patient’s name is not displayed. WARNING OF PARTS
LIFE
Determines whether or not the name of the DX Console is Only write into the error log
displayed, which is the destination of transfer of the read image - LOG & MESSAGE:
during image reading. Write into the error log and display of the error message.
This is effective only when “HOSTPITAL” is selected in “SCREEN
Determines whether the warning on the S value is to be only
8 DISPLAY CL NAME TYPE” setting for installation.
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
- OFF (default):
in the error message.
The DX Console name of the image destination is not displayed. WARNING OF S
- ON: VALUE
The DX Console name of the image destination is displayed.
- LOG & MESSAGE:
Determines the menu (user utility) items to be displayed when the Write into the error log and display of the error message.
“Utility” button on the operation panel is pressed. Determines whether or not the error is to be regularly displayed on
- FULL: the display.
Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “HOSPITAL”. 14 Regular error display
- ON (default) : The error is regularly displayed.
Displays the entire menu of the user utility. - OFF : The error is not regularly displayed.
- SCANER CLEANING: Set the timing when you can press the QUIT STUDY button on the
Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “CLINIC”. console after reading the image.
9 UTILITY MENU
Displays scanner cleaning only. THE TIMING FOR - IMAGE TRANSFER END:
- : ACTIVATION You can press the QUIT STUDY button when the read image
Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “CLINIC” at the 15
"QUIT STUDY" data is transferred to the console.
time of installation. BUTTON(1:1) - UNLOCK CASSETTE:
Displays scanner cleaning only. You can press the QUIT STUDY button when the cassette hold is
Do not set this when only the configuration setting is to be released.
changed.
Determines whether the warning on the laser life is to be only
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
in the error message.
WARNING OF LD
LIFE
- LOG & MESSAGE:
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-41
Item name Function 4. Click on [SET].
Sets the timing when the erasure lamp cleaning message is
displayed.
- OFF (default):
The message is not displayed.
- 6000 or 365 days:
The message is displayed when the total count of IP conveyance
of 6000 is reached or 365 days elapses.
- 3000 or 182 days:
CONDITION OF
16 ERASE LAMP
CLEANING
- 12000 or 730 days:
- OPTIONAL:
The message is displayed when an optional total count of IP CAUTION
conveyance or an optional number of days is reached. Do not take the procedures 8 and 9 during the installation of the RU software. If the
The count and the number of days are set by the commands of RU power is turned OFF and then ON before the installation of the RU software is
Nos. 11 and 12. completed, the software cannot be installed normally.
CONDITION OF Sets the total count of IP conveyance when “OPTIONAL” is
17
ERASE LAMP selected in the command No.15. 5. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
CLEANING[COUNT] The default is 6000.
(OPTIONAL) REFERENCE
CONDITION OF Sets the number of days when “OPTIONAL” is selected in the Although “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, the RU functions are
ERASE LAMP command No.15. not affected even if the RU power is turned OFF.
18
CLEANING[DAYS] The default is 365 days.
(OPTIONAL) 6. Turn ON the power of the RU.
Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when the [Eraser
button] and the [Stand-by switch] are pressed.
19 Key Touch Sound
- ON (default) : An alarm sounds.
- OFF : No alarm sounds.
Determines whether or not the alarm sounds when an error occurs.
20 Alarm Sound - ON (default) : An alarm sounds.
- OFF : No alarm sounds.
Determines whether or not the sleep mode is to be used.
21 Sleep Mode Change - ON : The sleep mode is used.
- OFF (default) : The sleep mode is not used.
Sleep Mode Change Sets the time for transiting to the sleep mode.
22
Time([min]) The default is 60 minutes.
WAKE ON LAN PORT Sets the port No. to be used for Wake On LAN.
23
NO The default is 6001.
Determines whether or not to perform IP type HR Sensitivity
SENS ADJ OF Correction automatically.
24 HR CONVERTED - AUTO CONV OFF : Not to perform Sensitivity Correction
AUTOMATICALLY automatically.
- AUTO CONV ON : Perform Sensitivity Correction automatically.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-42
4.14 EDIT CL NAME l Procedures for editing/adding the DX Console as image transfer destination
1. Select from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" an RU where the DX Console as the image
transfer destinations is to be edited or added, and click on [EDIT CL NAME].
4.14.1 Function
Used to edit/add the DX Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master
CL's.
4.14.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination

→ “CL NAME” window appears.
l Overview
Edit and/or add the DX Console as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's
2. To edit, select the DX Console to be edited, and then click on [MODIFY]; to add,
click on [NEW].
may be registered as image transfer destinations.
l To edit:
l To add:
→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-43
3. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET]. 4.14.3 Editing the List of Master CL's
u NOTE u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the DX Console to be connected with the RU. l Overview
Edit the list of master CL's. Of the DX Console registered as image transfer destinations, the
DX Console registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four
DX Console may be registered in the "MASTER CL" field.
When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the DX Console registered is displayed on
the LCD screen of RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-44
l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master CL's is to be
edited, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
→ “CL NAME” window appears.
2. Select a DX Console to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's.
4.14.4 Switching the Master CL

Switch the master CL.
u NOTE u
Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the master
CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG" and "HISTORY
LOG", will be lost.
For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" of
the Installation volume.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-45
4.15 BACKUP 4.15.2 Procedures
You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item for
4.15.1 Function backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the DX Console are
selectable.
Used to copy the configuration information, error log data or the like from the flash ROM of
the RU to a recording medium such as an FD. You can back up the following data.
l "ERROR LOG"
Log data is backed up.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Configuration data is backed up.
l "TRACE LOGS"
Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up.
l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up.
l "LOG ALL"
All of “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” are backed up at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"

All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are backed up at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"

Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"

Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-46
4.15.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable
Causes
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then
turning it ON.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-47
4.16 RESTORE 4.16.2 Procedures
You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying the drive and
4.16.1 Function directory) after an item for restore is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by
the DX Console are selectable.
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from a recording
medium such as an FD to the flash ROM of the RU. The items to be restored include:
l "CONFIGURATION"
Configuration data is restored.
l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored.
l "SCN ALL DATA"

All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are restored at a time.

Light collecting system data among the scanner data is restored.

Of the scanner data, optical data is restored.
REFERENCE
The contents copied into the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the RU power
and then turning it ON.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-48
4.16.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable
Causes
turning it ON.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-49
4.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT Item name Function
The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is
1 "FILE OPEN" button
displayed on the Timing Chart screen.
4.17.1 Function
The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing
2 "Pass" text box
The I/O trace data is displayed in a timing chart. chart is entered.
You can check operations including the reading of cassettes, erasure, conveyance check in
The display scale for the time base (horizontal
the RU PC-TOOL MUTL and mechanical checks. 3 "Scale" button
axis) is changed.
Note that only the I/O trace data can be displayed.
4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed.
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar
5 Chart display area available, the display range may be moved by
manipulating the scroll bar.
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and
pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the
following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B
fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position
6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area pointed by the left mouse button.
- B Time elapsed from power ON to the position
:
pointed by the right mouse button.

- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in
the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-50
4.17.2 Procedures

{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
REFERENCE
Backing up “LOG ALL” creates the IOT folder in the specified destination and the
following folder in the DX Console, and the IOT.LOG file is stored in the folder.
C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IRxxx\system\RU’s IP address\LOG\IOT
The IOT.LOG file stored in “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IRxxx\system\RU’s IP
address\LOG\IOT” is specified by the default.
3. Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-51
4.18 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
4.18.1 Function 2 “FATAL" button Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed.
Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data 3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
of the RU. Memos may be appended to error messages, or detailed information or analysis
flows may be viewed. Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
4 “BOTH” button
displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
The latest error log data is copied from the CPU63A
6 “UPDATE” button
board of the RU to the FTP server of the DX Console.
The contents of the error log file selected are
7 Error message list box
displayed.
The error code selected (highlighted) in the error
8 “Error Code” text box
message list box is displayed.
The error name selected (highlighted) in the error
9 “Error Name” text box
The occurrence condition of the error message
10 “Meaning” text box selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is
displayed.
The detail information selected (highlighted) in the
11 “Details Info.” Button
error message list box is displayed.
The analysis flow for the error message selected
12 “Analysis Flow” button (highlighted) in the error message list box is
displayed.
REFERENCE A memo may be attached to the error message
Clicking on [UPDATE], the error message list box is updated to the latest one. 13 “Memo.” text box (highlighted) in the error message list box.
Up to seven memos may be entered.
The name of the person (author) who entered text in
14 “Author” text box
the “Memo.” text box is entered.
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key
and press the [SAVE] button again.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-52
4.18.2 Procedures
The procedures of displaying the latest error log are described as an example.
2. Click on [ERROR DB].
→ The “ERROR DB” window appears.
3. Click on [UPDATE].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-53
4.19 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
4.19.1 Function
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted
into the DX Console are collectively uninstalled. Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the
uninstalled RU's are deleted from the FTP server and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF 2. Click on [PING].
EXISTING RU". In addition, the contents of “C:/ProgramFiles/FujiFIlm/FCR” directory on the
DX Console are deleted.
u NOTE u
If a plurality of RU’s of the same device type exist, the software and configuration data for the
RU of the same type are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing UNINSTALL.
Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed.
→ Check to make sure that GOOD indication appears on the “command prompt”
window.
4.19.2 Procedures {MU:4.7_PING}
3. Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for all the RU’s to be uninstalled.

CAUTIONS 4. Back up the following files for the RU to be uninstalled.
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user settings)
- CONFIGURATION
of the RU, DX Console, and FTP server. - HISTORY LOG
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost. - SCN ALL DATA
- For the RU connected to the DX Console, back up the following files. Those files {MU:4.15_BACKUP}
must be restored after installation.
- CONFIGURATION 5. Click on [UNINSTALL].
- HISTORY LOG
- SCN ALL DATA
If a plurality of the RU’s of the same device type exit, it is necessary to identify which
file belongs to which RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-54
6. Select the device type to be uninstalled, and Click on [OK].
→ Uninstall is performed.
7. Click on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-55
4.20 VERSION UP: ALL RUs 4.20.2 Procedures
REFERENCE
4.20.1 Function When a plurality of RU's are to be updated inversion, update the connected RU’s one by one
in the sequence they are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU". If two RU’s are registered
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD-ROM inserted into in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" in the sequence of ru2 and ru1, they are updated in this order.
the DX Console are collectively updated in version.
CAUTION
Never turn OFF the DX Console/RU power during the version updating.
The contents of the flash ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up.
u NOTE u
When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, sequentially update the RU software
in the connected RU’s. It takes about eight minutes to update one RU. Do not turn OFF the 2. Click on [PING].
DX Console and RU power until the installation is completed for all the RU's.
After the installation, be sure to check the software version of all of the RU's, and check to
make sure that they have been updated in version.
→ Check to make sure that GOOD indication appears on the displayed command
prompt window.
{MU:4.7_PING}
3. Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for all the RU's connected to the DX Console.
4. Click on [VERSION UP].
→ A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the CD-ROM.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-56
5. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console, and click on [OK]. 9. When a linac cassette is to be used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT
USE” if the linac cassette is not to be used. Then click on [SET].
6. Select "RU VERSION".
10. Click on [OK].
7. Select “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK].
→ The RU PC-TOOL window appears again.
11. Check to make sure that the version update has been normally completed.
→ The window to verify the execution of a version update appears.
8. Click on [OK].
→ Version-update of the RU software starts.

The LED of one RU lights up.
In approx. eight minutes, the update of the first RU is completed, and the update of a
second RU is started.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-57
4.21 CDPath 2. Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.
l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the

4.21.1 Function procedure 5.
The RU software should normally be installed from the RU-APL CD-ROM.

If a folder that completely copies the RU-APL CD-ROM data resides in the hard disk of the
DX Console, you may install the RU software from that hard disk without using the RU-APL
CD-ROM by specifying the path of that folder.
u NOTES u
- To copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data, its whole data should be completely copied to a single
folder. If it is partially copied, the installation cannot be executed. l To enter the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and
- "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, installation from proceed to the next procedure.
the RU-APL CD-ROM cannot be executed.
4.21.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"

The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the Copy CD-R of the C drive are
described as an example. → The window for selecting the folder appears.
1. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
3. Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-58
4. Click on [OK]. 4.21.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"

→ The path is displayed in the text box.
2. Click on [CLEAR].
5. Click on [SET].
→ “CDPath” is set.
→ The path in the text box is cleared.
3. Click on [SET].
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-59
4.22 Initialize APL 7. Select "Initialize APL" from the "Operation (O)" menu.
4.22.1 Function
Effects RU application initialization. XL2A4401.ai
u NOTE u 8. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the Console and click on [OK].
Effect RU application initialization only when no error code appears and the machine does 9. Verify that the RU's IP address, which was selected in the procedure (6), is
not boot up during troubleshooting. displayed, and then click on [OK].
→ Initialization starts.
4.22.2 Procedures 10. Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] key.
1. Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable.
2. Change the DIP switch (S7) settings on the CPU board.
l When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are not known:
#1 Change the IP address of the Console to 172.16.1.20. Write down the IP address if a
site-specific value is used.
#2 Set the DIP switch-No.7 to ON. FRRB401020.ai
11. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

REFERENCE
When the machine is started with the DIP switch (S7)-No.7 set to ON, the IP address of 12. Disconnect the RU power cable and the I/F cable.
the RU is set to the default (172.16.1.10) only when initialized.
The IP address of the Console need be changed to 172.16.x.x accordingly. 13. Restore the original setting for DIP switch on the CPU board.
14. Restore the machine.
l When the addresses of the RU and the FTP server are known: 15. Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU.
#1 Set the DIP switch-No. 8 to ON.
16. Turn ON the power of the RU.
3. Connect the power cable and the I/F cable to the RU. The RU starts under the following conditions:
4. Turn ON the power of the RU. - All LEDs light up.

- Initialization does not take place.
The RU starts under the following conditions:
- All LEDs light up. 17. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
- Initialization does not take place.
18. Delete the initialized RU.
5. Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:4.5_DELETE}
6. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". 19. Install the RU software.

{MU:4.10_INSTALL}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-60
4.23 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL 4.23.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL
1. Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of RU PC-TOOL.

4.23.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL
1. Power ON the RU and DX Console.

2. Press the [Window] key on the keyboard, and open the Start menu of Windows.

3. Click the Start menu of Windows. Type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\
RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe"] and press the [Enter] key.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-61
5. Client PC l Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU
Even when the DX Console is not running, it is possible to execute command by specifying
the RU's IP address. Executable commands are MUTL, PING, and MON.
5.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC

The client PC is a notebook PC on which CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed. When CLIENT PC-
TOOL is installed on a notebook PC from the RU-APL CD-ROM, the notebook PC can be
used as the client PC.
5.1.1 Features of the Client PC

The use of CLIENT PC-TOOL, which is installed on the client PC, makes it possible to
execute commands as needed for RU maintenance even while the DX Console is used.
Note, however, the commands executable from RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console differ from
those executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL of the client PC.
Commands executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL can be classified into the following three
categories:
- Commands for editing data stored in the client PC
- Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU l Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the DX Console
- Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the DX Console Commands can be executed for an RU that is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-
TOOL, which is installed on the client PC. This command execution is performed via the DX
CAUTION Console (FTP server).
When executing a command for allowing CLIENT PC-TOOL to access the RU's flash
ROM, it is necessary to observe precautions as is the case with the use of RU PC-
TOOL. For details on the precautions, see "5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC."
{MU:5.1.3_Precautions for Using the Client PC}
Commands for editing data stored in the client PC

l
Data stored in the client PC can be edited and saved even when the client PC is not
connected to the network in the user's site.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-62
5.1.2 Operations of the Client PC
l Client PC operation immediately after installation l Client PC operation after hospital list creation
When you install and start CLIENT PC-TOOL, the following window opens. When an RU is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-TOOL, all commands of CLIENT
PC-TOOL can be executed. However, executable commands vary depending on whether
the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode or OFF-LINE mode.
For the difference between the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes and the details on commands
executable in the respective modes, see 5.6 "ON-LINE and OFF-LINE."
The following commands can be executed immediately after installation: {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- Commands selectable from the Configuration (C) menu
- Commands executable for a machine having an address that is entered in the IP address
field (MUTL, PING, and MON)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-63
5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC 5.1.5 Precautions in Setting the DX Console
As is the case with RU PC-TOOL, CLIENT PC-TOOL has commands for accessing the When the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be used in the ON-LINE mode, always check to make sure
RU's flash ROM. When executing the commands for accessing the flash ROM, observe the that the “Windows Firewall” of the DX Console is set as follows.
following precautions: If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available.
- When executing a command for accessing the RU's flash ROM, never turn OFF the RU
or client PC power. If you turn OFF the power, the contents of the flash ROM become l “Exceptions” tab setting
damaged so that the RU does not start up.
- While the DX Console and RU are used, do not execute a command that allows the client
PC to access the flash ROM.
5.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD-ROM

Drive
The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL, creating the hospital list,
and executing the version update command.
Before using a PC without a CD-ROM as the client PC, it is necessary to copy the contents
of the RU-APL CD-ROM to a certain place within the client PC. l Network connection setting in “Detail setting” tab
When the CD path is set up after CLIENT PC-TOOL installation, it is possible to create the
hospital list and execute the version update command even when the RU-APL CD-ROM is
not on hand.
Refer to “5.10 Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC” for the detailed
procedures of checking the respective settings.
{MU:5.10_Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client PC}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-64
5.2 Setting Up the Client PC
This section describes the procedure for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on the notebook PC
with the RU-APL CD-ROM so that the notebook PC can be used as the client PC.
n Items required for preparing the client PC n Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL

- Notebook PC for use as the client PC Use either of the following two CLIENT PC-TOOL installation procedures:
l Installing from the RU-APL CD-ROM

Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. Start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL by clicking "INSTALL" in the "Set Up PC-TOOL"
window.
For details on the installation procedure, see "5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-
APL CD-ROM."
{MU:5.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM}
- RU-APL CD-ROM
l Installing on a PC without a CD-ROM drive

Install CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a
flash memory or other recording medium.
For details on the installation procedure, see "5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC
without a CD-ROM Drive."
{MU:5.2.2_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-65
5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM 4. Click on [NEXT].
Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. When the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically
opens, install CLIENT PC-TOOL.
1. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the notebook PC.
→ The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
2. Click on [INSTALL].
3. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], re-
install according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT
PC-TOOL Installation”.
{MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation} 6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
→ You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-66
5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD-ROM Drive 3. Copy the entire copied RU-APL CD-ROM data to the folder created in step 2.
With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash memory or other u NOTE u
recording medium. Copy the entire copied data to a folder on the client PC. Start "Set Up Be sure to copy the entire data to the folder created in step 2. If all the data is not
PC-TOOL" by double-clicking the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data. When copied, you cannot install CLIENT PC-TOOL.
the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens, start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL.
1. With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash
memory or other recording medium.
u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM.
2. Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC (e.g., "Copy CD-R"
on drive C).
4. Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-67
5. Click on [INSTALL]. 8. Click on [INSTALL].
u NOTE u
PC-TOOL Installation”. 9. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
Installation}
7. Click on [NEXT].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-68
5.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL
This section describes the procedures for starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Two different procedures are used to Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
l Starting from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL)

Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. Start CLIENT PC-TOOL from the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
For details on the procedure, see "6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup
PC-TOOL)."
{MU:6.28.1_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC-TOOL)}
l Starting from a client PC window

From a client PC window, start CLIENT PC-TOOL by specifying its file name.
For details on the procedure, see "6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC
Window."
{MU:6.28.2_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-69
5.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification 5. Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site and make the network settings of
the client PC
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.

1. Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site.
6. Double-click "Local area connection," display the “Local Area Connection Status”
2. Make sure that the proxy server setting in “Internet Options” of the client PC is window, and click on [Property].
“OFF”.
{MU:5.11_Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC}
3. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
4. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
→ The “Local area connection property” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-70
7. Choose "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click [Properties]. 10. Enter the address of the RU or DX Console connected to the network in the
user's site, and then execute the "PING" command to verify that the client PC is
connected to the network in the user's site.
8. Set the client PC IP address and then click [OK].
u NOTES u
- Ask the network manager of the user’s site to check the available IP address before
changing the IP address. If the IP address of another device is specified, the client PC
cannot be connected with the network.
- Set the subnet mask and the default gateway as the need arises, after the network
setups of the site are confirmed.
9. Close the "Local Area Connection Properties" window, "Local Area Connection
Status" window, and "Network Connection" window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-71
5.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List 5.5.1 Registering an RU in the Hospital List
Create the hospital list in “CLIENT PC-TOOL”. The hospital list includes names of sites, FTP Register an RU by executing the "NEW RU" command from "HOSPITAL" in the hospital list.
servers used at the site, and the RU’s registered in a tree format. Upon registering a site,
FTP server and RU in the hospital list, their folders are created in the C drive of the client PC.
With “CLIENT PC-TOOL”, the maintenance can be performed only for the RU registered in
the hospital list.
For details on the "NEW RU" command, see "6.4 NEW RU."
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
u NOTE u
The RU-APL CD-ROM is required for preparing/editing the hospital list. Therefore, have the
RU-APL CD-ROM on hand before you start performing the procedure.
If you create or edit the hospital list with a PC without a CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to
copy the RU-APL CD-ROM data to a certain location within the client PC and set the CD
path. Therefore, perform the procedure set forth under "6.23 CDPath" to set the CD path
before creating or editing the hospital list.
{MU:6.23_CDPath}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-72
5.5.2 Adding an RU to the Hospital List l Using the "COPY" command
When the RU to be added has the same model number as an existing one, it can be added
This section describes the procedures for adding an RU to a prepared hospital list. with the "COPY" command. This procedure does not entail the use of the RU-APL CD-ROM.
To add an RU, use either of the following two procedures:
- Using the "NEW RU" command
u NOTE u
- Using the "COPY" command Use the "COPY" command only when the RU to be added has the same model number as
an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, it cannot be added with the
l Using the "NEW RU" command "COPY" command.
Add an RU by performing the same procedure as for registering an RU in the hospital list.
When an RU is to be added, a previously registered site name and FTP server IP address
can be chosen from the pull-down menu.
For details on the "NEW RU" command, see "6.4 NEW RU."
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
For details on the use of the "COPY" command, see "6.6 COPY."
{MU:6.6_COPY}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-73
5.5.3 Deleting a Hospital List Entry l Deleting an FTP server
Select the FTP server to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the "DELETE"
If an RU, FTP server, site, or tree is erroneously registered in the hospital list, it can be command.
deleted with the "DELETE" command. → The FTP server and all the RUs registered with the FTP server are then deleted.
The tree information to be deleted varies with the hospital list selection position.
l Deleting an RU only
Select the name of the RU to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the
"DELETE" command.
→ Only the RU is then deleted.
l Deleting a site
Select the name of the site to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the
"DELETE" command.
→ The name of the site and all the FTP servers and RUs registered with the site are
then deleted.
For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE."
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-74
l Deleting all hospital list entries 5.5.4 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Indications
Choose "HOSPITAL" and then execute the "DELETE" command.
→ The entire tree information registered in the hospital list is then deleted. If it is found during hospital list creation/editing that the RU name or RU IP address to be
entered is already registered, the following error windows open.
l If the RU name to be entered is already registered
l If the IP address to be entered is already registered
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-75
5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE l OFF-LINE mode
5.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

By setting the IP address of the client PC, the PC can be connected with the network in the
user’s site. The client PC has commands to be executed while connected with the network
of the site (ON-LINE mode) and commands to be executed while separated from the network
of the site (OFF-LINE mode). The available commands differ depending on the mode of the
client PC, so that it is necessary to change over the mode of the client PC depending on the The following commands are available when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
type of the maintenance. The client PC can be changed over between the ON-LINE and - Commands to register the RU where the maintenance will take place
OFF-LINE modes through the use of the “Online” command of CLIENT PC-TOOL. - Commands to edit the machine information of the RU acquired during the ON-LINE mode
{MU:6.26_OnLine}
l ON-LINE mode
Refer to “5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode” for the details on operations in the OFF-LINE
mode.
When the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode, the following commands are available. {MU:5.6.3_Operation in OFF-LINE Mode}
- Commands to acquire/write machine information of the RU
- Commands to access the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server
- Command to directly operate the RU (MUTL)
When a command to access the flash ROM of the RU is executed, “Under Maintenance”
appears on the operation panel of the RU as in the case of the RU PC-TOOL of the DX
Console.
Refer to “5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode” for the details on operations in the ON-LINE
mode.
{MU:5.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-76
5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the ON-LINE mode.
Command Function Reference

REFERENCE
Acquires the software version of the
The “ON-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when only the commands to
GET VERSION RU stored in the FTP server, and {MU:6.8_GET VERSION}
access the RU or the FTP server from CLIENT PC-TOOL are available. To change over the displays it in the hospital list.
client PC to the ON-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Starts up the MUTL of the RU service
Refer to “6.26 OnLine” for the details of procedures for changing over to the ON-LINE mode. MUTL {MU:6.9_MUTL}
utility.
{MU:6.26_OnLine}
Executes PING for the RU or the FTP
PING {MU:6.10_PING}
During the ON-LINE mode, the commands to directly access the flash ROM of the RU or the server.
FTP server, such as VERSION UP, UPLOAD of RU’s configuration information are executed. Displays the change of I/O statues of
MON {MU:6.11_MON}
the RU.
Checks the network connection with
FTP the RU and the operation of the FTP {MU:6.12_FTP}
server.
Updates the version of the RU
VERSION UP {MU:6.13_VERSION UP}
software.
Copies the maintenance information
UPLOAD edited in the OFF-LINE mode to the {MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
RU and the FTP server.
Copies the maintenance information of
DOWNLOAD the RU stored in the flash ROM of the {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
RU and in the FTP to the client PC.
REFERENCES
- The commands available during the ON-LINE mode include those for accessing only the
flash ROM of the RU and those for accessing both the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP
server.
The commands for accessing both the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server include:
- GET VERSION
- FTP
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
- DOWNLOAD
- When the following commands to change the contents of the flash ROM of the RU are
executed, “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU.
- MUTL
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
Refer to “6.2.1 “Under Maintenance” indication on the operation panel” for the details of the
“Under Maintenance” indication.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-77
5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the OFF-LINE mode.
Command Function Reference

REFERENCE
The “OFF-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when the commands to Registers an RU in the hospital
NEW RU {MU:6.4_NEW RU}
access the RU or the FTP server from the CLIENT PC-TOOL are not available. To change list.
over the client PC to the OFF-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC- Deletes an RU registered in
DELETE {MU:6.5_DELETE}
TOOL. the hospital list.
Refer to “6.26 OnLine” for the details of procedures for changing over to the OFF-LINE mode.
Duplicates an RU registered in
{MU:6.26_OnLine} COPY {MU:6.6_COPY}
the hospital list.
During the OFF-LINE mode, you can edit the configuration information, history information or Changes the name of an RU
RENAME {MU:6.7_RENAME}
the like registered the hospital list. registered in the hospital list.
u NOTE u Edits the history information of

EDIT HISTORY {MU:6.14_EDIT HISTORY}
the RU stored in the client PC.
The data you can edit in the OFF-LINE mode is limited to the information stored in the
client PC. To effect the contents edited in the client PC in the RU machine, the data need Edits the configuration
be uploaded after the client PC is changed over to the ON-LINE mode. Refer to “5.6.2 EDIT COFIGURATION information of the RU stored in {MU:6.15_EDIT COFIGURATION}
Operation in ON-LINE mode” for the details of the operation in the ON-LINE mode. the client PC.
{MU:5.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode} Edits the list of the master
CL’s of the image transfer
EDIT CL NAME {MU:6.16_EDIT CL NAME}
destination stored in the client
PC.
Displays trace data of RU I/O
I/O TRACE EXPERT {MU:6.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
in the form of a timing chart.
Displays error log data of an
ERROR DB {MU:6.18_ERROR DB}
RU.
Reads the machine information
READ from a recording medium such {MU:6.19_READ}
as an FD to the client PC.
Writes the machine information
from the client PC into a
WRITE {MU:6.20_WRITE}
recording medium such as an
FD.
Copies the information in the
Export hospital list from the client PC {MU:6.24_Export}
to a recording medium.
Copies the information in the
Import hospital list from a recording {MU:6.25_Import}
medium to the client PC.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-78
5.7 Data Flow of Each Command 5.7.2 READ and WRITE
Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
Features of the commands of UPLOAD & DOWNLOAD, READ & WRITE, and Import &
READ: Writes the machine information resident in the client PC into an external recording
Export and the data flow are described below.
medium.
WRITE: Writes the machine information stored in an external recording medium into the
5.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD client PC.
Available only when the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode.
DOWNLOAD: Acquires the machine information from the flash ROM of the RU.
UPLOAD: Writes the machine information edited by the client PC into the flash ROM
of the RU. “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU
during the write.
Refer to “6.19 READ” and “6.20 WRITE” for the details of the commands “READ” and “WRITE”.
{MU:6.19_READ}
{MU:6.20_WRITE}
5.7.3 Import and Export

Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
Refer to “6.21 UPLOAD” and “6.22 DOWNLOAD” for the details of the commands [UPLOAD] Import: Reads hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored
and [DOWNLOAD]. in an external recording medium into the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Export: Writes hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
in the CLIENT PC-TOOL into an external recording medium.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
Refer to “6.25 Import” and “6.24 Export” for the details of the commands “Import” and “Export”.
{MU:6.25_Import}
{MU:6.24_Export}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-79
5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper 5.8.1 Solution-1
CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation The procedures for discontinuing the installation and re-installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL are
described.
If “For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed,
follow the procedures below to reinstall the CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. If you select “For FTP-Server” and click on [SET], click on [Cancel] in the
subsequently displayed window.
Two ways are available as countermeasures to be taken when a mistake is made during the
installation of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
l Discontinue the installation, and re-install

“For FTP-Server” has been inadvertently selected when CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed.
If the mistake in selection is noticed during the operation, you can discontinue the installation.
Stop the installation, and then start to re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Refer to “5.8.1 Solution -1” for details.
{MU:5.8.1_Solution -1}
l Delete the RU PC-TOOL, and re-install

“For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed.
The RU PC-TOOL is installed if the installation is continued. Delete the RU PC-TOOL by the
RU-APL CD-ROM, and re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Refer to “5.8.2 Solution-2” for details.
{MU:5.8.2_Solution-2}
2. Click on [Yes] to confirm the cancellation of the installation.
3. Click on [Finish].
4. Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to “5.2 Setting Up the Client PC”.
{MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-80
5.8.2 Solution-2 5. Click on [Remove].
The procedures for deleting the RU PC-TOOL by the RU-APL CD-ROM and then re-installing
the CLIENT PC-TOOL are described.
1. Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up.
2. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console.
3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation.
4. Click on [NEXT].
7. Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to “5.2 Setting Up the Client PC”.
{MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-81
5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL 5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM
This section describes the version update procedures for CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up.
To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, use either of the following procedures: 2. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console.
l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM
Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically 3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
opens. From this window, uninstall CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform an install again to
update CLIENT PC-TOOL.
For details on the version update procedure, see "5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the
RU-APL CD-ROM."
{MU:5.9.1_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD-ROM}
l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM drive

Update CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD-ROM data to the client PC with a
flash memory or other recording medium.
For details on the version update procedure, see "5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a
PC without a CD-ROM Drive." 4. Click on [NEXT].
{MU:5.9.2_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM Drive}
5. Click on [Remove].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-82
6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation. 9. Click on [NEXT].
7. Click on [INSTALL]. 10. Click on [INSTALL].
u NOTE u
PC-TOOL Installation”. 11. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
Installation}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-83
5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD-ROM 3. Copy the entire copied RU-APL CD-ROM data to the folder created in step 2.
Drive u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data to the folder created in step 2. If all the data is not
1. With a PC with a CD-ROM drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD-ROM data to a flash
copied, you cannot install CLIENT PC-TOOL.
memory or other recording medium.
u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD-ROM.
2. Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC (e.g., "Copy CD-R"
on drive C).
4. Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-84
5. Click on [UNINSTALL]. 8. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation.
6. Click on [NEXT].

u NOTE u
7. Click on [Remove]. Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
PC-TOOL Installation”.
Installation}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-85
11. Click on [NEXT].
13. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-86
5.10 Checking the DX Console Setup when Using the Client 5. Click on the [Advanced] tab.
PC
Be sure to check the settings in the “Windows Firewall” on the DX Console before using the
CLIENT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode.
If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available.
1. Click on in the Windows [Start] menu.
→ The "Control Panel "window appears.
2. Double-click on . 6. Click on [Settings].
→ The "Windows Firewall" window appears.
3. Click on the [Exceptions] tab.
→ The “Advanced Settings” window appears.
7. Check to make sure that check box of “FTP server” is marked with a check.
4. Check to make sure that check boxes of “ftp.exe” and “FTP_port” are marked
with checks.
8. Close all of the windows.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-87
5.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC 4. Make sure that a check mark is not put in the check box for the “Proxy server”
setting. If checked, cancel it.
If the proxy server setting is “ON” in the “Internet Options” of the notebook PC used as the
client PC, commands cannot be correctly executed for the RU, resulting in errors.
Be sure to set the “Proxy server” to “OFF” in the notebook PC used, before servicing.
1. Click from the Windows’ [Start] menu.
→ The “Control Panel” window opens.
2. Double-click .
→ The “Internet Properties” window opens.
3. Click the “Connections” tab, and click “LAN Settings” button.
5. Close the respective windows.
→ The “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window opens.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-88
6. CLIENT PC-TOOL 6.1.2 Tree Diagram

CLIENT PC-TOOL
6.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree HOSPITAL
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
6.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:6.9_MUTL}
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
{MU:6.10_PING}
{MU:6.6_COPY}
{MU:6.11_MON}
{MU:6.7_RENAME}
{MU:6.12_FTP}
{MU:6.8_GET VERSION}
{MU:6.13_VERSION UP}
{MU:6.14_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:6.15_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:6.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
{MU:6.18_ERROR DB}
{MU:6.19_READ}
{MU:6.20_WRITE}
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
Configuration
{MU:6.23_CDPath}
{MU:6.24_Export}
{MU:6.25_Import}
{MU:6.26_OnLine}
{MU:6.27_Network}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-89
6.2 Outline of the CLIENT PC-TOOL n “Under Maintenance” Message
When a command to change the contents of a flash ROM is executed from the CLIENT PC-
The CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed into a notebook PC of a service engineer to serve as TOOL while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL
a maintenance tool for use of service engineers. It is used to update the RU software in is in the ON-LINE mode, “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel,
version and check the connection between the DX Console and the RU on the client PC and the message of “Can't process the cassette” appears at the center.
networked with the RU.
While “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, no button control can
be accepted. No IP conveyance takes place even if you insert a cassette.
6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel
“Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, indicating that the RU is under
maintenance.
- MUTL
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-90
n Resetting the “Under Maintenance” Message 6.2.2 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Screen Display
Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. The “Under
If a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is executed while the RU is
Maintenance” message disappears, and the button control is accepted on the operation
running, the Error window as shown below appears on the client PC. The command for
panel. IP conveyance takes place.
changing the contents of the flash ROM is not executed.
Note that, however, that the blinking “Under Maintenance” message appears on the top of The commands for changing the contents of the flash ROM include:
the operation panel even if you reset the “Under Maintenance” message appearing at the
center of the operation panel.
- MUTL
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
CAUTION
Do not execute a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM while the RU
is running. The program stored in the flash ROM is corrupted and the machine cannot
start.
REFERENCE
The RU is running in the following states:
REFERENCE
- The RU is being initialized.
Blinking “Under Maintenance” indication on the top of the operation panel indicates that a
- The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process.
command to change the flash ROM through the use of the CLIENT PC-TOOL has been
- The User Utility is started by the RU.
executed.
n To Terminate the “Under Maintenance” Message

The blinking “Under Maintenance” message disappears by turning OFF the RU power and
then turning it ON.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-91
6.3 Hospital List
6.3.1 Function
The hospital list contains the name of each site, the FTP server used there, and the RU’s
registered in a tree form. When the site, FTP server and RU are registered in the hospital
list, their respective folders are created in the C drive of the client PC.
Refer to “6.4 NEW RU” for the details of procedures of registering in the hospital list.
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-92
6.4 NEW RU 4. Right-click "HOSPITAL". From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].
6.4.1 Function
Used to register the name of a site, the FTP server used there and the RU in the hospital list
in the tree form. Folders for storing the respective data are created in the C drive of the client
PC according to the tree constructed in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
6.4.2 Registering an RU in the Hospital List

5. Enter a new site name in the "HOSPITAL NAME" field and then click [SET].
This section describes the procedure for registering an RU in the hospital list.
The procedure set forth below can also be used for registering a new site name, FTP server,
or RU.
1. When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive, insert the RU-APL CD-
ROM into the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive, verify that
the CD path is set up.
{MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CD Path" Setting}
3. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-93
6. In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at 8. Select “SELECT RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”.
the site, and then click [SET].
9. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte numerical
characters are used, the input characters will be garbled.
REFERENCE
If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 7.
In this instance, skip to step 8.
7. Click on [OK].
10. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
If an error window opens, proceed as directed below:
- When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive
Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the client PC.
- When the employed PC is without a CD-ROM drive
Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-94
11. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT 6.4.3 Registering an FTP Server and RU with a Registered Site
USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET]. Name
This section describes the procedure for registering a new FTP server and RU with a
previously registered site name.
→ The added contents are displayed in the hospital list.
4. Right-click a site name. From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-95
5. In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at 7. Select “SELECT RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”.
the site, and then click [SET].
u NOTE u
Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte numerical
characters are used, the input characters will be garbled.
REFERENCE
6. Click on [OK].
9. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
If an error window opens, proceed as directed below:
- When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-96
10. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT 6.4.4 Registering an RU with a Registered FTP Server
USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET].
This section describes the procedure for registering a new RU with a previously registered
FTP server.
4. Right-click a FTP Server. From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].
REFERENCE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-97
5. Click on [OK]. 8. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
If an error window opens, proceed as directed below: 9. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT
- When the employed PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET].
6. Select “SELECT RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-98
6.5 DELETE 6.5.2 Deleting an RU Only

6.5.1 Function {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
Used to delete the site, FTP server or RU registered in the hospital list. The folders of the 2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
site, FTP server or the RU deleted from the tree are deleted from the C drive of the client PC. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
u NOTE u 3. Right-click the RU to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE].
procedures.
4. Click on [OK].
→ The RU is then deleted.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-99
6.5.3 Deleting an FTP Server 6.5.4 Deleting a Site
1. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.

{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. 2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
3. Right-click the FTP server to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose 3. Right-click the site name to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose
[DELETE]. [DELETE].
4. Click on [OK].
4. Click on [OK].
→ The site name and all the FTP servers and RUs registered with the site name are
→ The FTP server and all the RUs registered with the FTP server are then deleted. then deleted.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-100
6.5.5 Deleting the Entire Tree Information 4. Click on [OK].

→ The entire tree information registered in the hospital list is then deleted.
3. Right-click "HOSPITAL." From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-101
6.6 COPY 3. Enter a new site name in the “HOSPITAL NAME” field, and click on [SET]. Or
select an existing site name from the pull-down menu, and click on [SET].
6.6.1 Function l To input a new site name:
Used to copy the RU registered in the hospital list. The folder of the selected RU is copied in
the C drive of the client PC.
u NOTES u
- The "COPY" command works only when the RU to be added has the same model number
as an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, use the "NEW RU"
command.
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check l To select an existing site name:
procedures.
6.6.2 Procedures
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
2. Select [COPY] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be
copied in the hospital list.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-102
4. Enter the IP address of the FTP server being used at the site in the “FTP-SERV. 5. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
IP ADDR” field, and click on [SET]. Or select an existing site name from the pull-
down menu, and click on [SET].
l To input the IP address of a new FTP server:
6. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT
USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET].
l To select the IP address of an existing site name:
→ The copied RU is added to the hospital list.
u NOTES u
- If the existing site name is not selected in the procedure 2, the IP address of that FTP
server is not displayed in the pull-down menu. If the existing site name has not been
selected, make a new entry of the IP address of the FTP server.
- Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte characters are
used, the input characters will be garbled.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-103
6.7 RENAME 3. Input the name of the RU to be changed, and click on [SET].
6.7.1 Function
Used to change the name of the RU registered in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the → The RU name is changed.
procedures.
6.7.2 Procedures
2. Select [RENAME] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be

renamed in the hospital list.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-104
6.8 GET VERSION 6.8.2 Procedures
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
6.8.1 Function {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
Used to identify the version of the RU software of the RU registered in the hospital list by 2. Select [GET VERSION] from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the RU
whose software version is to be identified in the hospital list.
accessing the FTP server from the client PC while connected with the network in the site.
The identified version of the RU software is displayed in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
→ The RU software version number then appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-105
6.9 MUTL 3. Click on [MUTL].
6.9.1 Function
Used to start up the MUTL of the RU service utility. The MUTL serves to diagnose and adjust
the RU, such as board checks and mechanical checks. Although the same commands as
those of the DX Console appear when the MUTL is started up from the client PC, some of
them cannot be executed.
u NOTE u
6.9.2 Procedures
Refer to “7. MUTL (maintenance utility) functions” for functions of the respective MUTL
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. commands and the detailed procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} {MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-106
6.10 PING 4. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
6.10.1 Function
Executes the PING command for the RU or the FTP server selected in the hospital list.
Clicking on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears, where you can check whether
the network connection from the client PC to the RU or the FTP server is normal. When
the network connection is determined to be normal as the result of the PING command, the
message of the result OK appears on the “command prompt” window.
u NOTE u REFERENCE
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the "Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem.
l [GOOD indication]
6.10.2 Procedures | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l [NO GOOD indication]
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).
2. Select the RU or FTP server in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
{Troubleshooting}
3. Click on [PING].
→ The “command prompt” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-107
6.11 MON l Status
Used to display either the OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ status.
l Other information
6.11.1 Function
isplays the barcode information when the barcode is read.
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes l Status changed time
its status.
Displays the time when the I/O status changes.
The barcode information is displayed if read, as well as the status of OPEN or CLOSE.
The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs (barcode readers) are displayed, REFERENCE
although ON or OFF is not displayed for the motors. The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse.
The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted.
If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text.
u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-108
l I/O name 6.11.2 Procedures
The I/O name is displayed.
Symbol Name 1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
SA1 Cassette IN sensor {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
SA2 Cassette hold sensor 2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor
SA4 IP dropping sensor
SA6 Suction arm HP sensor
SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor
SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor
SA10 Cassette IP holding sensor
SA11 Cassette ejection sensor
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor
SA16 Inch/metric sensor
SC1 Turn roller grip/dust removal HP sensor
SC3 IP sensor 1
SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor
SG1 IP sensor 2
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor
SZ2 Grip release HP sensor
BCRC1 Barcode reader
* The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-109
3. Click on [MON].
→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears.
4. Click on [START].
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
has changed.
REFERENCES
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However, the
items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to
resume the monitor function. The status change of the I/O of the RU since [STOP] is
clicked until [START] is clicked is not displayed.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-110
6.12 FTP
6.12.1 Function
Used to check the network with the RU selected in the hospital list, and verify that the FTP
server in the DX Console is operating.
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the DX Console are normal.
If the network connection and the FTP server are determined to be normal as the result of the
FTP execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on two windows.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
6.12.2 Procedures {Troubleshooting}
4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
3. Click on [FTP].
u NOTE u
{Troubleshooting}
→ Two windows appear.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-111
6.13 VERSION UP 6.13.2 Procedures
Refer to Checks, replacement and adjustment of parts, “13.2 Updating the Software from the
CAUTION Client PC”, for details of the version update from the client PC.
{MC:13.2_Updating the Software from the Client PC}
Never turn OFF the RU or the client PC during version-update. Otherwise, the
contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, resulting in the RU unable to boot up.
6.13.1 Function
Used to execute RU software version updates.
u NOTE u
l Recognizing the device type to be updated in version

The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the
installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. CLIENT PC-TOOL
reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU63A board of the RU to identify
the type.
u NOTE u
switches mounted on the CPU63A board are correct.
If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software is updated in version, resulting in
the RU unable to boot up.
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “4.3.3 Replacing the CPU Board”

A list of version-updatable ones of the software packages included in the CD-ROM is
displayed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-112
6.14 EDIT HISTORY 6.14.2 Procedures
u NOTE u
6.14.1 Function The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HITTORY] is the information
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
Used to view the history information (such as the number of IP’s processed by the RU and
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL
lighting time of the erasure lamp) of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC. The
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the history information.
information can be reset when units are replaced. The following five kinds of information are
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
displayed and may be edited.
- USE
- IP 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
- BARCODE {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- LASER
- LAMP
u NOTES u
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
procedures.
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HITTORY] is the information

connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-
TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the history information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the history information
while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in
the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-113
3. Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. 5. Click on [SET].
u NOTE u
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the history
4. Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
Refer to the detailed description of each item for the details of the contents appearing on PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
the screen. {MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-114
6.15 EDIT CONFIGURATION 6.15.2 Procedures
u NOTE u
6.15.1 Function The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the
information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified
Used to set the configuration information for the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC.
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT
However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in the
PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
u NOTES u
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the

in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the
CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-115
3. Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION]. 5. Click on [SET].
u NOTE u
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
4. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items.
REFERENCE
Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURAIOTN” for the details of the CONFIGURATION items.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-116
6.16 EDIT CL NAME 6.16.2 Editing/Adding the DX Console as Image Transfer Destination
l Overview
6.16.1 Function Edit and/or add the DX Console as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's
may be registered as image transfer destinations.
Used to edit/add the DX Console as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master
CL's.
This command can be set only when “HOSPITAL” is selected in “SCREEN TYPE” setting at
the time of installation or the update in version.
u NOTES u
procedures.
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information

connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-
TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-117
l Procedures for editing/adding the DX Console as image transfer destination 4. Click on [MODIFY] to edit, or [NEW] to add.
u NOTE u l To edit:
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} l To add:
→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
u NOTE u
3. Click on [CL NAME].
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-118
5. Enter "CL IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET]. 6.16.3 Editing the List of Master CL's
u NOTE u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the DX Console to be connected with the RU. l Overview
Edit the list of master CL's. Of the DX Console registered as image transfer destinations, the
DX Console registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four
DX Console may be registered in the "MASTER CL" field.
When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the DX Console registered is displayed on
the LCD screen of RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-119
l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's 4. Select a DX Console to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's.
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
u NOTE u
3. Click on [EDIT CL NAME].
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
6.16.4 Switching the Master CL

Switch the master CL.
u NOTE u
Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the master
CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG" and "HISTORY
LOG", will be lost.
For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" of
the Installation volume.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-120
6.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT Item name Function
The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is
1 "FILE OPEN" button
displayed on the Timing Chart screen.
6.17.1 Function
The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing
Used to view the I/O trace data of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC in the form of 2 "Pass" text box
chart is entered.
a timing chart. Note that, however, only the I/O trace data can be displayed.
The display scale for the time base (horizontal
3 "Scale" button
axis) is changed.
4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed.
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar
5 Chart display area available, the display range may be moved by
manipulating the scroll bar.
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and
pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the
following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B
fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position
6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area pointed by the left mouse button.
-B : Time elapsed from power ON to the position
pointed by the right mouse button.
- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in
the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.
u NOTES u
procedures.
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the
CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-121
6.17.2 Procedures 3. Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT].
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT
PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-122
6.18 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
6.18.1 Function 2 “FATAL" button Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed.
Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of 3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
the RU, stored in the C drive of the client PC. You can append notes to error messages, or
view the detailed information or analysis flows. Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
4 “BOTH” button
displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
The latest error log data is copied from the CPU63A
6 “UPDATE” button
board of the RU to the FTP server of the DX Console.
The contents of the error log file selected are
7 Error message list box
displayed.
The error code selected (highlighted) in the error
8 “Error Code” text box
The error name selected (highlighted) in the error
9 “Error Name” text box
The occurrence condition of the error message
10 “Meaning” text box selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is
displayed.
The detail information selected (highlighted) in the
11 “Details Info.” Button
error message list box is displayed.
The analysis flow for the error message selected
12 “Analysis Flow” button (highlighted) in the error message list box is
displayed.
u NOTE u A memo may be attached to the error message
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored 13 “Memo.” text box (highlighted) in the error message list box.
in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the Up to seven memos may be entered.
client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE The name of the person (author) who entered text in
mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the error log information. 14 “Author” text box
the “Memo.” text box is entered.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key
and press the [SAVE] button again.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-123
6.18.2 Procedures 3. Click on [ERROR DB].
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored
in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the
client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE
mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the error log information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-124
6.19 READ 6.19.2 Procedures

6.19.1 Function
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from a recording
medium such as an FD to the C drive of the client PC. The items which can be copied by
means of the READ command include:
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data.
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time). 2. Select the items to be read from the pull-down menu of “READ”.
l "SCN ALL DATA"
Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time.

Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data.

Copies optical data of the scanner data.
3. Click on [EXECUTE].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-125
4. Select a location of the data to be read. 6. Again verify the location to be read, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When data is to be read from a recording medium such as an FD, be sure to set the
recording medium such as the FD which contains the data to be read in the client PC,
before selecting the location.
7. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When the data is read from the recording medium such as an FD, be sure to remove
０
the recording medium after clicking on [OK].
5. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-126
6.20 WRITE 6.20.2 Procedures

6.20.1 Function
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from the C drive of the
client PC to a recording medium such as an FD. The items which can be copied by means
of the WRITE command include:
l "ERROR LOG"
Copies the error log data.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data. 2. Select the items to be written from the pull-down menu of “WRITE”.
l "TRACE LOGS"
Copies the trace log data (design analysis information).
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time).
l "LOG ALL"
Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"


Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. 3. Click on [EXECUTE].

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-127
4. Select a location where the data is to be written. 6. Again verify the location to write, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When data is to be written into a recording medium such as an FD, be sure to set the
recording medium such as the FD in the client PC, before selecting the location.
7. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When the data is written from the recording medium such as an FD, be sure to remove
０
the recording medium after clicking on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-128
6.21 UPLOAD 6.21.2 Procedures
6.21.1 Function CAUTION

The LED panel of the RU lights up while the flash ROM of the RU is being updated.
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from the C drive of the Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
client PC to the flash ROM of the RU. The items which can be uploaded include: If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the
RU will no longer boot up.
l "CONFIGURATION"
l "HISTORY LOG"
l "SCN ALL DATA"



Copies optical data of the scanner data. 2. Select the item to be uploaded from the pull-down menu of “UPLOAD”.
REFERENCE
The contents copied into the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the RU power
and then turning it ON.
u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-129
3. Click on [EXECUTE]. 6.21.3 Errors that may Occur during UPLOAD and their Probable
Causes
turning it ON.
→ Uploading starts, and the following dialogue boxes appear on the screen of the client
PC.
4. Click on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-130
6.22 DOWNLOAD 6.22.2 Procedures

6.22.1 Function
Used to copy the configuration information, error log data or the like from the flash ROM of
the RU to the client PC. The items which can be downloaded include:
l "ERROR LOG"
Copies the error log data.
l "CONFIGURATION"
l "TRACE LOGS" 2. Select the item to be downloaded from the pull-down menu of “DOWNLOAD”.
Copies the trace log data (design analysis information).
l "HISTORY LOG"
l "LOG ALL"
Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"



u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-131
3. Click on [EXECUTE]. 6.22.3 Errors that may Occur during DOWNLOAD and their Probable
Causes
turning it ON.
→ Downloading starts, and the following dialogue boxes appear on the screen of the
client PC.
4. Click on [OK].
REFERENCE
Change over the CLEINT PC-TOOL to the OFF-LINE mode to execute respective
commands, when the downloaded information is to be edited or viewed. Refer to “5.6
ON-LINE and OFF-LINE” for the detailed procedures of changing over to the OFF-LINE
mode.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-132
6.23 CDPath 2. Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.
l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the

6.23.1 Function procedure 5.
When an RU is to be registered in the hospital list or the RU software is to be updated in

version, the necessary data is usually acquired from the RU-APL CD-ROM. If a folder in
which the complete RU-APL CD-ROM data is copied is present on the hard disk of the client
PC, you can acquire the necessary data from the hard disk without the RU-APL CD-ROM by
specifying the folder path.
u NOTES u
- Completely copy all of the data into a single folder when the RU-APL CD-ROM data is to be l To select the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and
copied. You cannot register an RU in the hospital list or update the RU software in version proceed to the next procedure.
with a folder containing a partial copy of the data.
- Set the “CDPath” only when necessary. If the “CDPath” is set, you cannot register an RU
in the hospital list or version-update the RU software from the RU-APL CD-ROM even if the
CD-ROM is inserted into the client PC. Cancel the setting when not necessary.
6.23.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath" → The window for selecting the folder appears.
The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the “Copy CD-R” folder of the C 3. Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD-ROM is completely copied.
drive are described as an example.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-133
4. Click on [OK]. 6.23.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
→ The path is displayed in the text box.
5. Click on [SET].
2. Click on [CLEAR].
→ The path in the text box is cleared, and the “CDPath” setting is canceled.
3. Click on [SET].
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-134
6.23.4 Verifying the "CDPath" Setting
1. Choose "CDPath" from the "Configuration(C)" menu.
→ The "CD PATH SETTING" window opens.
2. Verify that the CD path is set.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-135
6.24 Export 2. Select the location to which the data is exported.
6.24.1 Function
Used to copy the tree information registered in the hospital list, and folders of the site, FTP
server and RU stored in the C drive of the client PC to the hard disk of the client PC or to an
external recording medium.
u NOTES u
- The data to be copied by means of [Export] is too large to be stored in a recording medium
with a small recording capacity such as an FD. Specify the hard disk with a sufficient
empty space or a recording medium with a large capacity as the destination of the data to
be copied.
- Upon execution of [Export], a “SERV” folder is created in the specified storage region. Do
not change the folder name and the stored contents of the created “SERV” folder.
6.24.2 Procedures
1. Select “Export” from the “Configuration (C)” menu. 3. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK].
4. Again verify the location for export, and click on [OK].
→ The “EXPORT” window appears.
→ The data is stored in the location specified in the procedure 2.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-136
6.25 Import 2. Select the location to which the data is to be imported.
6.25.1 Function
Used to read the data stored by means of [Export], display the data in the tree of the hospital
list, and store it in the C drive of the client PC.
u NOTE u
If data with the site name same as that registered in the hospital list is to be read, the
following error message appears and [Import] is interrupted.
To read the data having the site name same as that registered in the hospital list, delete the
site having the same name registered in the hospital list, before re-trying [Export].
6.25.2 Procedures
1. Select “Import” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
4. Again verify the location for import, and click on [OK].
→ The imported contents are reflected in the hospital list.

→ The “IMPORT” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-137
6.26 OnLine 6.26.2 Procedures
1. Select “OnLine” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.

6.26.1 Function
Used to change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes.
The available commands differ between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes.
l ON-LINE mode
A check mark appears at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ A check mark disappears from the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu,
setting the CLIENT-PC TOOL in the OFF-LINE mode.
l OFF-LINE mode
A check mark does not appear at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu.
Refer to “5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE” for the details of the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-138
6.27 Network
6.27.1 Function
Upon executing the “Network” command, the “Network Connection” window of Windows
appears. This command is used to connect the client PC with the network at the user’s site
and make the network settings.
6.27.2 Procedures
1. Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-139
6.28 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL u NOTE u
If your click of [START] opens the following window without starting CLIENT PC-TOOL,
the version of CLIENT PC-TOOL stored on the RU-APL CD-ROM is later than the
6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD-ROM (Setup PC- version of CLIENT PC-TOOL installed on the client PC.
TOOL)
1. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the PC.

→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens.
2. Click [START].
→ CLIENT PC-TOOL starts up.
- To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, click [BACK] and then perform the version update
procedure set forth under "5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL."
{MU:5.9_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL}
- If you do not intend to update CLIENT PC-TOOL on the spot, click [CONTINUE].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-140
6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window 6.28.3 Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL
1. Click the Start menu of Windows. Type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\ 1. Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of CLIENT PC-TOOL.
RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe"] and press the [Enter] key.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-141
7. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions A1
The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated by starting up the {MU:7.3[5]_Scanner Check}
MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL on the DX Console or from the CLIENT PC-TOOL on the client
PC. {MU:7.3[5-1]_Polygon Mortor}
{MU:7.3[5-2]_Laser}
CAUTION
After the MUTL is used, the RU cannot read normally. Be sure to turn OFF and back {MU:7.3[5-3]_HV Diagnostic}
ON the power of the RU at the end.
{MU:7.3[5-3-1]_HV Setting/Diagnostic}
{MU:7.3[5-4]_Format Adjustment}
7.1 Tree of MUTL
{MU:7.3[5-4-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)}
MUTL
{MU:7.3[5-4-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)}
{MU:7.3[1]_Conveyance Check} {MU:7.3[5-4-3]_Manual Adjustment (Line)}

{MU:7.3[1-1]_Conveyance Setting}
{MU:7.3[5-4-4]_Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel)}
{MU:7.3[1-2]_Processing Mode Setting}
{MU:7.3[5-4-5]_Default Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:7.3[1-3]_Number of Conveyance Setting}
{MU:7.3[5-4-6]_Default Setting (Pixel)}
{MU:7.3[2]_Board Check} {MU:7.3[5-4-7]_Optic Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:7.3[2-1]_CPU Board Setting Display}
{MU:7.3[5-4-8]_Optic Setting (Pixel)}
{MU:7.3[2-2]_Panel Check}
{MU:7.3[5-5]_Correction}
{MU:7.3[2-2-1]_PANEL LED On/Off}
{MU:7.3[5-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST)}
{MU:7.3[2-2-2]_BUZZER On/Off}
{MU:7.3[5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)}
{MU:7.3[3]_Software Check} {MU:7.3[5-5-3]_Shading Speed Correction (HR Speed)}

{MU:7.3[3-1]_Ver. Display} {MU:7.3[5-5-4]_Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR))}
{MU:7.3[3-2]_MAC Address Display}
{MU:7.3[5-5-5]_Sensitivity Correction (ST)}
{MU:7.3[4]_Virtual Image Check} {MU:7.3[5-5-6]_Sensitivity Correction (HR)}
{MU:7.3[4-1]_LED Virtual Read} {MU:7.3[5-5-7]_Special Sensitivity Correction}

{MU:7.3[4-2]_PMT Virtual Read}
{MU:7.3[5-5-8]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
A1
A2 B1
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-142
A2 B1
{MU:7.3[5-6]_Trouble Shooting}
{MU:7.3[5-6-1]_Shading Correction}
{MU:7.3[5-7]_HV ON/OFF}
{MU:7.3[5-8]_S Value}
{MU:7.3[5-8-1]_S value now}
{MU:7.3[5-8-2]_S value calculate}
{MU:7.3[5-8-3]_PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize}
{MU:7.3[6]_For Design}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-143
7.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL 7.2.1 Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL
The MUTL is started by the following two ways:

- To start from the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console
CAUTION
{MU:7.2.1_Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL} Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
- To start from the CLEINT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode
{MU:7.2.2_Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL}
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
Start up the MUTL by either method depending on the conditions of a user’s site for {MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
operation.
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where "MUTL" is to be started.
u NOTE u
Some commands for virtual image check and scanner check require images to be read and
output on the DX Console.
Since images cannot be read or output on the client PC, always start up the MUTL from the
RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console to check the virtual images and the scanner.
REFERENCE 3. Click on [MUTL], and the “MUTL” window appears.

The MUTL has the same menu items to appear either started from the RU PC-TOOL of the
DX Console or from the CLEINT PC-TOOL of the client PC.
To exit, refer to “7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL”.

{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
REFERENCE
Clicking on [MUTL], “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel of
the RU. Refer to “4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the operation panel” for the
details of the “Under Maintenance” indication.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-144
7.2.2 Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL 3. Click on [MUTL], and the “MUTL” window appears.
CAUTION
Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
REFERENCE
Clicking on [MUTL], “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel of
the RU. Refer to “6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the operation panel” for the
details of the “Under Maintenance” indication.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-145
7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the operation that was performed in the MUTL has been completed
before exiting the MUTL.
If the operation that was performed in the MUTL is under way, the operation running on the
RU remains intact even when the MUTL is exited by clicking on .
1. Click on in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
u NOTE u
Turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON again to convey the IP for reading an image on
the RU or other operations after the MUTL is exited. Otherwise, the conveyance may fail.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-146
7.3 Details of MUTL 4. Perform Conveyance Setting.
[1] Conveyance Check
n Function
Automatic conveyance (unattended conveyance) of IP
The following three items are to be specified for conveyance check:
- Setting of automatic conveyance 5. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU.
- Setting of processing mode
- Setting of number of conveyance
→ “Number of conveyance performed” and “number of conveyance setting” appear on
n Procedures the operation panel of the RU.
The procedures for the conveyance check with the following settings are described as an
example.
- Setting of automatic conveyance: AUTO MODE
- Setting of processing mode: 1-ERASE
- Setting of number of conveyance: Three times
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU.
- When using the RU PC-TOOL of the DX Console:
- When using the CLIENT PC-TOOL of the DX Console:
3. Click the [Conveyance Check].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-147
5. Insert the cassette. n Procedures for Halting in the Middle of Conveyance
→ Erasure conveyance starts, and the result is displayed on the MUTL. 1. Set to halt the conveyance.
l GOOD indication
2. Exit the MUTL.

l NO GOOD indication
"RESULT: XXXX (XXXX: error code)" is displayed. n Procedures for Exiting Conveyance Check
u NOTE u 1. Select [ROUTINE] for Conveyance Setting.
A four-digit number is displayed as an error code.
Perform the troubleshooting procedure with “1” added to the head of the displayed error CAUTION
code. Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting" back to
---Example--- "ROUTINE" again.
When the displayed error code is “0293”:
→ Perform the troubleshooting procedures for the error of “10293”.
2. Exit the MUTL.

u NOTE u 3. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again.
{Troubleshooting}
CAUTION
Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting" back to
"ROUTINE" again.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-148
[1-1] Conveyance Setting
l AUTO MODE
The conveyance is repeated with the processing mode and number of IP conveyance that
have been set.
It is used for checking the conveyance.
l ROUTINE
The conveyance is performed with the processing mode that has been set.
When the number of IP conveyance is set to greater than 1, the conveyance is performed
again as the cassette is set again once the IP returns to the cassette.
It should be noted that when the mode is changed to "ROUTINE" while the conveyance is
repeated in "AUTO MODE", "AUTO MODE" may be canceled.
[1-2] Processing Mode Setting
l READ: Read
Performs a normal read operation.
This menu should not be used for servicing purposes.
l 1-ERASE: Primary Erasure

IP reading is performed to detect the dose of the IP, and IP erasure is performed according to
the detected dose.
Because IP reading is intended to detect the dose, image output is not generated.
l 2-ERASE: Secondary Erasure

Conveyance is performed on the same conveyance path as for IP reading, but image reading
is not done.
This menu should be used when you only want to make mechanical checks on the IP
conveyance.
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting

The number of conveyance may be set in a range from 1 to 99999.
To halt the conveyance while the IP is conveyed with the number of conveyance set to
greater than 1, set "0 (zero)" to the number of conveyance.
When the number of conveyance is set, "number set" and "number conveyed" are displayed
on the operation panel of the RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-149
[2] Board Check  Hexadecimal-Binary Conversion Table
Hexadecimal Binary
0 0000
[2-1] CPU Board Setting Display 1 0001
2 0010
3 0011
 Function/Purpose 4 0100
The settings of the DIP switches on the CPU board are displayed. 5 0101
6 0110
The settings of the DIP switches are shown in two-digit hexadecimal numbers. You can know
7 0111
the settings of the DIP switches by converting the number into an eight-digit binary number.
8 1000
REFERENCE 9 1001
Although a four-digit number appears, the two lower digits show the setting. A 1010
B 1011
C 1100
 How to Read the Indication D 1101
E 1110
Example: Indication of “0x30” F 1111
1. View the indication on the screen.
2. Convert the hexadecimal number into a binary number.  Relation between the Binary Number and the DIP Switches
→ Hexadecimal “3” means binary “0011”, hexadecimal “0” means binary “0000”, and the The first digit of the binary number corresponds to the first DIP switch.
setting is “0011 0000”.
{n Hexadecimal-Binary Conversion Table}
3. See the DIP switch settings from the binary number obtained in the procedure 2.
→ As the fifth and sixth digits of the binary number are 1 and the others are 0, the fifth
and sixth DIP switches are ON and the others are OFF.
{n Relation between the Binary Number and the DIP Switches}
 Exiting Procedures
1. Exit the MUTL.
2. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
3. Turn ON the main power switch to restart the RU.

 Details of the DIP Switch Settings
{MC:4.3_CPU Board}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-150
[2-2] Panel Check [2-2-2] BUZZER On/Off
[2-2-1] PANEL LED On/Off  Function/Purpose

The buzzer is caused to sound.
 Function/Purpose  Procedures
All LEDs on the operation panel are lit or unlit.
1. Select “ON” or “OFF” of the function.
 Procedures - ON: The buzzer sounds.
- OFF: The buzzer stops sounding.
- ON: All LEDs on the operation panel are lit.  Exiting Procedures
- OFF: All LEDs on the operation panel are unlit. 1. Exit the MUTL.
 Exiting Procedures 2. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-151
[3] Software Check [3-2] MAC Address Display
[3-1] Ver. Display n Function

Displays the RU’s MAC address.
n Function n Procedures
Used to display the versions of the CPU63A board IPL and the firmware of the PNL board
1. Start the MUTL.
existing on the flash ROM.
n Procedures 2. Select [MAC Address Display].
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Select [Ver. Display (FLASH)].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the MAC address, troubleshoot the
machine.
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the versions, troubleshoot the
machine.
3. Exit the MUTL.
{Troubleshooting} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
3. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-152
[4] Virtual Image Check  Procedures
u NOTE u
[4-1] LED Virtual Read Be sure to use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL when using the menu.
n Function 1. Reserve an examination on the Console. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/
TEST”.
Cause the blue LED of the PMT board and the LED of the PMT board to illuminate, and input
the resulting light from the light-collecting guide to generate image output. 2. Start the MUTL.
If there is no problem with the output image, it can be decided that the failure of the scanning
optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality. 3. Select the read conditions in “LED Virtual Read”.
- OFF: Normal read
- ON (0.1 mR): Virtual read with an assumed dose of 0.1 mR
- ON (1 mR): Virtual read with an assumed dose of 1 mR
REFERENCE
Normally, use “ON (0.1 mR)”.
4. Cancel the RU maintenance mode.

5. Insert the cassette.

→ Read starts, and the image appears.
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-153
[4-2] PMT Virtual Read  Procedures
u NOTE u
n Function Be sure to use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL when using the menu.
Generate and output image data with the LOG AMP of the PMT board.
If there is no problem with "LED Virtual Read", the result of "PMT Virtual Read" permits a 1. Reserve an examination on the Console. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/
decision to be made whether the failure of the scanning optics unit is responsible for the TEST”.
image abnormality.
2. Start the MUTL.

- OFF: Normal read
- ON: Image data is created by LOG AMP.
5. Insert the cassette.

→ Read starts, and the image appears.
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-154
[5] Scanner Check [5-2] Laser
[5-1] Polygon Mortor n Function

Turn ON or OFF the laser.
When the laser is turned ON, the polygon is turned ON, and the polygon and laser are
n Function diagnosed.
Turn ON or OFF the polygon. Either of the following values is displayed on the MUTL.
When it is turned ON, it is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a - LDIFINT: Factory-default LD current value
predetermined time after the polygon is activated. - LDIFNOW: Current value at present
- LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value to indicate how much the current has dropped, from the factory
n Procedures default until at present.
1. Start the MUTL.
n Procedures
2. Turn ON the polygon.
CAUTION
While the laser is being turned ON, do not turn OFF the polygon.
If the polygon is turned OFF, the laser is irradiated to a single spot, possibly result in a
machine failure or fire.
REFERENCE 1. Start the MUTL.

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “THE POLYGON IS TURNED {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
ON.”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table.
2. Turn ON the laser.
{Troubleshooting}
3. Turn OFF the polygon.
→ The following message appears in the MUTL.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..

4. Exit the MUTL. LDIFINT : 300
LDIFNOW : 0
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 0
5. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “THE LASER IS TURNED
ON.”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-155
3. Turn OFF the laser. [5-3] HV Diagnostic
[5-3-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic
4. Exit the MUTL. n Function

{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} When the HV voltage is inputted over a range from 250 to 999, the command value outputted
5. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. from the SCN23A board is detected to check that the difference from the input value is held
within +/- 10%. Checks can be performed on the front side and back side, respectively.
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Select [HV Diagnostic].
3. Input the HV value.
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the MUTL.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-156
[5-4] Format Adjustment [5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)
When the image is outputted under condition where the machine shipment control data is
installed, a while blank portion may appear on the film or there may be some non-outputted  Function/Purpose
portion (image loss). In that case, format adjustment is used for fine adjustment. Make fine adjustment when the output image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal
direction (main scan direction).
u NOTES u
Its adjustable range is from -4% to +4%. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the
- Before making format adjustment, be sure to turn ON the HV switch. With the HV switch in
image is enlarged, while it is reduced when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
the OFF position, format adjustment cannot be done.
- When the setting is changed, the result associated with that change is immediately  Procedures
reflected.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
REFERENCE - Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment.
When both Manual Adjustment (FREQ) and Manual Adjustment (Pixel) are to be made, - To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or other
Manual Adjustment (FREQ) should be performed first. If Manual Adjustment (Pixel) is done thin article. If you use a tester or other thick article, the resulting image is larger than the
first, it may be necessary to perform Manual Adjustment (Pixel) once again, as a result of actual size so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted.
Manual Adjustment (FREQ).
1. Place a 175 mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x
17” (35 cm x 43 cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray tube at about
1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
2. Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure 1, and output the image. Use the menu of
“Sensitivity” in “QC/TEST”.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting
the image.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-157
3. Measure a misalignment of the reading width. 4. Start the MUTL.
Measure the actual size of the 175 mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula shown below.
a
Steel rule actual size -
IP conveyance Reduction factor 6. Input the adjustment value (example: “2.8”) of the main scan length calculated in
direction ÷ Steel rule actual size x 100 = procedure 3 in the Input column of “[5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)”.
a Adjustment value (%) u NOTE u
Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the
Measure "a" on the output film. FRRB404010.ai RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained.
--- Example ---
If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x #1
35 cm) size is outputted to a 14" x17" (35 cm x 43 cm) film:
(175 - (170/1))/175x100 = 2.8 (%)
Since the adjustment will be made so as to enlarge the white blank portion, enter the
value "2.8" in the Input range field. #2
REFERENCES
- The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
#3
Direction of

IP conveyance 2.8
Reduction ratio:
100% RT-01
#4
FRRB404011.ai
FRRB404013.ai
- The white blank portion within the output image reduces when you enter a minus (-)
value and enlarges when you enter a plus (+) value. 7. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
Minus Plus

White blank
portion
FRRB404012.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-158
8. Read one of IP’s prepared in procedure 1, and output the image. Use the menu of [5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)
u INSTRUCTION u  Function/Purpose
Be sure to observe the following instructions to proceed with operations of outputting Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the horizontal direction (main scan
the image. direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears on the side edge of the image, or a portion of
{IN:9._Image/Conveyance Checks} the image is not outputted).
Its adjustable range is from -500 to 500 pixels. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered,
9. Measure the actual size of the 175 mm-length steel rule and the size of the white the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a
blank portion, and verify that there is no misalignment. positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
10. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.  Adjustment Method (Concept of Adjustment)
{MU:4.15_BACKUP} Described below are the procedures for centering the image reading position with respect
to the image frame. The image frame can be centered by setting a margin opposite to the
 Exiting Procedures reference to 1.75 mm when the IP in the cassette is brought closer to the reference and read.
1. Exit the MUTL.  Procedures
2. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch. 1. Expose IPs of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u
2. Output the image of one of the IPs prepared in the procedure 1 by loading
the cassette with the IP in the cassette brought closer to the reference. Use
“Sensitivity” of “QC/TEST” in the menu.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
Cassette
IP
Bring closer to the reference. FRRB404019.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-159
3. Measure the margin at the center in the image conveyance direction. Calculate  Exiting Procedures
the adjustment value by the following formula to obtain the margin of 1.75 mm on
the opposite reference.
1. Exit the MUTL.

Measure the center in the image
conveyance direction b mm
(1.75–b/Reduction factor) x 10 =
Adjustment value (pixel)
FRRB404020.ai
--- Example ---

If the margin on the opposite reference side is 3 mm when outputting to the film with the
reduction factor of 80%, input “−20” as the adjustment value.
(1.75−3/0.8) x 10 = −20 (pixel)
4. Start the MUTL.

6. Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “−20”) calculated in
procedure 3 in the Input column of “[5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)”.
u NOTE u
Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the
RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained.
7. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
9. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
10. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-160
[5-4-3] Manual Adjustment (Line) 3. Measure the leading edge of the IP.
Measure the length of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the IP carrying direction (sub-scanning
accordance with the formula shown below.
direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears or a portion of the image is not output).
REFERENCE
Its adjustable range is from 1 to 50 digits. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the
white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a positive- If the entered adjustment value (C) is greater than the current value (A), the white
quantity (+) value is entered. blank portion (b) expands. The white blank portion (b) narrows if the entered
The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows. adjustment value (C) is smaller than the current value (A).
n Procedures
--- Example ---
REFERENCES
If you want to narrow the IP leading-edge position by 1 mm when an IP of 18" x
- IP leading-edge adjustment is only effective for an IP of HR type. 24" HR size is outputted to a film:
- IP leading-edge adjustment may be made for each of the IP sizes. 30 (displayed value) - (10x1) = 20
Thus, "Input range" is 20.
1. Expose IPs of a size (18” x 24” HR/HR-BD or 24” x 30” HR/HR-BD) to
be adjusted, with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 15 mR.
u NOTE u
2. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and

“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an
image output.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-161
4. Enter the IP leading-edge position (e.g., “20”) calculated at step 3. 5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
u NOTES u
- After entering the IP leading edge position, do not turn OFF the power of the
RU. If the RU is powered OFF, the IP leading edge position data will not be
retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from 1 to 50.
6. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and

“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an
image output.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “9. Image/Conveyance Checks”
「
when outputting the image.
7. Verify that the white blank portion reaches the value so adjusted.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-162
[5-4-4] Manual Adjustment (IP Pixel) 2. Output the image of one of the IPs prepared in the procedure 1 by loading
the cassette with the IP in the cassette brought closer to the reference. Use
“Sensitivity” of “QC/TEST” in the menu.
 Function/Purpose
u INSTRUCTION u
Used to adjust the main scan position per IP size. The following sizes can be set.
Layer 1 Layer 2 Command name
the image.
[5-4-4] [5-4-4-1] 10 x 12 inch
[5-4-4-2] 08 x 10 inch
[5-4-4-3] 24 x 30 cm
[5-4-4-4] 18 x 24 cm
[5-4-4-5] 15 x 30 cm
[5-4-4-6] 30 x 24 cm
 Procedures Cassette
u NOTE u
Carry out “[5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)” before taking the procedures below. IP
REFERENCE
The procedures are mentioned for setting “[5-4-4-1]10x12 inch” as an example. The similar Bring closer to the reference. FRRB404019.ai
procedures are to be taken for other settings except the command name.
3. Measure the margin at the center in the image conveyance direction. Calculate
1. Expose an IP of an arbitrary size with a tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. an adjustment value in accordance with the following formula so that the margin
on the opposite reference side is a white blank amount on the opposite reference
u INSTRUCTION u side per IP size shown in the table below.
Measure the center in the image conveyance direction
(a–b/Reduction factor) x 10 = Adjustment value (pixel)
Theoretical value (mm) of the white blank b mm

amount on the opposite reference side per IP size
IP size a
Half-scale 1.75
Full-scale 1.75
Quarter-scale 2.00
24x30 1.95
Sixth-scale 2.25
18x24 2.25
15x30 1.70 FRRB404021.ai
--- Example ---

If the margin on the opposite reference side is 3 mm when outputting to the film using
the half-scale IP with the reduction factor of 80%, input “−20” as the adjustment value.
(1.75−3/0.8) x 10 = −20 (pixel)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-163
4. Start the MUTL.  Exiting Procedures
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 1. Exit the MUTL.
5. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. 2. Shut down the RU, and turn OFF the main power switch.
6. Input the reading start position adjustment value (example: “−20”) calculated in
procedure 3 in the Input column of "10 x 12 inch".
u NOTES u
- Do not turn OFF the RU before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-OK." If the
RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -25 to 25.
u INSTRUCTION u
the image.
9. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-164
[5-4-5] Default Setting (FREQ) [5-4-7] Optic Setting (FREQ)
Set the value of the main scan length (FREQ) to its default value. Unavailable menu for this machine.
Input no numerical values.
[5-4-6] Default Setting (Pixel) [5-4-8] Optic Setting (Pixel)

Set the value of the main scan position (Pixel) to its default value. Unavailable menu for this machine.
Input no numerical values.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-165
[5-5] Correction 8. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”.
[5-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction (ST) u NOTE u
If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Shading/sensitivity correction takes place. Using this command, you can carry out “Shading
Speed Correction” and “Sensitivity Correction” at the same time.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Carry out format adjustment before making corrections. If the image has a white blank
portion, an error might result.
- Read the IP for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes after the IP exposure. Correction cannot
take place normally with other timings.
- Use an IP of 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm). Correction cannot
take place normally with other sizes.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
REFERENCE
9. Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
“Shading/Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. REFERENCE

“Checking the Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 10 to 13.
1. Measure and record the dose.
10. Expose the IP under the following conditions.
X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value
Tungsten 1 80 200
Tungsten 1 80 200
11. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 10 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
3. Start the MUTL. after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”.
4. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Shading/Sensitivity
12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity.
Correction (ST)”.
13. Confirm the S value.
5. [SET]
6. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK].
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-166
[5-5-2] Shading Correction (HR) 8. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
 Function/Purpose u NOTE u
Shading correction takes place. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use an IP of 24cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with
other sizes.
 Procedures
REFERENCE
FRRB404018.ai
“Shading Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9.
1. Measure and record the dose. 9. Check that “RESULT: OK” appears on the MUTL.
REFERENCE
Molybdenum 20 25 120 10. Expose the IP under the following conditions.
3. Start the MUTL. X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value
Molybdenum 20 25 120
4. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Shading Correction (HR)”.
5. [SET] after the exposure. Use the “Sensitivity” menu in the “QC/TEST”.
6. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity.
13. Confirm the S value.

{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-167
[5-5-3] Shading Speed Correction (HR Speed) 7. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
The polygon correction data of HR is generated. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Use this command when only shading speed correction is to be carried out.
Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Sensitivity Correction” is also to be
carried out together.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use an IP of 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with
other sizes.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
2. Expose the IP under the following conditions.  Exiting Procedures

X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value 1. Exit the MUTL.
3. Start the MUTL.
4. Click on “HR Speed”.

014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-168
[5-5-4] Shading Speed Correction (ST(GR)) 7. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
The polygon correction data of ST(GR) is generated. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Use this command when only shading speed correction is to be carried out.
Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Sensitivity Correction” is also to be
carried out together.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
2. Expose the IP under the following conditions.  Exiting Procedures

X-ray tube Dose (mR) Tube voltage Center S value 1. Exit the MUTL.
Tungsten 1 80 200
3. Start the MUTL.
4. Click on “ST (GR)”.

014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-169
[5-5-5] Sensitivity Correction (ST) 8. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
Sensitivity correction of the IP is carried out. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Use this command when only sensitivity correction is to be carried out.
Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Shading Speed Correction” is also
to be carried out together.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
REFERENCE
“Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. REFERENCE
Tungsten 1 80 200
Tungsten 1 80 200
4. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Sensitivity Correction (ST)”. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity.
5. [SET] 13. Confirm the S value.
6. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
7. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. 14. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-170
[5-5-6] Sensitivity Correction (HR) 8. Read the IP prepared in the procedure 2 for a time interval of 10 to 11 minutes
Sensitivity correction of the IP is carried out. If an image as shown below appears after the reading, it is not an error.
Use this command when only sensitivity correction is to be carried out.
Use the “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” command when “Shading Speed Correction” is also
to be carried out together.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use an IP of 24 cm x 30 cm or 18 cm x 24 cm. Correction cannot take place normally with
other sizes.
FRRB404018.ai
 Procedures
REFERENCE
“Sensitivity Correction” takes place in the procedures from 1 to 9. REFERENCE
4. Input the X-ray dose measured in the procedure 1 in “Sensitivity Correction (HR)”. 12. Check that the image has no unusual nonuniformity.
5. [SET] 13. Confirm the S value.
6. The confirmation window appears, and click on [OK]. {IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
7. Cancel the RU maintenance mode. 14. Back up “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA”.
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
MU-171
[5-5-7] Special Sensitivity Correction n Procedures: Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR When Tungsten
X-Ray Tube Is Used
n Function CAUTIONS
Sensitivity correction is performed for the IP type HR depending on the type of the X-ray tube When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be done.
to be used at the user’s site. Perform shading correction before special sensitivity correction.
u INSTRUCTION u {MC:7.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)}
X-ray dose required for exposure differs depending on the X-ray tube. Make exposure The shading data is default-set when the machine is under such conditions:
according to the following conditions. - The machine-specific data has not been restored after replacement of the
Tungsten X-ray tube: About 3.6 mR CPU63A board;
Molybdenum X-ray tube: About 20 mR - The RU application has been initialized according to the restoring procedures of
the RU application.
REFERENCES
- The X-ray tube selection menu is recognized as follows: u INSTRUCTION u
AUTO SELECT: The IP type HR is automatically recognized as one irradiated by the Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose.
molybdenum X-ray tube for correction.
TUNGSTEN FIX: Correction is performed by the X-ray tube (tungsten) with the IP type u NOTE u
HR specified.
Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an
- The S value is indicated as follows depending on the irradiation output. X-ray exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot
<When a molybdenum X-ray tube is used> be properly made.
For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For 20 mR: The S value is 120. REFERENCE
For 200 mR: The S value is 12. Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make sensitivity correction.
<When a tungsten X-ray tube is used>
For 0.36 mR: The S value is 1200. 1. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
For 3.6 mR: The S value is 120.
For 36 mR: The S value is 12.
2. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to
about 3.6 mR of radiation.
3. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-172
4. Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 3.4 mR), and then prepare for 6. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel.
correction. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility}
REFERENCE 7. Read the IP obtained in step 2 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
When the measured X-ray dose is 3.4 mR, enter the value 3.4. minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and
When the measured X-ray dose is 3.0 mR, enter the value 3. "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"9. Image/Conveyance Checks."
REFERENCE
Steps 9 to 13 are performed for sensitivity correction verification.
9. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
10. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR IP to
about 3.6 mR of radiation.
11. Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and
"SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
5. Click on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-173
12. Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value. n Procedures: Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR When
REFERENCE
Molybdenum X-Ray Tube Is Used
The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below:
0.36 mR: The S value is 1200. CAUTIONS
3.6 mR: The S value is 120. When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be done.
36 mR: The S value is 12. Perform shading correction before special sensitivity correction.
For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "10. Confirming the S Value." {MC:7.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction (HR)}
The shading data is default-set when the machine is under such conditions:
- The machine-specific data has not been restored after replacement of the
13. Back up the corrected data. CPU63A board;
{MU:4.15_BACKUP} - The RU application has been initialized according to the restoring procedures of
the RU application.
14. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUT} u INSTRUCTION u
15. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again. Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose.
u NOTE u
Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an
X-ray exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot
be properly made.
REFERENCE
Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make sensitivity correction.
2. With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR

IP to about 20 mR of radiation.
3. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-174
4. Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 18.1 mR), and then prepare for 6. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel.
correction. {MU:3.10_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility}
REFERENCE 7. Read the IP obtained in step 2 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
When the measured X-ray dose is 18.1 mR, enter the value 18.1. minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" and
When the measured X-ray dose is 20.0 mR, enter the value 20. "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
REFERENCE
Steps 9 to 13 are performed for sensitivity correction verification.
10. With a molybdenum X-ray tube, expose a 18 cm x 24 cm HR or 24 cm x 30 cm HR
IP to about 20 mR of radiation.
11. Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
"SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
5. Click on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-175
12. Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value.
REFERENCE
The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below:
2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "10. Confirming the S Value."
13. Back up the corrected data.

{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
14. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUT}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-176
[5-5-8] Sensitivity S-Value Correction n Procedures
Procedures for correcting the indication of 195 to 200 are described as an example.
n Function 1. Start the MUTL.
Correct the S value indicated on the film. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
For example, if the S value is indicated as 195 on the film when the IP exposed at 1 mR is 2. Select [Correction].
read, then correction is performed to indicate the S value as 200.
3. Select [Sensitivity S-Value Correction].
4. Enter the existing S-value and expected S-value.
CAUTION
S value correction is applied to the IP type (ST or HR) read by the RU immediately
before the command is executed.
- When the S value correction is to be performed for the IP type ST, do not read the IP 5. Back up the adjusted data.
type HR from the time when the S value indicated on the film is checked to the time {MU:4.15_BACKUP}
when the command for “S value correction” is performed.
- When the S value correction is to be performed for the IP type HR, do not read the IP
6. Exit the MUTL.
type ST from the time when the S value indicated on the film is checked to the time 7. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again.
when the command for “S value correction” is performed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-177
[5-6] Trouble Shooting [5-7] HV ON/OFF
[5-6-1] Shading Correction n Function

Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch).
The setting changed becomes effective immediately; however, the result updated does not
n Function appear immediately on the operation panel of the RU.
For troubleshooting, set to determine whether to generate image output by use of the
shading correction data or without use of the shading correction data. CAUTION
- ON: Generate image output by using the shading correction data.
- OFF: Generate image output without using the shading correction data. Check to make sure that the cover plate has been put on to shield the inside of the
housing against light, before turning ON the HV switch. If the HV switch is turned ON
CAUTION without the inside of the housing shielded against light, the photomultiplier may get
damaged.
Normally, be sure to set it to "ON".
If "OFF" setting is used, the resulting image suffers unusual nonuniformity.
REFERENCES
REFERENCE - This can be set only when the HV switch on the CPU board of the RU is ON.
- The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON.
The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON, or
when IP reading operation is performed once or more.
n Procedures
n Procedures The procedures of setting the HV switch to OFF are described as an example.
Procedures for setting the shading correction to OFF are described as an example. 1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL. 2. Click on [HV ON/OFF], and select [OFF].
2. Click on [Trouble Shooting].
3. Exit the MUTL after the maintenance is completed.
3. Click on [Shading correction], and select [OFF]. 4. Turn OFF the RU power, and then turn it ON again.
4. Exit the MUTL.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-178
[5-8] S Value [5-8-2] S value calculate
[5-8-1] S value now n Function

Performs calculations on the X-ray dose to determine the S value that corresponds to the
X-ray dose.
n Function
Displays the initial S value and current S value. n Procedures
Allows you to confirm S value changes.
1. Start the MUTL.
After the S value changes are confirmed, perform the S value verification procedure as
needed. 2. Select [S Value].
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Select [S Value].
3. Enter the X-ray dose value and then click [Set].
REFERENCE
If the X-ray dose value is set to 1, the following message appears in the MUTL window.
3. Select [S value now].
4. Exit the MUTL.

4. Verify the result displayed in the MUTL window.
5. Verify the current S value. Perform the S value verification procedure as needed.
6. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-179
[5-8-3] PMT/LightGuide change > LED Initialize
Initializes the LED data after light-collecting unit replacement to set the initial value for S
value error detection.
 Procedures
1. [PMT/LightGuide change] > [LED initialize]
→ The confirmation window appears.
2. [OK]
3. Verify that the MUTL message field reads "THE FLASH MEMORY WAS UPDATED."
4. Exit the MUTL.
5. Back up "SCN ALL DATA".
1. Exit the MUTL.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-180
[6] For Design
Commands for design
Not used for servicing.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-181
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-182
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
MU-183
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
05.31.2013 01 New release（FM6150） All pages
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 3, 11, 18, 20-22, 27, 28, 34, 36,
40, 41
Service Parts List (SP)

01.31.2014 FM8222
SP-1
How to Use ● Fault RANK characters (which

provide reference for determining the
■ PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
■ REFER TO
The "REFER TO" column shows reference
Service Parts List recom-mended stock quantity) unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
the rightmost position of the code number
sections concerning the part.Clicking
All parts are assigned with one of the reference section in the "REFER
has the following meaning. TO" column jumps to the top page of
characters A through E.
■ RANK Character Significance the reference section where the related
○ For hardware
Consumable parts or parts The alphabet denotes the version number information is in.
● Handling RANK characters (parts A that will be replaced at short of a part. If parts have different version
that are handled in a special intervals. ■ Quantities of recommended spare
numbers, they are upward-compatible.
manner during parts operation, Parts that may become faulty
○ For software parts
such as management) B accidentally and have a
The alphabet denotes a difference in the It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
relatively high failure rate.
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that have a sufficiently long
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix in stock a certain quantity of parts according
R Must be returned. Repairable C MTBF, but are expected to have are not compatible with each other. Version to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
Must be returned. a relatively high failure rate. number is omitted in the list. parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Q (We use for Not repairable Parts that have a sufficiently parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
analysis.) D long MTBF, but are expected to ■ PART NAME the stock quantity of service parts depending
become faulty. PART NAME represents a general name of
Must Not be on the number of working units (N).
returned. Parts that are necessary for fault a part. Quantity used in a single system : Q
(Consumable analysis, or parts that may be
E needed in case of unexpected ■ QTY. ○N=1
T part. Not Not repairable
accidents such as man-induced ○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used Rank A ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.3
applicable to
free-of-charge damage. in each unit. Rank C ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.05
warranty.) Rank D ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.02
<The RANK guide> ○ A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S
without Must Not be The Fault RANK characters, Handling represents a small part that is shipped in ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. RANK characters, and Export regulation- packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered Rank A ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
applicable character are assigned in that in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces Rank C ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
● Export regulation-applicable order. of that part is supplied.) Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
character(Parts with the following Thus, at least one character or up to three
■ REMARKS ○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
character are controlled by Export characters are assigned in the RANK
Rank A ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
The REMARKS column indicates a unique
regulation.) column.
Rank C ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
name of a part or relevant information of
Character Significance ■ REF.NO. each part. Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
Parts applicable to export
＋
regulations.
REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the ■ SERIAL NUMBER ■ Precautions to be Observed When
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts The units may contain different parts Returning Parts for Repair
having different functions, they are clearly depending on their shipment control number.
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL When returning a component for repair,
SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment
NUMBER columns. pack it in the same manner as for the
control number to which the relevant parts
supplied substitute, using the substitute
are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER
packing materials.
column is blank, the parts are applicable to
The use of different packing materials or
all the relevant units. The shipment control
packing methods may incur damage to
number is represented by lower five digits
packed component during transit.
of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
indication label.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6149
CR-IR 359 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 11
● カバー ● 回路図
COVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
INDEX 02 INDEX 12
● フレーム ● 部品番号検索表
FLAME PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
INDEX 03 INDEX 13
● カセッテセット部 ● 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
CASSETTE SET UNIT List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
INDEX 04
● 消去部
ERASURE UNIT
INDEX 05
● 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
INDEX 06
● 集光部
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT
INDEX 07
● 副走査部
SUB SCANNING UNIT
INDEX 08
● 制御部
CONTROLLER
INDEX 09
● オプション
OPTION
INDEX 10
● ケーブル
CABLE
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-3
01A カバー 1
COVER 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1.1 350Y102657 カバー Cover 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
E 1.2 350Y102693 カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 1.3 350Y102694 カバー Cover 1 For USA
E 1.4 350Y102695 カバー Cover 1 For USA(FMSU)
E 2 405N102614 銘板 Label 1
E 3 345N100604B 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1
E 4.1 350Y102600A カバー Cover 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
E 4.2 350Y102600A カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 4.3 350Y102600A カバー Cover 1 For USA
E 4.4 350Y102697A カバー Cover 1 For USA(FMSU)
A 5 376N0240B メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 1
D 6.1 345N1742G ルーバー Louver 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
D 6.2 345N1742G ルーバー Louver 1
Japan
D 6.3 345N1742G ルーバー Louver 1 For USA
D 6.4 345N1884C ルーバー Louver 1 For USA(FMSU)
D 7 376N0241B メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 1
D 8.1 345N1743D ルーバー Louver 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
D 8.2 345N1743D ルーバー Louver 1
Japan
D 8.3 345N1743D ルーバー Louver 1 For USA
D 8.4 345N1885A ルーバー Louver 1 For USA(FMSU)
9 ***
E 10 350N2974H カバー Cover 1
D 11 386N1375 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1
A 13 138S0218 メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-4
01B カバー 2
COVER 2
Except for USA,
E 1.2 350Y102658A カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 1.3 350Y102658A カバー Cover 1 For USA
E 2 405N102614 銘板 Label 1
E 3 345N101356D 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1
Except for USA,
E 4.2 350Y2082 カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 4.4 350Y2083A カバー Cover 1 For USA(FMSU)
E 5.1 350N3235C カバー Cover 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
E 5.2 350N3235C カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 5.3 350N3235C カバー Cover 1 For USA
E 5.4 350N3310B カバー Cover 1 For USA(FMSU)
E 6 405N101258 銘板 Label 1
Except for USA,
E 7.2 350Y102723 カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 8 345N100602E 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1
E 9 405N102614 銘板 Label 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-5
02 フレーム
FRAME
D 1 305S1110008 六角ナット Hexagon nut 4
D 2 367S2084 脚 Adjuster Assembly 4
D 3 367S1109A キャスタ Caster 4
D 4 387N100022A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2
D 5 146N0016B ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SG1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-6
03A カセッテセット部 1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 1
D 1 327N6101401E ラック Guide 4
D 2 327N1101607B 平歯車 Spur Gear 4
D 3 322N1036B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8
E 4 356Y0407A ブラケット Bracket 2
D 5 322SY097 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4
E 6 319N102763 軸 Shaft 1
E 7 356Y0406B ブラケット Bracket 2
E 8 319N102762 軸 Shaft 1
Except for USA,
E 9.2 350Y1958A カバー Cover 1
Japan
D 12 382N100266 テープ Tape 4
E 13.1 350Y1953B カバー Cover 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
E 13.2 350Y1954B カバー Cover 1
Japan
E 15 350Y1951C カバー Cover 1
D 16 334Y100414 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4
17 ***
D 18 334N100159 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1
D 19 319N102764 軸 Shaft 1
E 20 346N1254E 補助板 Plate Support 1
E 21 353Y0073G シャーシ Chassis 1
E 22 356N10790A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 23 356N10111 ブラケット Bracket 2
D 24 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-7
03B カセッテセット部 2
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2
E 1 341N100234 アーム Arm 1
E 2 341N100277 アーム Arm 1
E 3 341N100278A アーム Arm 1
E 4 341N100231A アーム Arm 1
D 5 329N100049 カム Cam 1
D 6 327N100290 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 10 327N100294A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
E 11 341N0937B アーム Arm 1
D 12 322N100228 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
D 13 322SB058 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
D 14 322N100221A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
E 15 319N101344 軸 Shaft 1
D 16 118SX301 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MA3
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-8
03C カセッテセット部 3
CASSETTE SET UNIT 3
D 1 388N100439 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 1
E 2 356N108546A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 3 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA7
E 4 341N100232A アーム Arm 1
D 5 329N100039 カム Cum 1
E 6 341N100234 アーム Arm 1
E 7 341N100277 アーム Arm 1
E 8 341N100278A アーム Arm 1
Compression Coil
D 10 388N100532 圧縮コイルバネ 1
Spring
E 11 341N100279 アーム Arm 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-9
03D カセッテセット部 4
CASSETTE SET UNIT 4
D 4 322SB058 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
D 5 322N100228 軸受 Bearing 1
E 6 341N0937B アーム Arm 1
D 9 327N100247 歯車 Gear 1
E 13 310S7002016 平行ピン Straight Pin 1
D 14 118Y100091A モータ Motor 1 MA2
D 17 322N100221A ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-10
03E カセッテセット部 5
CASSETTE SET UNIT 5
D 1 388N100533 ばね Spring 2
E 2 342N100050A レバー Lever 2
D 3 363N100699 ガイド Guide 4
D 4 387N100023 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4
D 5 362N100297 受 Stopper 2
E 6 350N101280 カバー Cover 2
D 7 388N100536 ばね Spring 2
D 8 362N100751 受 Holder 2
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-11
03F カセッテセット部 6
CASSETTE SET UNIT 6
D 1 372S0049A 管継手 Joint 2
D 3 370N100717A ホース Hose 1
D 4 372N100063 管継手 Joint 4
D 5 370N100717A ホース Hose 2
D 6 372S0609 管継手 Joint 1
D 7 370N100718B ホース Hose 1
D 8 370N100719A ホース Hose 8
A 9 133Y100043 電動ポンプ Pump 1 PA1
D 10 134N100027A 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 1 SVA1
11 ***
12 ***
D 13 392N0009A 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2
E 14 315N0011 止め輪 KL Clip 2
D 15 370N100063A ホース Hose 1
E 17 356N103609 ブラケット Bracker 1
D 18 370N100063A ホース Hose 1
E 19 341Y0341 アーム Arm 1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-12
03G カセッテセット部 7
CASSETTE SET UNIT 7
D 1 322SB040 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1
E 5 319N101169 軸 Shaft 1
E 7 341N100235C アーム Arm 1
D 8 388N100537 ばね Spring 1
D 9 322N100232 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2
D 10 334N100193 ローラ Roller 2
D 11 334N100192 ローラ Roller 2
D 12 334N100072D 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2
D 13 338N100018 リング Ring 1
D 14 388N100538 ばね Spring 1
E 15 341N100275 アーム Arm 1
D 16 334Y100378A ローラ Roller 1
D 17 334N100191 ローラ Roller 7
E 18 319N101180A 軸 Shaft 1
D 19 322SF268 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-13
03H カセッテセット部 8
CASSETTE SET UNIT 8
D 2 329N100048 カム Cum 4
E 4 319N101179 軸 Shaft 1
D 6 362N100299 受 Stopper 2
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-14
03I カセッテセット部 9
CASSETTE SET UNIT 9
E 1 356Y102073 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 2 334N3677 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 5
D 5 388N100539 ばね Spring 1
D 6 388N100540 ばね Spring 1
D 8 334N100381A ローラ Roller 1
D 9 334N100380A ローラ Roller 1
D 10 327N100243 歯車 Gear 1
D 12 318N100087 ブッシュ Bushing 2
D 14 360N100536A ハウジング Housing 4
D 15 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4
D 17 388N100439 ばね Spring 2
D 18 363N101378A ガイド Guide 2
E 19 319N102771 軸 Shaft 2
D 23 322N100385 軸受 Bearing 1
D 24 322N100385 軸受 Bearing 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-15
03J カセッテセット部 10
CASSETTE SET UNIT 10
E 1 341N100323A アーム Arm 1
D 2 334N2392 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1
E 3 341N100324 アーム Arm 1
D 4 388N100546 ばね Spring 1
D 6 328N100017 爪 Ratchet 1
D 7 362N100337 受 Guide 1
D 10 322N100199 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
D 13 363N101284A ガイド Guide 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-16
03K カセッテセット部 11
E 1 310Y100005B ピン Pin 1
2 ***
E 4 341N100643A アーム Arm 1
6 ***
D 7 363N2505B ガイド Guide 1
8 ***
D 10 388N100545 ばね Spring 1
D 11 322N100230 軸受 Bearing 4
D 12 388N100173C ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1
E 13 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1
E 14 341N100068F アーム Arm 1
E 16 319N101175B 軸 Shaft 1
E 17 319N102468 軸 Shaft 1
E 18 357N101030 台 Base 1
D 19 322N100044A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
E 22 353N100163A シャーシ Chassis 1
E 23 319N102469 軸 Shaft 2
D 24 338N100026B リング Ring 1
Compression Coil
D 25 388N100154 圧縮コイルばね 1
Spring
D 26 363N100240D 受 Guide 1
D 27 332N100350A ストッパ Stopper 1
E 29 357N100097C 台 Base 1
D 30 365N100009D レール Rail 1
E 31 319N101198A 軸 Shaft 1
D 33 363N101408 ガイド Guide 1
E 34 315S3360040 Ｅ形止め輪 E-Ring 2
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-17
03L カセッテセット部 12
D 2 107Y0179A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLA1
E 3 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2
E 4 319N101284A 軸 Shaft 1
D 5 388N100439 ばね Spring 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-18
03M カセッテセット部 13
D 1 362N100294B 受 Guide Plate 1
D 5 362N100240A 受 Guide 1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-19
04A 消去部 1
ERASURE UNIT 1
A 1 334Y5010G ブラシローラ Brush Roller 1
E 2 350N101279 蓋 Cover 2
E 5 362N100293B 受 Box 1
A 6 334N100195C ブラシローラ Brush Roller 2
D 7 332N0620 ストッパ Stopper 1
D 9 322SF267 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1
D 10 840Y100299 消去部 Eraser Unit 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-20
04B 消去部 2
ERASURE UNIT 2
D 1 840Y100300 消去部 Erasure Unit 1
D 2 407Y100009 反射板 Reflective Plate 1
A 3 603Y100094A フィルタ Filter 1
D 4 360Y100395 ランプアセンブリ Lamp Assembly 1
D 5 327N100288 平歯車 Supr Gear 1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-21
05
05 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
D 1 839Y100052 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-22
06
06 集光部
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 1 113Y100317G 1
(PMT27A) (PMT27A)
D 2 606Y120002 集光ガイド Light-Collecting Guide 1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-23
07A 副走査部 1
SUB SCANNING UNIT 1
D 1 334N100162C ローラ Roller 3
D 2 386N1358 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 3 387N100024D 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-24
07B 副走査部 2
SUB SCANNING UNIT 2
D 8 323N100076A ベルト Belt 1
D 9 337N0071B ホイール Flywheel 1
D 10 356N108212B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 11 118Y100162 モータ Motor 1 MZ1
D 12 388N101004 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1
D 14 334N100423 ローラ Roller 1
D 15 341Y100354B ブラケット Bracket 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-25
07C 副走査部 3
SUB SCANNING UNIT 3
D 1 113Y100409 1 SZ1
（SED27A） (SED27A)
D 4 388N100527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L = 47mm
D 8 309S0166 波座金 Special Washer 1
D 9 337N0070A ホイール Flywheel 2
D 10 323N1266 ベルト Belt 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-26
07D 副走査部 4
SUB SCANNING UNIT 4
D 1 602Y100002 ミラー Mirror 1
D 2 387N100002A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 7 363N100689 ガイド Guide 1
D 9 334Y100415 ローラ Center Roller Assy 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-27
07E 副走査部 5
SUB SCANNING UNIT 5
D 5 309S0166 波座金 Special Washer 1
D 8 387N100021B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4
副走査ニップ Subscanning Grip
D 9 831Y100050 1
アセンブリ Assembly
D 11 118Y100110A ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MZ2
D 12 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SZ2
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-28
07F 副走査部 6
SUB SCANNING UNIT 6
D 5 318N100087 ブッシュ Bush 4
6 ***
D 7 360N100531B ハウジング Housing 2
D 8 363N101378A ガイド Guide 3
E 9 319N102474A 軸 Shaft 3
Compression Coil
D 10 388N101008 圧縮コイルバネ 3
Spring
D 12 852Y100078B 読取り部 Bar Code Reader 1 BCRC1
D 14 356N108647A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 15 118SX210 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC1
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-29
07G 副走査部 7
SUB SCANNING UNIT 7
D 1 318N100087 ブッシュ Bush 2
6 ***
D 8 363N101378A ガイド Guide 3
D 9 319N102474A 軸 Shaft 3
Compression Coil
D 10 388N101008 圧縮コイルバネ 3
Spring
D 11 146N100002 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC9
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-30
07H 副走査部 8
SUB SCANNING UNIT 8
D 1 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC1
D 3 327N100626B 歯車 Gear 1
D 5 327N100601A 歯車 Gear 1
D 6 118Y100110A ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC2
D 7 388N101005 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1
D 9 327N100619A 歯車 Gear 3
D 10 327N100625A 歯車 Gear 1
D 11 341Y100348A アーム Arm 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-31
07I 副走査部 9
SUB SCANNING UNIT 9
D 1 388N100531A 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 1
D 4 319N102772 軸 Collar 3
Rubber Roller
D 6 334N100388 ゴムローラ 1
Assembly
Rubber Roller
D 7 334N100387 ゴムローラ 1
Assembly
D 9 388N100530A 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-32
07J 副走査部 10
SUB SCANNING UNIT 10
D 1 334Y100152 ローラ Rubber Roller 3
Rubber Roller
D 2 334N3619 ゴムローラ 3
Assembly
D 4 146N0016B ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC3
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-33
07K 副走査部 11
SUB SCANNING UNIT 11
D 1 322N100221A ころがり軸受 Bearing 2
D 2 341N100625 アーム Arm 2
D 3 310S7002016 平行ピン Straight Pin 2
D 4 319N102616A 軸 Shaft 1
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-34
08
08 制御部
CONTROLLER
C 1 113Y100319C 1
(SND27A) (SND27A)
C 2 113Y101016B 1
(PIF63A) (PIF63A)
Power Supply (Alpha
C 3 125Y100119 電源 (Alpha II) 1
II)
D 4 128N100091 ブレーカ Breaker 1
D 5 120N100024 ソケット Socket 1
C 6 113Y101017A 1
(CPU63A) (CPU63A)
D 7 350N103065 カバー Cover 1
48V/1A for
CPU63A
A 8 137S1417 ヒューズ FUSE 4 F7, F19 , for
SND27A F8, for
PIF63A F1
48V/1.6A for
CPU63A F13,
A 9 137S1419 ヒューズ FUSE 3
F20, for PIF63A
F4
48V/2A for
A 10 137S1420 ヒューズ FUSE 2 SND27A F9,
F10
48V/3.2A for
PIF63A F3, F7
48V/5A for
PIF63A F2, F6
250V/8A for
PIF63A F8
A 14.1 845Y100162 操作パネル Panel 1 For Japan
Except for USA,
A 14.2 845Y100162 操作パネル Panel 1
Japan
A 14.3 845Y100168 操作パネル Panel 1 For USA
A 14.4 845Y100169 操作パネル Panel 1 For USA(FMSU)
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-35
09
09 オプション
OPTION
■ 転倒防止金具キット／ Anti-topple retainer kit E 1 356Y0475 ブラケット（前面用） Bracket 1 －
E 2 356Y0502 ブラケット（背面用） Bracket 1 －
E 3 356Y0499 ブラケット（左側面用） Bracket 1 －
E 4 356Y0498 ブラケット（右側面用） Bracket 1 －
E 5 347N2108 スペーサ（1mm） Spacer 6 －
E 6 347N2109 スペーサ（2mm） Spacer 4 －
E 7 317S1064 キャップ Cap 2 －
Hexagon head socket
E 8 304S1000820 六角ボルト（8x20） 2 －
Bolt
E 9 309S0220008 バネ座金（SW8） Spring washer 6 －
E 10 309S0110008 平座金（W8） Plain washer 6 －
六角穴付ボタンボルト
E 11 304S5000820 Bolt 4 －
（8x20）
E 12 305N100033 アンカーナット（Na8） Anchor nut 4 －
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-36
10
10 ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y101851B ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 2 136Y101881B ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 3 136Y102103 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 4 136Y104566A ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
5 ***
E 6 136Y104568B ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 7 136Y104569B ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 8 136Y104570A ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 9 136Y104572A ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 10 136Y104573B ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 11 136Y104574B ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
E 12 136Y104575B ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
E 13 136Y104576B ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
E 14 136Y104577B ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 15 136Y104578B ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
E 16 136Y104579B ケーブル Cable 1 3/3
E 17 136Y104581A ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 18 136Y104583A ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 19 136Y104588 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 20 136Y104589 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 21 136Y8545 ケーブル Cable 1 1/3
E 22 136Y8890 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
E 23 136Y8891 ケーブル Cable 1 2/3
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-37
11
11 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A ACｲﾝﾚｯﾄ 136Y104567 PIF2 PIF2 PIF3 PIF3 136Y104568 CPU1 CPU1 A
L
L
136Y101851
UL1015-AWG16黒 LINE_L LOAD_L
136Y104566
UL1015-AWG16黒 L1 SLOT1/2
SLOT1/2
1
FV2-4
UL1015-AWG14橙 1
2
+24V
GND
POWER ON
GND
1
2
UL1007-AWG22橙
UL1007-AWG22橙
1
2
POWER ON
GND
CPU63A
1 2 SLOT1/2_ UL1015-AWG14黒 UL1007-AWG22橙
SPS-61T-250 1 +12V(AUX) 3 3 VH_AUX 113Y101017
電源ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250 FV2-4 UL1007-AWG22橙
DS-250PU DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) GND GND
NFB
4 4
N N UL1015-AWG16白
DS-250PU DS-250PU DS-250PU
DF22A-1416SCF +5V
UL1007-AWG22橙
VCC
SPS-61T-250 LINE_N LOAD_N UL1015-AWG16白 N1 GND
5
6
UL1007-AWG22橙
5
6 GND
1/2
PIF1 PIF1 UL1007-AWG22橙
AC/DC電源
1 2
DS-250PU +24V 7 7 VCC_24PS
E E UL1015-AWG16緑/黄
SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250 SPS-61T-250 1 POWER ON GND 8
UL1007-AWG22橙 8 GND_P
DS-250PU DS-250PU DS-250PU
［国内］（患者環境外）　136N0416 SPS-61T-250 AlphaⅡ-450P 2 +12V(AUX)
DS-250PU UL1015-AWG16緑/黄 G1 /TDK GND DF5A-8DP-5DSA(05) DF5A-8DS-5C DF5A-8DS-5C DF5A-8DP-5DSA(05)
［国内］（患者環境内）　136N0417
3
4 +5V DF5-1822SC DF5-1822SC

136N0427 SPS-61T-250 SLOT4-CH1
［米国］ 5 GND
DS-250PU UL1007-AWG22赤 PIF4 PIF4 CPU18 CPU18
［英国］ 136N0450 SLOT4-CH1
1
UL1007-AWG22黒
6 +15V
UL1007-AWG22橙
B 2 7 GND +15V 1 1 +15ASIN B
136N0377 UL1007-AWG22橙
［欧州］ 8 GND GND 2 2 GND_A
UL1007-AWG22橙
136N0418 PS-250-2B 9 -15V -15V 3 3 -15ASIN
［中国］ UL1007-AWG22橙
FG_ FG1 SPS-21T-250 10 NC GND 4 4 GND_A
1
SLOT4-CH2
DF5A-10DS-5C DF5A-10DP DF5A-4P DF5A-4S-5C DF5A-4DS-5C DF5A-4DP-5DSA(05)
UL1007-AWG22黒 -5DSA(05) -5DSA(05)
1 DF5-1822SC DF5-1822SC DF5-1822SC
CAN TX
CAN RX
SLOT4-CH2 UL1007-AWG22青
FV2-4 2
136Y8545 FV2-4
FG FGa
UL1617-AWG14緑/黄 PS-250-2B
1 1
CPU3 DF1EC-2P-2.5DSA(01)
SPS-21T-250
FV2-5A FV2-5
SLOT5-CH1 PIF63A CPU3 DF1E-2S-2.5C
DF1B-2428SCA
2
UL1007-AWG18赤
113Y101016
UL1007-AWG28赤
UL1007-AWG28黒
1
SLOT5-CH1 2
C C
PS-250-2B 136Y104581
SPS-21T-250
SLOT5-CH2
2
DF1E-2S-2.5C
UL1007-AWG18黒
1 SND14 DF1B-2428SCA
SLOT5-CH2 2
SND14 DF1EC-2P-2.5DSA(01)
PS-250-2B PIF5 PIF5 136Y104569 SND2 SND2
SPS-21T-250 UL1007-AWG22橙
+5V VCC
SND27A
1 1
UL1007-AWG22橙
AUX 2 2 GND
UL1007-AWG18橙
+24V 3 3 +24V
1 UL1007-AWG18橙 113Y100319
2
4 4 GND
UL1007-AWG22黒 GND
D 3
UL1007-AWG22橙 DF5A-4DP-5DSA(05)
DF5A-4DS-5C
DF5A-4DS-5C DF1B-4DP-5DSA(05)
1/2 D
4 DF5-1822SC
5
GND DF5-1822SC
UL1007-AWG22灰
5268-06A 6
SND8
5264-06
PIF6
5263PBTL
FAN_ON/OFF
GND
DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA(01)
DF1B-6P-2.5DSA(01)
E
消去部消去ﾕﾆｯﾄ内ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ
PIF8
E
136Y104583
FAN_+24V
UL1007-AWG22灰 1 FAN_ON/OFF
UL1007-AWG22灰 FAN_+24V
2 a CE1
GND
UL1007-AWG22灰 3 FAN_+24V
GND
UL1007-AWG22灰 1
DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA(01)
UL1007-AWG22灰 2 b CE1
PIF9
UL1007-AWG22灰 3
CN1 ERS1-CN1 PSU-CN3 PSU-CN3S 136Y104570 PIF7 PIF7

F UL1007-AWG22灰1 UL1007-AWG18橙 F
1 1 1 +24V
UL1007-AWG22灰4 UL1007-AWG18橙
2 4 2 +24V
〈1〉ERS37A 3
4
UL1007-AWG22灰2
UL1007-AWG22灰5
2
5
UL1007-AWG18橙
UL1007-AWG18橙
3
4
+5V
GND
DF1B-2P-2.5DSA(01)
UL1007-AWG22灰3 UL1007-AWG18橙 PIF10

113N101030 5 3 5 GND
UL1007-AWG22灰6 UL1007-AWG18橙
6 6 6 GND
XHP-6 5559-06P 5557-06R DF5A-6DS-5C DF5A-6DP-5DSA(05)

SXH-001T-P0.6 5558PBTL 5556PBTL DF5-1822SC
DF1B-3P-2.5DSA(01)
CN1 ERS2-CN1 CNB61
1
UL1007-AWG22灰1
2
UL1007-AWG22灰2
G
〈2〉ERS37A 3
4
UL1007-AWG22灰3
UL1007-AWG22灰4 →CNB61-P
G
113N101030 5 5 SND4/5/6
6 6
流用
136Y108921
XHP-6 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC
TBC3.5SQ(0.12)
SXH-001T-P0.6 DF1B-2022SCA 1 1
FN5.5-4 FN5.5-4
H H
＜注意事項＞機種 5039 ユニット -
-
名称回路図補助名称 XLⅡ-α
対応コード - コード Z22N5039000 Rev. 　
設計日設計者製図者検図者承認者
頁
2013.04.18 萩原新保木村五十嵐（主）
富士フイルム株式会社 1 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-38
11
11 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
光学部 LDD5 LDD5

136Y104589
A
(1/2)
CPU15 CPU15
LAN 260mm
UL1007-AWG28黒 136Y104588
LDD27A V5_D
1 1
UL1007-AWG28赤 LAN
2 2 GND ｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ
A UL1007-AWG28黒 A
3 3 V5_D
UL1007-AWG28赤
PD PD-CN1 136Y101881 LDD-CN7 LDD7 113Y100312 4
UL1007-AWG28灰
4 GND
UL1061-AWG26黒 5 5 LDONH CPU5 CPU5 136Y104589 (2/2)
104Y100007 2 1 UL1007-AWG28灰
6 6 LDONL
1 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
A
UL1061-AWG26白 7 7 LDOKH BCR
UL1007-AWG28灰 VCC
BCRC1
3 2
8 8 LDOKL UL1061-AWG26灰
DSLD-508P-2-FSH 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 3 1 1 CTS
LD-CN1 9 9 LDIFH UL1061-AWG26黒
5 UL1007-AWG28灰 4 2 2 SG
UL1061-AWG26黒 10 10 LDIFL TXD UL1061-AWG26赤
UL1007-AWG28灰 VCC(+5)
LD
3 6 5 3 3
UL1061-AWG26白 11 11 VREF_DA UL1061-AWG26灰ﾊﾞｰｺｰﾄﾞﾘｰﾀﾞ
2 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 RXD 6 4 4 TXD
UL1061-AWG26灰 12 12 GND UL1061-AWG26灰 BCR5342H-FFF
1 8 UL1007-AWG28灰 7 5 5 RTS
124Y10022 13
UL1007-AWG28灰
13 V5_D
GND 8
UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 RXD /NECｲﾝﾌﾛﾝﾃｨｱ
14 14 LD_IDLEL
DSLD-200P-3-FSH DF13-8S-1.25C UL1007-AWG28灰 RTS 9 7 7 INZONE
15 15 LD_TMPH
DF13-2630SCFA UL1007-AWG28灰 CTS 10 8 8
16 16 A0
UL1007-AWG28灰 BUFF_ON_OFF 11 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC
B 17 17 A1 B
UL1007-AWG28灰 GND 12 DF1B-2428SCA
18 18 EN
19
CPU5-S CPU5-P
DF1B-12DP DF1B-12DS-2.5RC UL1061-AWG26灰 1 UL1061-AWG26灰
20 DF1B-18DS-2.5RC DF1B-18DP -2.5DSA(01)
1
-2.5DSA(01) DF1B-2428SCA UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰

DF1B-2428SCA 2
UL1061-AWG26灰 3 UL1061-AWG26灰
DF1B-20DS-2.5RC 3
DF1B-2428SCA XAP-03V-1 XARR-03V

CPU9 CPU9
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
PNL1 PNL1
VCC 1
136Y104573 1 VCC
集光部 PMT1
1
UL1007-AWG28灰
CPU17
1
CPU17
HVMONH
GND
VCC_AUX
2
3
UL1061-AWG26灰
2
3
GND
VCC_AUX
UL1007-AWG28灰 UL1061-AWG26灰
2 2 HVMONL GND 4 4 GND
3 3 +15VOKH KEY0 IN 5 5 KEY0
4 4 +15VOKL KEY1 IN 6 6 KEY1
C PMT27A 5
6
UL1007-AWG28灰
UL1007-AWG28灰
5
6
HVSH
HVSL
KEY2 IN
KEY3 IN
7
8
UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰
7
8
KEY2
KEY3
C
113Y100317 7 7 VCC+15AS KEY4 IN 9 9 KEY4
8 8 GND_A KEY5 IN 10 10 LED0
9 9 VCC+15AS DMGP10 11 11 LED1
10 10 GND_A PLED0 OUT 12 12 LED2
11 11 VCC+15AS PLED1 OUT 13 13 LED3
12 12 GND_A PLED2 OUT 14 14 LED4
13 13 VCC-15AS PLED3 OUT 15 15 BUZ
14 14 GND_A BZR OUT 16 16 STBY
UL1007-AWG28灰
15 15 ERSH STBY 17 17 BUFF_ON_OFF
16 16 ERSL BL_ON_OFF1 18 18 BL_ON_OFF1
17 17 LEDSIGH BL_ON_OFF2 19 19 BL_ON_OFF2
UL1007-AWG28灰
18 18 LEDSIGL GND 20 20 NC
UL1007-AWG28灰
19 19 LEDONH
D
UL1007-AWG28灰 D
20 20 LEDONL DF1B-20DP-2.5DSA(01) DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1B-20DS-2.5RC DF1B-20DP-2.5DSA(01)
UL1007-AWG28灰
21 21 VION_H DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-2428SCA
UL1007-AWG28灰
22 22 VION_L
CPU20 CPU20
PNL63A
23
24 DF1B-22DS-2.5RC DF1B-22DP-2.5DSA(01) VCC 1
25 DF1B-2428SCA EJECT_IN 2
UL1061-AWG26灰 113Y101015
26 GND 3
LLED_OUT
LCD
27 4
28
29
CPU63A GND 5
DF1B-5P-2.5DSA(01) DF1B-5S-2.5R TFT-LCDﾓﾆﾀｰ

30
113Y101017 付属品 COM35T3829GLC
31 DF1B-2428SCA 136Y104572
32 2/2 /ORTUSTECH
CPU6 CPU6 SRV-28-20PS PNL2 PNL2
33
FPC 67pin
E
34 R2 1 1 R2 E
GND 2 2 GND 3mmﾋﾟｯﾁ金ﾒｯｷ
HIF3BA-34D-2.54C R3 3 3 R3
HIF3-2428SCA GND 4 4 GND
R4 5 5 R4 FH26G-67S-0.3SHBW
GND 6 6 GND
PMT2 CPU13
PMT2 CPU13 R5 7 7 R5
UL1553-1.5D-2V
1 1 GND 8 8 GND
R6 9 9 R6
2
2
SML001 UM-QP-1.5VCR3A(40) UM-R-PC(40) GND 10 10 GND
R7 11 11 R7
GND 12 12 GND
G2 13 13 G2
GND 14 14 GND
G3 15 15 G3
F F
GND 16 16 GND
SYN23A-CN3 CNZ32 CNZ32-P CPU4 CPU4
G4 17 17 G4
SYN27A 136Y8891 POL_HR_ON GND GND

1 1 1 8 18 18
2 2 2 7 G5 19 19 G5
3 3 3 6 PIDXL GND 20 20 GND
113Y100314 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
136Y102103 4 4 4 5 GND G6 21 21 G6
5 5 5 4 PONL GND 22 22 GND
POL-CN1 SYN27A-CN2 SYN2 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
6 6 6 3 POKL G7 23 23 G7
UL1061-AWG26黒 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
GND GND GND
Polygon
1 1 7 7 7 2 24 24
UL1061-AWG26黒 UL1007-AWG24灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
2 2
SYN3 8 8 8 1 VCC_24PS B2 25 25 B2
UL1061-AWG26黒
615N100006 3 3 GND 26 26 GND
UL1061-AWG26黒 8P-SCN
4 4 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC XADRP-08V B06B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) B3 27 27 B3
UL1061-AWG26黒 SCN-001T-P1.0
5 5 DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB SXA-001T-P0.6 GND 28 28 GND
UL1061-AWG26黒
6 6
136Y8890 B4 29 29 B4
SYN23A-CN1 CNZ31 CNZ31-P CPU19 CPU19
G 7 7 GND 30 30 GND G
8 8 1 1 1 1 V5_D B5 31 31 B5
2 2 2 2 GND 32 32 GND
ZHR-8 XADRP-08V B08B-XADSS 3 3 3 3 GND B6 33 33 B6
SZH-002T-P0.5 SXA-001T-P0.6 -N(LF)(SN) 4 4 4 4 DATA_OE 34 34 DATA_OE
UL1007-AWG26茶 UL1007-AWG28灰
5 5 5 5 SSL B7 35 35 B7
SYN1 6 6 6 6 SSH GND 36 36 GND
VCLK 37 37 VCLK
6P-SCN
DF1B-6ES-2.5RC DF1B-6EP-2.5RC DF1B-6DS-2.5RC DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA(01) GND 38 38 GND
SCN-001T-P1.0
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA HSYNC 39 39 HSYNC
VSYNC 40 40 VSYNC
SED CPU14 CPU14
HIF3BA-40PA-2.54DSA(71) HIF3BA-40D-2.54C HIF3BA-40D-2.54C HIF3BA-40PA-2.54DSA(71)
UL1007-AWG28灰
SED27A SED1L HIF3-2226SCC CPU-FG PNL-FG HIF3-2226SCC
1 1
1
1
UL1007-AWG28灰
2 2 SED2L
H UL1007-AWG28灰機種 5039 ユニット -
H
3 3 V5_D
UL1007-AWG28灰
(SZ1) 4 4 GND FV1.25-M4 FV1.25-M4 名称回路図補助名称 XLⅡ-α
113Y100316 DF1E-4S-2.5C DF1E-4S-2.5C DF1EC-4P-2.5DSA(01) コード Z22N5039000 Rev. 　

DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-2428SCA 頁
富士フイルム株式会社 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-39
11
11 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SA1 136Y104574 SND6 SND6

UL1061-AWG26灰 SND9 SND9 136Y104578 M/S-P M/S-S MA1
VCC_S1 136Y104579
SA1
1 1
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青
ｶｾｯﾃIN検出 2 2 SENSOR1 MT1OUTA 1 1 1 1
146S0102 GND +24V_1
MA1
3 3 2 2 2 2
179228-3 4 VCC_S2 MT1OUTB 3 3 3 3
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青開蓋駆動ﾓｰﾀ
179518-1 5 SENSOR2 MT1OUTAB 4 4 4 4
118SX213
A UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 A
SA2 6 GND +24V_1 5 5 5 5
7 VCC_S3 MT1OUTBB 6 6 6 6
1 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青
SENSOR3
SA2 MT2OUTA
8 7 7 7
ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青
9 GND +24V_2 8 8 8 XAP-06V-1
3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青
146S0102 10 VCC_S4 MT2OUTB 9 9 9 SXA-001T-P0.6
179228-3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青 MA3
11 SENSOR4 MT2OUTAB 10 10 10
179518-1 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青
12 GND +24V_2 11 11 11 1
SA3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG24青
VCC_S5 MT2OUTBB
MA3
13 12 12 12 2
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青
SENSOR5 MT3OUTA
SA3
1 14 13 13 13 3
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ
2 15 GND +24V_3 14 14 14 4
118SX213
異物ｼｬｯﾀｰ検出 VCC_S6 MT3OUTB
146S0102 3 16 15 15 15 5
179228-3 17 SENSOR6 MT3OUTAB 16 16 16 6
179518-1 18 GND +24V_3 17 17 17 XAP-06V-1

SA10 MT3OUTBB 18 18 18 SXA-001T-P0.6
B DF1B-18DS-2.5RC DF1B-18DP-2.5DSA(01) +24V_8 19 19 19 B
SOLA1 117mm
SA10
1
DF1B-2428SCA 24VDRV2
UL1007-AWG22青
20 20 20
ｶｾｯﾃ新旧判別 2 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1430-AWG24
146S0102 3 UL1007-AWG24青
3
107Y0179A
B20B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) XADRP-20V XADR-20V
SOLA1
2
179228-3 UL1007-AWG24青ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞSOL
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6 1
179518-1
CNB61-P XADRP-20V
SA6
1
UL1061-AWG26灰 SND11 SND11 SXA-001T-P0.6 172337-1
UL1061-AWG26灰 170363-4
SA6
1
2 MT4OUTA 1
吸盤HP検出 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 SVA1
CNB61← 3 +24V_4 2
146S0102 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28青 1
4 MT4OUTB 3
134S0059
179228-3 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28青 2
179518-1 消去ﾕﾆｯﾄ内ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ 5
UL1061-AWG26灰
MT4OUTAB 4
SVA1 IPﾘｰｸ
6 +24V_4 5
SA16
DF1B-6EP-2.5RC MT4OUTBB 6 XAP-02V-1
UL1061-AWG26灰
DF1-PD2428SCB SXA-001T-P0.6
SA16 MT5OUTA
1 7
C
UL1061-AWG26灰 C
ｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ判別 2
UL1061-AWG26灰
+24V_6 8 SVA2
146S0102 3 MT5OUTB 9 UL1007-AWG28青 1
179228-3 MT5OUTAB UL1007-AWG28青 2 134S0059
SVA2
10
179518-1 +24V_5 11
吸着切替
SA7 SND5 SND5 MT5OUTBB 12
XAP-02V-1
UL1061-AWG26灰 +24V_8 13
VCC_S7 SXA-001T-P0.6
SA7
1 1
開蓋駆動 UL1061-AWG26灰 24VDRV2 14
2 2 SENSOR7 MA2/4-P MA2/4-S MA4
HP検出 UL1061-AWG26灰
GND
DCM1DRV1 15
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 1
146S0102 3 3
DCM1DRV2 16 1 1
179228-3 4 VCC_S8 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 2
MA4
17 2 2
179518-1 5 SENSOR8 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 3
SA8 6 GND
18
UL1007-AWG22青
3 3
UL1007-AWG22青 4 搬送ﾓｰﾀ
UL1061-AWG26灰 7 VCC_S9 UL1007-AWG22青
4 4
UL1007-AWG22青 5 118SX213
B18B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) XADRP-18V
SA8
1 5 5
閉蓋駆動 UL1061-AWG26灰 8 SENSOR9 UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 6
2 SXA-001T-P0.6 6 6
HP検出 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 GND UL1007-AWG22青
D 146S0102 3
10 VCC_S10 UL1007-AWG22青
7 7 XAP-06V-1 D
179228-3 8 8 SXA-001T-P0.6
SENSOR10
SND27A
11
179518-1 XADR-08V MA2 155mm
GND
MA2 閉蓋駆動ﾓｰﾀ
12
SA9 SXAM-001T-P0.6 UL1007-AWG22青 1 UL1007-AWG22赤 +
13 VCC_S11
UL1061-AWG26灰 113Y100319 XADRP-08V UL1007-AWG22青 2 UL1007-AWG22黒 - ｽﾘｰﾋﾟｰｽ
SENSOR11
SA9 118Y100083
1 14
ﾊﾟﾝﾄﾓｶｾｯﾃ判別 UL1061-AWG26灰 SXA-001T-P0.6
2 15 GND
UL1061-AWG26灰
146S0102 3 16 2/2 XAP-02V-1
179228-3 DF1B-16DS-2.5RC DF1B-16DP SXA-001T-P0.6
179518-1 DF1B-2428SCA -2.5DSA(01) SND12 SND12 PA1-P PA1-S PA1 150mm
UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG22赤
SA11 SND4 SND4 FANONOFFDRV 1 2 1 1 + IP吸着
UL1007-AWG28青 UL1007-AWG28青
UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_S12
FANHILOWDRV 2 1 2 2 UL1007-AWG22黒
- PA1
SA11
1 1
UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3
133Y100031
ｶｾｯﾃOUT検出 2 2 SENSOR12
UL1061-AWG26灰 GND 4 179228-2 179228-2
146S0102 3 3 GND
179610-1 179610-1 XARR-03V
E 179228-3 4 VCC_S13 E
179228-4 292254-2 SXAM-001T-P0.6
179518-1 5 SENSOR13
179610-1
SA12 6 GND
MC2
UL1061-AWG26灰 7 VCC_S14 C
UL1007-AWG24青
SA12
1
UL1061-AWG26灰 8 SENSOR14 1 A
閉蓋位置検出 2 UL1007-AWG24青 118SX200
UL1061-AWG26灰 9 GND 2 BCOM
146S0102 3 UL1007-AWG24青
SENSOR15 B
MC2
10 3
179228-3 UL1007-AWG24青ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除兼ﾎｺﾘ除去ﾓｰﾀ
11 FANB1_ALM 4 A/
179518-1 UL1007-AWG24青 STP-42D2046
12 GND 5 ACOM
SA4-2 13
UL1007-AWG24青 6 B/ /ｼﾅﾉｹﾝｼ
UL1061-AWG26灰
SA4-2 1
UL1061-AWG26灰
14 PHR-6
IP落下検出 2 SPH-002T-P0.5S
UL1061-AWG26灰
(受光) 146S0083 3 DF1B-14DS-2.5RC DF1B-14DP SND10 SND10 MC1
UL1061-AWG26灰 -2.5DSA(01)
4 DF1B-2428SCA UL1007-AWG22青
MT6OUTA 1 1
PHR-4 UL1007-AWG22青
+24V_6
MC1
2 2
F F
SPH-002T-P0.5S UL1007-AWG22青
MT6OUTB 3 3
SA4-1 UL1007-AWG22青幅寄せ搬送ﾓｰﾀ
MT6OUTAB 4 4
118SX213
SA4-1 1 +24V_6 5
UL1007-AWG22青
5
IP落下検出 2 MT6OUTBB 6 6
(発光) 146S0082 3 MT7OUTA 7
UL1007-AWG24青
PHR-3 +24V_7 8 XAP-06V-1
UL1007-AWG24青
SPH-002T-P0.5S 136Y104575 MT7OUTB 9 SXA-001T-P0.6
UL1007-AWG24青
SG1 B MT7OUTAB 10 MZ1
UL1007-AWG24青
UL1061-AWG26灰 +24V_7 11
SND3 SND3 UL1007-AWG24青
SG1
1 1 1
UL1061-AWG26灰 MT7OUTBB 12
IP検出2 UL1007-AWG28青
MZ1 副走査ﾓｰﾀ
2 2 2
UL1061-AWG26灰 1 VCC_S +24V_9 13
146N0016 3 UL1007-AWG28青 3 3
2 SENSOR16 24VDRV3 14
C052X-9012K
179228-3 SC3 136Y104576 SC-S SC-P UL1007-AWG28青 4 4
3 GND +24V_9 15
/ｵﾘｴﾝﾀﾙﾓｰﾀ
179518-1 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28青 5 5
VCC_S
SC3 24VDRV4
1 1 1 4 16
G UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6
G
IP検出1 2 2 2 5 SENSOR17
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 XARR-06V
146N0016 3 3 3 6 GND B18B-XADSS-N(LF)(SN) XADRP-16V
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 SXAM-001T-P0.6 XAP-06V-1
179228-3 4 4 7 VCC_S SXA-001T-P0.6
179518-1 5 5 8 SENSOR18
SC9 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰 MZ2
6 6 9 GND
ﾊﾟﾝﾄﾓ24x30IP検出 Vcc UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青
VCC_S A
SC9
1 7 7 10 1
Vout UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青 118SX200
2 8 8 11 SENSOR19 2 BCOM
GND UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青
146N0010 GND B
MZ2 ｿﾌﾄﾆｯﾌﾟ駆動ﾓｰﾀ
3 9 9 12 3
179228-3 UL1007-AWG24青
DF1B-12DS-2.5RC DF1B-12DP-2.5DSA(01) A/
SZ2 136Y104577
10 10 4
179518-1 UL1007-AWG24青 STP-42D2046
11 11 DF1B-2428SCA 5 ACOM
UL1061-AWG26灰 SZ2/SC1-S1 SZ2/SC1-P UL1061-AWG26灰 SND7 SND7 UL1007-AWG24青
B/ /ｼﾅﾉｹﾝｼ
SZ2
1 1 12 12 6
ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除HP検出 2 2 2 DF1B-12ES-2.5RC 1 VCC_S20
146S0102 3 3 3 DF1B-2428SCA 2 SEN20 PHR-6
UL1061-AWG26灰
179228-3 4 4 3 GND SPH-002T-P0.5S
UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-12EP-2.5RC UL1061-AWG26灰
H 179518-1 5 5 4 VCC_S21 機種 5039 ユニット -
H
SC1 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1-PD2428SCB UL1061-AWG26灰
6 6 5 SEN21
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1061-AWG26灰名称回路図補助名称 XLⅡ-α
GND
SC1
1 6
ﾀｰﾝﾛｰﾗﾆｯﾌﾟ兼 UL1061-AWG26灰
2 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC DF1B-6EP-2.5RC 7
ﾎｺﾘ除去HP検出 UL1061-AWG26灰コード Z22N5039000 Rev. 　
148S0102 3 DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
DF1B-8DS-2.5RC
8
頁
179228-3 DF1B-8DP-2.5DSA(01)
179518-1
DF1B-2428SCA 富士フイルム株式会社 3
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-40
12
12 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
107Y0179A 03L-2 146S0102 03C-3 322N100199 03J-10 327N100240 07B-4 334N100387 07I-7 347N2108 09-5
113Y100317G 06-1 146S0102 03C-9 322N100200 03J-8 327N100240 07H-4 334N100388 07I-6 347N2109 09-6
113Y100319C 08-1 146S0102 03C-12 322N100203 04A-4 327N100243 03I-10 334N100392 07C-2 350N101279 04A-2
113Y100409 07C-1 146S0102 03D-1 322N100219 07D-6 327N100245 07B-3 334N100392 07E-6 350N101280 03E-6
113Y101016B 08-2 146S0102 03D-2 322N100221A 03B-14 327N100246 03I-25 334N100393 07C-3 350N103065 08-7
113Y101017A 08-6 146S0102 03D-3 322N100221A 03D-17 327N100247 03D-9 334N100393 07E-7 350N3235C 01B-5.1
118SX210 07F-15 146S0102 03D-10 322N100221A 03G-2 327N100248A 07E-10 334N100423 07B-14 350N3235C 01B-5.2
118SX301 03B-16 146S0102 03J-12 322N100221A 03H-1 327N100285 07D-4 334N2392 03J-2 350N3235C 01B-5.3
118SX301 03B-17 146S0102 03K-20 322N100221A 03I-3 327N100286A 03I-26 334N3619 07J-2 350N3310B 01B-5.4
118SX301 03D-16 146S0102 03L-1 322N100221A 07K-1 327N100286A 04A-3 334N3677 03I-2 350Y100665 03A-13.3
118Y100091A 03D-14 146S0102 07E-12 322N100228 03B-12 327N100286A 07F-1 334Y100152 07J-1 350Y100666 03A-9.3
118Y100110A 07E-11 146S0102 07H-1 322N100228 03D-5 327N100288 04B-5 334Y100378A 03G-16 350Y100667 03A-13.4
118Y100110A 07H-6 304S1000820 09-8 322N100229 03H-5 327N100289 03B-7 334Y100414 03A-16 350Y100668 03A-9.4
118Y100162 07B-11 304S5000820 09-11 322N100230 03J-5 327N100289 03B-8 334Y100415 07D-9 350Y102600A 01A-4.1
120N100024 08-5 305N100033 09-12 322N100230 03K-5 327N100290 03B-6 334Y5010G 04A-1 350Y102600A 01A-4.2
125Y100119 08-3 305S1110008 02A-1 322N100230 03K-11 327N100290 03B-9 337N0070A 07C-9 350Y102600A 01A-4.3
128N100091 08-4 309S0110008 09-10 322N100232 03G-9 327N100292 03D-11 337N0071B 07B-9 350Y102657 01A-1.1
133Y100043 03F-9 309S0166 07C-8 322N100385 03I-23 327N100292 03G-3 338N100018 03G-13 350Y102658A 01B-1.1
134N100027A 03F-10 309S0166 07E-5 322N100385 03I-24 327N100293 03D-12 338N100026B 03K-24 350Y102658A 01B-1.2
136Y101851B 10-1 309S0220008 09-9 322N1017B 03K-3 327N100294A 03B-10 341N0937B 03B-11 350Y102658A 01B-1.3
136Y101881B 10-2 310S7002016 03D-13 322N1036B 03A-3 327N100294A 03D-7 341N0937B 03D-6 350Y102693 01A-1.2
136Y102103 10-3 310S7002016 03G-4 322SB040 03G-1 327N100298 03D-8 341N100068F 03K-14 350Y102694 01A-1.3
136Y104566A 10-4 310S7002016 03G-6 322SB051 07C-5 327N100301 07B-1 341N100231A 03B-4 350Y102695 01A-1.4
136Y104568B 10-6 310S7002016 03H-3 322SB051 07D-3 327N100324A 07B-7 341N100232A 03C-4 350Y102697A 01A-4.4
136Y104569B 10-7 310S7002016 03K-15 322SB051 07E-4 327N100576A 07B-2 341N100234 03B-1 350Y102699 01B-1.4
136Y104570A 10-8 310S7002016 07K-3 322SB052 03I-21 327N100601A 07H-5 341N100234 03C-6 350Y102717 01B-7.4
136Y104572A 10-9 310Y100005B 03K-1 322SB052 07C-6 327N100612A 07B-6 341N100235C 03G-7 350Y102723 01B-7.1
136Y104573B 10-10 315N0011 03F-14 322SB052 07E-2 327N100619A 07H-9 341N100275 03G-15 350Y102723 01B-7.2
136Y104574B 10-11 315S0050 03K-13 322SB052 07I-2 327N100625A 07H-10 341N100277 03B-2 350Y102723 01B-7.3
136Y104575B 10-12 315S0050 03L-3 322SB056 03I-11 327N100626B 07H-3 341N100277 03C-7 350Y1951C 03A-15
136Y104576B 10-13 315S3360040 03K-34 322SB056 07F-3 327N1101607B 03A-2 341N100278A 03B-3 350Y1953B 03A-13.1
136Y104577B 10-14 317S1064 09-7 322SB056 07G-2 327N6101401E 03A-1 341N100278A 03C-8 350Y1954B 03A-13.2
136Y104578B 10-15 318N100087 03I-12 322SB056 07I-5 328N100017 03J-6 341N100279 03C-11 350Y1957A 03A-9.1
136Y104579B 10-16 318N100087 07F-5 322SB057 07D-5 329N100039 03C-5 341N100323A 03J-1 350Y1958A 03A-9.2
136Y104581A 10-17 318N100087 07G-1 322SB058 03B-13 329N100048 03H-2 341N100324 03J-3 350Y2082 01B-4.1
136Y104583A 10-18 319N101169 03G-5 322SB058 03D-4 329N100049 03B-5 341N100625 07K-2 350Y2082 01B-4.2
136Y104588 10-19 319N101175B 03K-16 322SF267 04A-9 332N0620 04A-7 341N100643A 03K-4 350Y2082 01B-4.3
136Y104589 10-20 319N101179 03H-4 322SF268 03G-19 332N100349A 03M-2 341Y0341 03F-19 350Y2083A 01B-4.4
136Y8545 10-21 319N101180A 03G-18 322SP202 03K-32 332N100350A 03K-27 341Y100348A 07H-11 350N2974H 01A-10
136Y8890 10-22 319N101198A 03K-31 322SP205 03I-15 332N100350A 03M-4 341Y100354B 07B-15 353N100163A 03K-22
136Y8891 10-23 319N101284A 03L-4 322SP205 07F-11 334N100072D 03G-12 342N100050A 03E-2 353Y0073G 03A-21
137S1417 08-8 319N101344 03B-15 322SP205 07G-5 334N100159 03A-18 345N100602E 01B-8 356N10111 03A-23
137S1419 08-9 319N102468 03K-17 322SP211 07B-13 334N100162C 07A-1 345N100604B 01A-3 356N103592 07J-3
137S1420 08-10 319N102469 03K-23 322SY097 03A-5 334N100191 03G-17 345N101356D 01B-3 356N103608 03F-16
137S1421 08-11 319N102474A 07F-9 322SY097 03K-28 334N100192 03G-11 345N1742G 01A-6.1 356N103609 03F-17
137S1423 08-12 319N102474A 07G-9 322SY101 03K-9 334N100193 03G-10 345N1742G 01A-6.2 356N103613 03F-2
137S1459 08-13 319N102616A 07K-4 322SY121 03I-4 334N100195C 04A-6 345N1742G 01A-6.3 356N107900B 07H-2
138S0218 01A-13 319N102762 03A-8 322SY121 03I-7 334N100375 07G-13 345N1743D 01A-8.1 356N10790A 03A-22
146N0016B 02A-5 319N102763 03A-6 323N100076A 07B-8 334N100376 07G-12 345N1743D 01A-8.2 356N108212B 07B-10
146N0016B 07J-4 319N102764 03A-19 323N1266 07C-10 334N100378 07F-17 345N1743D 01A-8.3 356N108517B 07F-13
146N100002 07G-11 319N102771 03I-19 327N0208 04A-8 334N100379 07F-16 345N1884C 01A-6.4 356N108546A 03C-2
146S0082 03D-15 319N102772 07I-4 327N100134A 07H-8 334N100380A 03I-9 345N1885A 01A-8.4 356N108566 03K-21
146S0083 03D-18 322N100044A 03K-19 327N100239 07B-5 334N100381A 03I-8 346N1254E 03A-20 356N108647A 07F-14
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-41
12
12 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
356Y0406B 03A-7 376N0241B 01A-7 606Y120002 06-2
356Y0407A 03A-4 382N100266 03A-12 831Y100050 07E-9
356Y0457A 03A-14 386N100269 03F-20 839Y100052 05-1
356Y0458A 03A-10 386N1266 03A-11 840Y100299 04A-10
356Y0475 09-1 386N1358 07A-2 840Y100300 04B-1
356Y0498 09-4 386N1374 01A-12 845Y100162 08-14.1
356Y0499 09-3 386N1375 01A-11 845Y100162 08-14.2
356Y0502 09-2 387N0138C 03A-24 845Y100168 08-14.3
356Y102073 03I-1 387N100002A 07D-2 845Y100169 08-14.4
357N100097C 03K-29 387N100021B 07E-8 852Y100078B 07F-12
357N101030 03K-18 387N100022A 02A-4
360N0494B 07C-7 387N100023 03E-4
360N0494B 07E-3 387N100023 03M-3
360N100531B 07F-7 387N100024D 07A-3
360N100531B 07G-7 388N100154 03K-25
360N100536A 03I-14 388N100173C 03K-12
360N100536A 07F-4 388N100439 03C-1
360N100536A 07G-4 388N100439 03I-17
360N100537A 03I-16 388N100439 03L-5
360N100538A 03I-20 388N100526 07D-8
360N100539A 07I-3 388N100527 07C-4
360N100547B 07F-18 388N100527 07E-1
360N100547B 07G-14 388N100530A 07I-9
360Y100395 04B-4 388N100531A 07I-1
362N100240A 03M-5 388N100532 03C-10
362N100293B 04A-5 388N100533 03E-1
362N100294B 03M-1 388N100536 03E-7
362N100297 03E-5 388N100537 03G-8
362N100299 03H-6 388N100538 03G-14
362N100337 03J-7 388N100539 03I-5
362N100751 03E-8 388N100540 03I-6
363N100240D 03K-26 388N100545 03K-10
363N100689 07D-7 388N100546 03J-4
363N100699 03E-3 388N100629 03J-11
363N101284A 03J-13 388N100630 03J-9
363N101378A 03I-18 388N100957 07F-19
363N101378A 07F-8 388N100957 07G-15
363N101378A 07G-8 388N100960 03I-13
363N101408 03K-33 388N100961 03I-22
363N2505B 03K-7 388N100964 07F-2
365N100009D 03K-30 388N100964 07G-3
367S1109A 02A-3 388N101004 07B-12
367S2084 02A-2 388N101005 07H-7
370N100063A 03F-15 388N101008 07F-10
370N100063A 03F-18 388N101008 07G-10
370N100717A 03F-3 392N0009A 03F-13
370N100717A 03F-5 405N101258 01B-6
370N100718B 03F-7 405N102614 01A-2
370N100719A 03F-8 405N102614 01B-2
372N100063 03F-4 405N102614 01B-9
372S0049A 03F-1 407Y100009 04B-2
372S0609 03F-6 602Y100002 07D-1
376N0240B 01A-5 603Y100094A 04B-3
014-247-02C
01.31.2014 FM8221
SP-42
13
13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
l
Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
● サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されている記号に読
替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意されている。 The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for converting
l
{SP:13_5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 } the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the service manual.
{SP:13_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table}
2. ねじ類 2. Screws
● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービ The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described.
l
スマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-43
13
参考情報参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information 記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
BR3x6 308S0401 鋼鋼
ばね座金 + みがき丸座金 TP3x6 308S0414 亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク
BR3x10 308S0403 座金組込み
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク六角頭 TP ネジロメート
十字穴付六角ボルト
BR3x12 308S0404 ロメート Cross recessed 色：うすい白色
Cross recessed TP4x8 308S0424
色：うすい白色 hexagon head TP Steel
BR3x32 308S0432 hexagon head
Steel screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
screw with spring
BR4x8 308S0406 Zinc plating/White trivalent TP4x12 308S0426 chromating
and plain washers
chromating Color: Light white
BR4x25 308S0411 Color: Light white
六角穴付き止めネジ鋼
鋼 WP3x4 303S0102
（W ポイント）亜鉛メッキ + リン酸塩処理
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク Hexagon socket Steel
六角頭デルタイトネロメート head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
ジ色：うすい白色 WP4x4 303S0107
DT3x6 306S0101 (double -point) treatment
Hexagon head Steel
deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
Color: Light white
ステンレス
十字穴付なべ小ねじ
不動態化処理
*N4x8 301S2000408 Cross recessed pan
Stainless steel
head screw
Passive state treatment
六角頭樹脂用タッピ鋼
PS3x6 306S0151 ングねじ亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価クロ
Hexagon head メート
PS3x8 306S0152 tapping screw for Steel Zinc plating/White
plastic trivalent chromating
ステンレス
六角ボルト
不動態化処理
*R8x20 304S1000820 Hexagon head
Stainless steel
screw
鋼
トラスねじ
黒色 3 価クロメート
T2x5 301S3750205 Cross recessed
Steel
truss head screw
Black trivalent chromating
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-44
13
3. 止め輪、座金、ナット類
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
*E3 315S3360030
ステンレス
*E4 315S3360040
E 形止め輪不動態化処理
E ring Stainless steel
*E6 315S3360060
*E8 315S3360080
KL リング
KL6 315S0051
K-CL ring
*SW4 309S0220004 ステンレス

ばね座金不動態化処理
Spring washer Stainless steel
*SW8 309S0220008 Passive state treatment
*W4 309S0120004 ステンレス

平座金不動態化処理
Plain washer Stainless steel
*W8 309S0110008 Passive state treatment
ステンレス
六角ナット不動態化処理
*Na8 305S1110008
Hexagon nut Stainless steel
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-45
13
4. 配線用部品
4. Wiring Parts
参考情報参考情報
Reference information Reference information
記号部品コード記号部品コード
Symbol Parts code 概略外形寸法など（mm） Symbol Parts code 概略外形寸法など（mm）
形状部品名称形状部品名称
Approx. external Approx. external
Shape Parts name Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. dimensions (mm), etc.
NK-4N 316S1006 21x7x10 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ
NK-5N 316S1007 22x9x10 (WxHxD)
スペーサ Code clamp
CS-12C 347S0913 10x16x10 (WxHxD)
Spacer NK-6N 316S1008 24x11x10 (WxHxD)
RLMS 1V0 316S1273 13x10x5 (WxHxD)

Code clamp
EDS-0607U 316S2027 14x9x4 (WxHxD) RLMS 2V0 316S1274 17x13x5 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
EDS-1 316S1121 20x10x4 (WxHxD) コードクランプ

コードクランプ RLWC 3SV0 316S1277 24x27x6 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
Code clamp
EDS-2 316S1122 20x10x5 (WxHxD)
T-18R 316S1001 束線部品 100x2.5 (LxW)

T-30R 316S1002 Cable tie 152x3.5 (LxW)
EDS-17L 318S1037 55x26x5 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
クランプ
KGCP-08-0 316S0476 10x19x10 (WxHxD)
clamp
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-46
13
5. ［部品コード］→［記号］読替表
この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載
の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table

Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used
in this Service Manual.
■ ねじ類 ■ 止め輪、座金、ナット類 ■ 配線用部品

Screws Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts Wiring Parts
部品コード記号部品コード記号部品コード記号
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
301S2000408 *N4x8 305S1110008 *Na8 316S0476 KGCP -08-0
301S3750205 T2x5 309S0110008 *W8 316S1006 NK-4N
303S0102 WP3x4 309S0120004 *W4 316S1007 NK-5N
303S0107 WP4x4 309S0220004 *SW4 316S1008 NK-6N
304S1000820 *R8x20 309S0220008 *SW8 316S1121 EDS-1
306S0101 DT3x6 315S0051 KL6 316S1122 EDS-2
306S0151 PS3x6 315S3360030 *E3 316S1273 RLMS 1V0
306S0152 PS3x8 315S3360040 *E4 316S1274 RLMS 1V0
308S0401 BR3x6 315S3360060 *E6 316S2027 EDS-0607U
308S0403 BR3x10 315S3360080 *E8 318S1037 EDS-17L
308S0404 BR3x12 318S1164 LAMS-05
308S0406 BR4x8
308S0411 BR4x25
308S0414 TP3x6
308S0424 TP4x8
308S0426 TP4x12
308S0431 BR3x22
308S0432 BR3x32
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
SP-47
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01C
05.31.2013 FM6149
Control Sheet
Preventive Maintenance (PM)

05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-1
1. How to Use the Preventive Maintenance

Section
The preventive maintenance programs are based on the machine usage interval or the
process count. Perform the specified preventive maintenance programs at the predefined
intervals or when the predefined process count is reached.
Since the maintenance programs differ depending on the respective intervals, they should be
performed according to the Program List.
The Preventive Maintenance Program List and the specified maintenance programs are
listed below:
→ 1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List
→ 1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 1
Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or
30,000 Is Reached
→ 1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Been Used for 2
Years and 4 Years, or when a Process Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached
REFERENCE
The process counts are based on a daily process count of 20 and annual operating days of
300.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List
u INSTRUCTION u
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety,
ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned
states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
Reference Time Periodic

Maintenance program 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures
2.1 Backing Up the Log     
2.2 Checking the Error Log     
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time     
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance     
4. Pulling Out the Machine     
5. Removing the Covers/Plates
5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years)  -  - 
5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years) -  -  -
6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch -  -  -
7. Cassette Set Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit     
7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit -  -  -
7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small) -  -  -
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups -  -  -
7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers -  -  -
7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter -  -  -
7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member of
-  -  -
the Housing Unit
7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit -  -  -
7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly -  -  -
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-3
Maintenance program 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
8. Erasure Unit
8.1 Cleaning the Filter  -  - 
  Filter Replace after use for 2 years or with a process count
*1:
8.2 Replacing the Filter - - -
(*1) (*1) 603Y0070 of 36,000.
8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller     
8.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate -  -  -
8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit     
9. Light-Collecting Guide
9.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly -  -  -
9.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit -  -  -
9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide -  -  -
9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit -  -  -
9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide
-  -  -
Assembly
10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch -  -  -
11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates
11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)  -  - 
11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years) -  -  -
12. Securing the Machine     
13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding     
14. Checking the Image/Conveyance     
15. Confirming the S Value     
16. Checking the Error Log     
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-4
1.2 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Reference Time Periodic
Maintenance program replacement Remarks
Been Used for 1 Year, 3 Years and 5 Years, or when a section requirements parts
Process Counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 Is Reached 15. Confirming the S Value
16. Checking the Error Log
u INSTRUCTION u
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for 1 year, 3 years and
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain 5 years, or when a process counts of 6,000, 18,000 or 30,000 is reached
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are Reference
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
section
- - - - -

section requirements parts
2.1 Backing Up the Log
2.2 Checking the Error Log
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting
Time
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance
4. Pulling Out the Machine
5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates
(1st/3rd/5th Years)
7. Cassette Set Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
8. Erasure Unit
8.1 Cleaning the Filter
8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller
8.5 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the
Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)
12. Securing the Machine
Checking for Improper Protective
13.
Grounding
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-5
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program when the Machine Has Reference Time Periodic
Been Used for 2 Years and 4 Years, or when a Process section requirements parts
Counts of 12,000 or 24,000 Is Reached 8. Erasure Unit
u INSTRUCTION u *1: Replace

Filter after use for 2
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional 8.2 Replacing the Filter years or with a
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain 603Y0070
process count
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are of 36,000.
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored 8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller
8.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
Reference Time Periodic 9. Light-Collecting Guide

section requirements parts 9.1 Removing the Post-Reading
Conveyor Guide Assembly
9.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit
2.1 Backing Up the Log
9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide
9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting
Time 9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading
Conveyance Guide Assembly
10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
4. Pulling Out the Machine
11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the
5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates Covers (2nd/4th Years)
(2nd/4th Years)
12. Securing the Machine
6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch
Checking for Improper Protective
7. Cassette Set Unit 13.
Grounding
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit 14. Checking the Image/Conveyance
7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit 15. Confirming the S Value
7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small) 16. Checking the Error Log
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups
l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for 2 years and 4
7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
years, or when a process counts of 12,000 or 24,000 is reached
7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and
Shutter Reference
Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
section
7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine
and the Antistatic Member of the 8.2 Filter 603Y0070 1
Housing Unit
7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit
7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top
Cover Assembly
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-6
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures (3) Click on to select the location where the data is to be backed up. After
selection, click on [OK]. Verify the location for backup and click on [OK].
2.1 Backing Up the Log #1
REFERENCE
The path for the RU PC-TOOL is as follows:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe
(2) Select “LOG ALL” from the BACKUP items, and click on [EXECUTE].
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
#2
RU IP ADDR
ERROR LOG
CONFIGURATION
BACKUP RESTORE
TRACE LOGS
HISTORY LOG
ALL RUs SETTING
LOG ALL
SCN ALL DATA
SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA
SCN OPTICAL DATA
#3
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
#1
"LOG ALL"
#2
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
FRRB602001.ai
#4
→ The window opens for prompting to select the location for backing up the data.
FRRB602002.ai
→ Upon completion of the backup, the Complete window appears.

(4) Click on [OK].
FRRB602003.ai
→ The window returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-7
(1) Click on [ERROR DB].
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
FRRB602004.ai
→ The ERROR-DB window opens.
(2) Click on [UPDATE].
FRRB602005.ai
(3) Select the log, and check to make sure that the error log is not abnormal.
#1
#2
FRRB602006.ai
(4) Click on .
→ The window returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-8
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time (2) Click on the [LAMP] tab, and confirm the total count for the erasure lamp lighting.
After the confirmation, click on [CANCEL].
(1) Click on [EDIT HISTORY].
#1
→ The EDIT HISTORY window opens.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
#2
FRRB602007.ai
#3
FRRB602008.ai
→ The display returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-9

(1) Check the image/conveyance.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-10
4. Pulling Out the Machine (3) Remove the power cable cover.
(1) Power OFF the RU.
(2) Loosen the nuts of the adjustable feet to make the machine movable.
(4) Disconnect the power cable.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-11
(5) Disconnect the I/F cable.
(6) Pull out the machine to the working space.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-12
5. Removing the Covers/Plates 6. Turning Off the High-Voltage Switch

(1) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (SW11).
5.1 Removing the Covers/Plates (1st/3rd/5th Years)
(1) Remove the front cover, the rear cover and the right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
5.2 Removing the Covers/Plates (2nd/4th Years)

(1) Remove the front cover, the rear cover, the right-hand side cover and the left-
hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
(2) Remove the dust-tight cover assembly.
(3) Remove the front plate, the rear plate, the right-hand side board box plate and the
left-hand side plate.
{MC:3.2_Plate}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-13
7. Cassette Set Unit 7.3 Cleaning the Roller (Small)

(1) Rotate the gear of the motor (MA1), and lay down the roller (small) assembly
inward.
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
CAUTION
Before turning on the lamp, make sure to install the erasure unit into the machine.
Do not turn on the lamp by connecting the erasure unit to the machine and turning on
the power while the erasure unit is outside the machine.
(2) Clean the roller (small) with a moistened cloth.
(1) Remove the erasure unit.

7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit

(1) Remove the cassette set unit.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-14
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups 7.5 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
(1) Clean the suction cups with a moistened cloth. (1) Rotate the gear of the motor (MA3), and move the suction arm assembly to the
uppermost position.
(2) Clean the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth while rotating the gear of the
motor (MA4).
(3) Rotate the gears of the motor (MA4) and the motor (MA3), and return the suction
arm assembly and the roller (small) assembly to their initial positions.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-15
7.6 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter 7.7 Cleaning Inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member
of the Housing Unit
(1) Clean the antistatic member and the shutter.
#1 Clean the antistatic member with a vacuum cleaner. (1) Clean inside the machine and the antistatic member of the housing unit.
#2 Clean the shutter with a vacuum cleaner. #1 Clean inside the machine with a vacuum cleaner.
#2 Clean the antistatic member with a vacuum cleaner.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-16
7.8 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit
(1) Reinstall the cassette set unit.
7.9 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Top Cover Assembly

(1) Clean the top cover assembly with a moistened cloth.
(2) Reinstall the top cover assembly.

{MC:5.2_Top Cover Assembly}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-17
8. Erasure Unit 8.2 Replacing the Filter

(1) Remove the filter.
8.1 Cleaning the Filter {MC:6.5_Filter}

(2) Replace the filter with a new one.
(1) Remove the reflection plate.
(3) Install the filter.
(2) Clean the guide with a vacuum cleaner. u NOTE u
Keep the brush roller assembly and the reflection plate removed in this procedure.
{MC:6.5_Filter}
(2)
FRRB608001.ai
(3) Clean the filter with a moistened cloth.
u NOTE u
Do not clean the guide with a moistened cloth. Otherwise, it might peel off.
(3)
FRRB608002.ai
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-18
8.3 Cleaning the Brush Roller 8.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
(1) Remove the brush roller. (1) Clean the reflection plate with a moistened cloth.
{MC:6.4_Brush Roller}
(2) Clean the brush roller with a vacuum cleaner.
(2)
(5)
FRRB608005.ai
(2) Reinstall the reflection plate.

FRRB608003.ai
(3) Clean inside the bracket with a vacuum cleaner.
(3)
FRRB608004.ai
(4) Reinstall the brush roller.

{MC:6.4_Brush Roller}
(5) Reinstall the brush roller assembly.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-19
(1) Reinstall the erasure unit.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-20
9. Light-Collecting Guide (1) Clean the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use lens cleaning paper to clean the light-collecting surface.
9.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly - Use four-fold two plies of the lens cleaning paper and moisten with dehydrated ethanol.
- Use new sheets of the lens cleaning paper and clean until the paper does not catch
(1) Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly. smears.
- Clean in one direction at a constant rate.
{MC:9.2_Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
9.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Unit

(1) Remove the light-collectiong unit.
9.3 Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide
CAUTIONS
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting guide even when you are
wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry sheet of lens cleaning paper.
Otherwise, the guide might get damaged.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.
u INSTRUCTION u 9.4 Reinstalling the Light-Colleting Unit

When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
(1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit.
9.5 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyance Guide

Assembly
(1) Reinstall the post-reading conveyance guide assembly.
{MC:9.2_Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-21
10. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch 11. Reinstalling the Covers and the Plates
(1) Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S11).
REFERENCE 11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (1st/3rd/5th Years)

The error 11280 occurs if the machine is started with the high-voltage switch kept OFF.
(1) Clean the covers.
(2) Reinstall the front cover, the rear cover and the right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
11.2 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Covers (2nd/4th Years)

(1) Reinstall the front plate, the rear plate, the right-hand side board box plate and
the left-hand side plate.
{MC:3.2_Plate}
(2) Reinstall the front cover, the rear cover, the right-hand side cover and the left-
hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Cover}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-22
12. Securing the Machine 13. Checking for Improper Protective

(1) Connect the power cable and the I/F cable. Grounding
(2) Move the machine to its retained position. (1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire connections
(3) Lower the adjustable feet and fix the machine. are established in the same manner as for installation.
REFERENCE
Check the additional protecting ground wire only when the machine is installed in the
patient environment.
(2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are connected in
the same manner as for installation.
(3) Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.

(1) Check the image/conveyance.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PM-23
15. Confirming the S Value 16. Checking the Error Log

(1) Confirm the S value. (1) Check the error log.
{IN:13._Confirming the S Value} {PM:2.2_Checking the Error Log}
(2) Close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(3) Turn OFF the power of Console.
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
01.31.2014 02 Corrections (FM8222) 1, 5, 47, 48, Appx IN-32
Installation (IN)

01.31.2014 FM8222
IN-1
1. Specifications of Machine 1.2 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine
n Moving Means
1.1 Dimensions and Weight Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4
n Fixing Means
n Dimensions
- Adjustable foot x4
W590 × D380 × H810 (mm)
- Anti-topple retainer: 1 set
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
CR-IR 359 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
1.3 Servicing Space 1.3.1 Retaining with the Adjustable Feet
The following four kinds of installation patterns are available: Shown below is the installation space where the machine is retained with the adjustable feet.
- Retaining with the adjustable feet; When the machine is retained with the adjustable feet, the long cassette cannot be used.
- Retaining the machine by the anti-topple retainer; l Top view
- Installing the machine at a user’s site where long cassettes are used;
- Using the supporter
Note that the installation space and the retaining method are limited at a user’s site where a
long cassette is used.
WARNING
Be sure to observe the following cautions at a user’s site where long cassettes are
used.
- Fix the machine to the floor by the anti-topple retainer.
- Install the machine where the ceiling height is 1750 mm or higher.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-3
1.3.2 Retaining the Machine by the Anti-Topple Retainer 1.3.3 Installing the Machine at a User’s Site where Long Cassettes
are Used
Shown below is the installation space where the machine is fixed to the floor by means of the
optional anti-topple retainer as demanded by the user. Shown below is the installation space where the machine is installed at a user’s site where
l Top view long cassettes are used.
l Top view and side view
l Hole locations of the anti-topple retainer
l Hole locations of the anti-topple retainer
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-4
1.3.4 Using the Supporter l Installation space required when the base is attached to the supporter
The base mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.
When the supporter is used for installation, the installation space is as indicated below.
l Installation space required for the supporter only
l Installation space required when the cassette rack is attached to the

supporter
The cassette rack mounting position and installation space are left-right symmetrical.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-5
2. Installation Work Flowchart

n Workflow for First-Time Installation
START A
3. Preparation for Installation 8. Installing RU Software
3.2 Unloading 8.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility
3.3 Transfer 8.2 Setting the RU IP Address
3.4 Temporary Placement 8.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied 8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX Console
4. Installation Procedures 8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
8.6 Installing RU Software

4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member
8.7 Installation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit
5. Connecting the Cables
9. Image/Conveyance Checks
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value
9.1 Check Before Procedures
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable
9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
6. Final Placement
10. Confirming the S Value
6.1 Securing the Machine
11. Backing Up the Scanner Data
6.2 Securing the Cable
7. DX Console Installation Procedures 12. Powering OFF the DX Console/RU
{DR-ID 300CL Service Manual}

13. Cleaning the DX Console/RU
A 14. Exposure Marker Instruction Label
END
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
IN-6
3. Preparation for Installation 3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment
n Additional Protective Grounding

3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation When the RU is to be installed in the patient environment, connect the RU with the medical
use grounding terminal through the additional protective grounding wire.
The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria set forth in "Getting Definition of "patient environment" is given below.
Started" and "3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements." Preinstallation procedures should be
performed beforehand for necessary construction work, electrical work, and air-conditioning l Patient environment
system installation. Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring).It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements in height from the area of the patient's body. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to
reach the medically-used room.
Avoid the following installation sites:
- Places where the temperature changes drastically. 3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit
- Places near heat sources such as heaters.
- Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. When servicing a board or optical unit, use a wristband to ground your body.
- Places where corrosive gas may be generated. If your body is not grounded, the electrostatic buildup on your body may damage the
- Dusty places. electronic parts.
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
- Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
- Places that are exposed to X-rays while the machine is processing. 3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection
Make sure that the machine will never be exposed to direct and scattered X-rays while the
machine is processing. "Accessory equipment connected to be the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
The size and position of the X-ray shields should be such that the machine is completely according to the respective IEC Standards. Furthermore all configurations shall comply
shielded to avoid exposure of direct and scattered X-rays to the machine. with the medical system standard, IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter
- Install this device in the place that a patient does not touch. 16. Everyone who connects additional equipment configures a medical system, and is
therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000
l When installed in the patient environment and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. If in doubt consult with the your local technical service
In the room where the machine is to be installed, the hospital-grade grounding terminal and representative."
outlet should be provided.
The installation place should be within reach of the cable of the patient environment support
cable kit from the hospital-grade grounding terminal and outlet.
l When installed in other than the patient environment

Make sure that persons other than routine operators of the machine will not touch the
machine inadvertently.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-7
3.2 Unloading 1. Unload the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-carrying
platform of the truck.
2. Cut the polypropylene (PP) band, and remove the slope.
CAUTIONS
- When unloading the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
- Unload the machine on a flat space as close to the installation space as possible. If
there are many steps or bumps in the machine transfer route, load may be applied to
casters, causing damage.
- Secure a necessary space for unloading, before unloading the machine together with
the carrier pallet from the load-carrying platform of the truck.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-8
3. Remove the corrugated fiberboard box. 4. Cut the tapes, and remove the PP bands with stoppers and the bag containing the
accessories.
u NOTE u
Lift the corrugated fiberboard box straight up not to damage the machine with the edges
of the box, for removal.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-9
5. Cut the lower part of the plastic cover which protects the machine. Remove the 6. Cut the corners of the plastic cover which cover two right and left machine
upper part of the plastic cover. retainers on the rear of the machine. Then remove the bolts which retain the
machine retainers on the rear of the machine.
u NOTE u
When cutting the plastic cover, cut below the bottom of the machine. Do not damage REFERENCE
the machine with a sharp instrument. In removing the bolts, use of a 17-mm spanner is recommended to improve workability.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-10
7. Cut the plastic cover around the machine retainer in an L-shape by a cutter, 8. Once loosen the adjustable feet for removing the two right and left machine
for easy removal of the two right and left machine retainers on the rear of the retainers on the rear of the machine.
machine.
REFERENCE
In loosening the nut of the adjustable foot, use of a 13-mm spanner is recommended to
improve workability.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-11
9. Remove the two machine retainers on the right- and left-hand on the rear of the 10. Raise the two adjustable feet on the right- and left-hand on the rear of the
machine together with their sealing plastic covers and rubber plates. machine to the uppermost position.
CAUTION
Be sure to raise the adjustable feet to the uppermost position. If the machine is
moved with the adjustable feet lowered, they might get caught on the ground, causing
the machine to topple down.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-12
11. Cut the corners of the plastic covers which cover the two machine retainers 12. Loosen the bolts which retain the two right and left machine retainers on the
on the right- and left-hand on the front of the machine by a cutter, and remove front of the machine, and then once loosen the adjustable feet on the front of the
the front bolt of the two bolts retaining the machine retainer on the front of the machine.
machine.
REFERENCE
CAUTION In loosening the nut of the adjustable foot, use of a 13-mm spanner is recommended to
Do not remove all of the four bolts which retain the machine retainers on the front of improve workability.
the machine. If removed, the machine is movable, and might drop from the carrier
pallet.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-13
13. Move the machine on the carrier pallet until the machine disengages from the 14. Remove the PP bands for retaining the slope from the accessory bags, and pass
machine retainers. Then raise the adjustable feet on the front of the machine to the PP bands through the holes on the carrier pallet.
the uppermost position.
u NOTE u
Make sure that the rubber plate has been removed, before passing the PP band.
CAUTION
Otherwise, the adjustable foot might get caught on the rubber plate, causing the
Be sure to raise the adjustable feet to the uppermost position. If the machine is
machine to topple down, when the machine is unloaded from the carrier pallet.
moved with the adjustable feet lowered, they might get caught on the ground, causing
the machine to topple down.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-14
15. Place the slope over the step of the carrier pallet. 16. Pass the PP bands through the holes of the slope.
u NOTES u
- Place the slope with the surface having the label applied facing upward. Since the
step of the slope serves as a guide for casters, if a wrong face is placed, a difference
in levels will occur between the carrier pallet and the slope, and in addition, the casters
might come off from the slope when the machine is unloaded.
- Place the slope with the side with holes toward the carrier pallet.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-15
17. Put the PP band on the stopper. 18. Tighten the PP band, and fix the slope to the carrier pallet.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-16
19. Check to make sure that the four adjustable feet are raised to the uppermost 20. Unload the machine from the carrier pallet.
position, before unloading the machine from the carrier pallet.
CAUTIONS
CAUTION - Be sure to unload the machine with two persons, and support the machine from both
If the machine is moved with the adjustable feet lowered, the feet might get caught side faces of the machine.
with the carrier pallet, the slope and the ground, causing the damage on the adjustable - Hold the rear and the side faces of the machine when supporting the machine.
feet. - Do not hold in the vicinity of the cassette inserting entrance or the vicinity of the
operation panel.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-17
3.3 Transfer 3.4 Temporary Placement
1. Secure space required for installation procedures and temporarily place the
CAUTIONS machine.
- When transferring the machine, two persons should support the machine from both
side faces to prevent the machine from toppling down.
- Raise the adjustable feet to the uppermost position before transfer. Otherwise, the
machine might topple or the casters might get damaged.
- When the machine should be moved over some step or bump, move it as slowly as
possible to avoid shock to it. Note that the step over which the machine may move is
about 10 mm high at most.
1. Put the hand lifter underneath the machine.
u NOTE u
Do not use the hand lifter to transfer the machine into the installation place. The
machine might topple and get damaged.
2. Secure the machine with the adjustable feet in place.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-18
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied n Optional Items
Abbreviated product name Description Qty Remarks
Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST that is
contained in each carton. For retaining the
IR 355 FLOOR FIX KIT RH E Anti-topple retainer kit 1
machine
n Machine Main Body IR 355 STAND #(E) Supporter 1
Abbreviated product name Description Qty. Remarks IR 355 CASSETTE RACK #(E) Cassette rack 1
- Inch-type specification IR 355 CASSETE RACK FOR LC #(E) Rack for long cassette 1
- For FMSU direct selling
CR IR 359 RU2 USA 1 E CR-IR 359 1 IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E) Mount 1 Except for USA
- With the 50 micron upgrade
(For the U.S.)
kit installed IR 355 IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E Mount 1
- Inch-type specification IR 355 ARM FOR LCD MONITOR #(E) Arm for LCD monitor 1 Except for USA
Image reader main body - For selling by FMSU
CR IR 359 RU2 USA 2 E CR-IR 359 1 franchised stores Retainer for fixing to wall
IR 355 STAND WALL FIX KIT #(E) 1 Except for USA
(For the U.S.) - With the 50 micron upgrade (long type)
kit installed
IR 355 MBL KIT #(E) Mobile kit 1
- For use at hospitals IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V UK E AC cable for BSI 1
CR-IR 359
CR IR 359 RU2 E 1
(For European and other - Metric-type specification IR 346 AC CORD 200-240V E AC cable for CEE 1
foreign countries)
IR 362 AC CORD 100-120V UL E AC cable for USA 1 Except for USA
n Accessories
Check Item Qty. Remarks
CD-R (machine-specific data) 1 Machine-specific data CD-R
CD-ROM (application) 1 For installation
3 1.0A (137S1417)
Fuse set 2 1.6A (137S1419)
2 2.0A (137S1420)
1 327N100288
Spur gear
1 327N1121608
5 TP3x6
Screw 5 BR4x8
5 DT3x6
KL ring 5 KL4
Cover 1 For power supply inlet
Instruction manual 1
1 Exposure marker instruction label
Label
2
Brush 1
CD-ROM (HR reading option key) 1 For USA
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-19
4. Installation Procedures
4.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member

1. Remove the tapes.
2. Remove the protective member.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-20
5. Connecting the Cables 1. Connect the power cable to the machine.
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance

Value
CAUTIONS
- Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is unplugged
from the outlet.
- If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING."
{IN: Appendix 1._ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}
- If the power cable is not packed together with the machine accessories, be sure to
use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an electric
shock or a fire. 2. Place the breaker switch in the ON position.
<For the U.S. and Canada>
UL-listed detachable power supply cable
Hospital-grade plug
Cable wire diameter : 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
Rated voltage : 125 VAC or higher
Cable type : SJT
<For Europe>
Cable certified by a country in which the machine is to be installed
Cable wire diameter : 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Rated voltage : 250 VAC or higher
Cable type : H05VV-F
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-21
3. Measure the resistance value of the power cable. 5. Place the breaker switch in the OFF position.
(Reference value)
Terminal L-N L-E N-E
Resistance value 100kΩ - ∞ ∞
4. Measure the resistance value between the E terminal of the power cable and the
bottom of the machine frame, and make sure that there is continuity.
6. Install the power cable cover.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-22
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable 2. Consult the user to check the installation conditions of the machine, cable wiring
locations and so on. When the I/F cable is to be drawn out from the right-hand
side of the machine, pass the cable through the right-hand slot, and when it is to
CAUTION be drawn out from the rear of the machine, pass it through the rear slot.
A telephone cable should not be plugged into the I/F cable connector.
u NOTE u
For the I/F cable, only UTP type straight LAN cable of Category 5E or more should be used.
1. Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the machine.
3. Connect the I/F cable to the switching hub.
CAUTION
Only devices evaluated to IEC/UL60950-1 can be used.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-23
6. Final Placement 6.1 Securing the Machine
For final placement of the machine, check the requests of the user, and observe the 1. Secure the four adjustable feet down onto the floor.
procedures described below to secure the machine and cables in place.
u NOTE u
WARNING When securing the adjustable feet, pay attention to the following points.
- The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded.
At an institution where a long cassette is used, be sure to fasten the machine to the However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine installation
floor with the anti-topple retainer. place to secure the adjustable feet on the rear side, the two adjustable feet on the front
{IN: Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer} side should be secured in place. In this case, the two adjustable feet and two casters
should be evenly loaded.
- When the adjustable feet are secured, the casters should be detached from the floor.
l Retaining the machine with the adjustable feet; 2. Secure the adjustable feet.
When the machine is to be retained with the adjustable feet, refer to “6.1 Securing the
machine”.
{IN:6.1_Securing the Machine}
l Retaining the machine by the anti-topple retainer;

When the machine is to be fixed by the anti-topple retainer (optional), refer to “Appendix 2.
Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer”.
{IN: Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer}
l Using the supporter

When using the supporter (optional), see "Appendix 3. Assembling and Securing the
Supporter."
{IN: Appendix 3._Assembling and Securing the Supporter}
l Using the mobile kit

When an optional mobile kit is to be used, take the procedures in “Appendix 9 Installing the
Mobile Kit”.
{IN: Appendix 9._Installing the Mobile Kit}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-24
6.2 Securing the Cable 7. DX Console Installation Procedures
WARNING 1. Perform the DX Console installation procedures.
If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1. u NOTE u

ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING." Complete "7. DX Console Installation Procedures" before performing the procedures
{IN: Appendix 1._ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING} described in "8. Installing RU Software."
{DR-ID 300CL Service Manual}
CAUTION
Do not tie or bundle the power cable in such a manner that it is overloaded.
1. Plug the power cable into the outlet.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-25
8. Installing RU Software 3. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.

Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on
Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU and set the "RU IP Address" and "FTP the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
Server IP Address." “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
The procedure described here assumes that the following addresses are to be set: u NOTE u
RU IP address: 172.16.1.11
FTP server IP address: 172.16.1.21
8.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility from the procedure 1.
1. Turn ON the power of the DX Console.

014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-26
8.2 Setting the RU IP Address 2. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once.
u NOTE u
1. Make sure that “Reader Unit IP Address” is selected, and then press the [Select]
button. Set the IP address of the RU specified on the DX Console.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-27
8.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address 2. Press the [Select] button.
1. Press the button twice, and select “FTP Server IP Address”.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-28
3. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once. 5. Confirm the network specifications of the user’s site, and set the following
addresses when needed.
u NOTE u
Specify the IP address of the DX Console. u NOTE u
Set the addresses by performing the individual setup procedures set forth in the
Maintenance Utility volume.
- For Subnet Mask setup
- For Default Gateway setup
- For Secure Host setup
- For Secure Net setup
{MU:3.7_Secure Net}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-29
8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX Console 3. Press the [Check] button.
1. Press the button, and select “Network Check”.
4. Confirm the display on the operation panel.
u NOTES u
- “OK” is displayed in the GOOD indication when “Default Gateway” is specified.
- Take the troubleshooting procedures when the NO GOOD indication appears.
{Troubleshooting}
→ The “Network Check” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-30
8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL 4. Click on [NEXT].
u NOTE u
Before procedures, please confirm the part number of the software.
{Front cover : lSoftware for this machine}
1. Insert the RU-APL CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the DX Console.
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
3. Select “For FTP-Server”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
Always select “For FTP-Server”. If “For Client PC” is selected, the installation cannot be
done properly.
If you inadvertently click [SET] with "For Client PC" chosen, perform installation again 6. Click on [Finish] when the installation is completed.
as directed under "Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper
RU PC-TOOL Installation."
{IN: Appendix 8._Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PC-
TOOL Installation.}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-31
7. Check that the following message appears, and press the [Enter] key.
REFERENCE
The following window appears to register a user on the PC. When the RU PC-TOOL
has been already installed, the window indicating that the registration is completed
appears.
8. Check that the following message appears, and press the [Enter] key.
u NOTE u
The following message appears a total of three times. Press the [Enter] key each time
the message appears.
→ Return to the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-32
8.6 Installing RU Software 4. Click on [PING].
REFERENCE
This section describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made as
follows:
INSTALL VERSION: 1.1
LANGUAGE: English
BRAND TYPE: U.S.A (FMSU) 5. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
SCREEN TYPE: HOSPITAL
LINAC CASSETTE: NOT USE
l [GOOD indication]
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11: |
2. Click on [NEW]. | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l [NO GOOD indication]

Other than above is all abnormal. (The selected IP address of the RU is displayed.)
u NOTE u
{Troubleshooting}
3. Enter Install "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR".
u NOTE u
If the "Reader Unit IP Address" setting was changed from the RU operation panel before
RU software installation, enter the changed address.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-33
6. Click on [INSTALL]. 10. Select "BRAND TYPE".
REFERENCE
When clicking on [INSTALL], “Under maintenance” appears on the operation panel of
the RU.
11. Select an operation panel screen type (SCREEN TYPE), and then click [OK].
7. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
The proper selection varies with a network connection between the RU and DX Console.
Make a proper selection in accordance with the employed network connection. If an
improper selection is made, the connection between the RU and DX Console is not
guaranteed.
8. Select "INSTALL VERSION". - When a "1:1 connection" is established between the RU and DX Console, choose
"CLINIC."
- When an "N:N connection" is established between the RU and DX Console, choose
"HOSPITAL."
9. Select "LANGUAGE".
REFERENCE
The following languages can be selected during the installation.
Japanese, English, Germany, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Danish,
Norwegian, Korean, ChineseSimplified, ChineseTraditional, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Hebrew, Russian, Turkish, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Thai, Indonesian
12. If a LINAC CASSETTE is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the LINAC
CASSETTE is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-34
13. If, for instance, the institution wishes to use nondefault CONFIGURATION 15. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME".
information, edit the CONFIGURATION information by performing the procedure
set forth under "4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION" in the Maintenance Utility volume. u INSTRUCTION u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the DX Console to be connected with the RU.
14. Click on [SET]. REFERENCE

Up to 32 DX Console's may be registered as image transfer destinations. Of the DX
Console's registered, up to four DX Console's are switchable as master CL's.
For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen, see
"4.14 EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-35
16. Confirm the installation precautions. 18. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
key twice.
CAUTION
While the flash ROM is being written into, never turn OFF the RU or DX Console. If you
turn OFF the power, the program stored in the memory becomes damaged and cannot
restart.
17. Click on [SET].

When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the DX Console display.
While the flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u NOTE u
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 7 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
19. Click on [OK].
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-36
20. Check the version of the RU software, and close RU PC-TOOL. 21. Verify that the RU's LED is extinguished, and then turn OFF the RU.
REFERENCE
The message "Under maintenance" is displayed on the operation panel. However,
turning OFF the RU power does not affect the RU's functionality.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 1 and perform install procedures all
over again.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-37
8.7 Installation of the 50 Micron Upgrade Kit REFERENCES
- If you have pressed the [Enter] key without making any entry in #1 of the procedure 3,
u NOTES u the error message does not appear. Enter the RU’s IP address and press the [Enter]
key.
- Only when the user has purchased the 50 micron upgrade kit to use the IP type HR in the
machine, perform installation according to the procedures below.
- When the 50 micron upgrade kit is not to be installed, or when the HR reading option key
has been already installed, the following procedures are not necessary. Proceed to “9.
Image/Conveyance Checks”.
1. Insert the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM into the drive of the DX Console.
→ The installation menu automatically appears. - If you have entered a wrong IP address and pressed the [Enter] key in #1 of the procedure
3, the error message appears. Press the [Enter] key to exit. Double-click the CD-ROM
drive from the explorer to again perform the installation from the procedure 2.

3. Input the RU’s IP address (example: 172.16.1.11), and press the [Enter] key.
→ The message “Installation Completed” appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-38
4. Check to make sure that the message indicating the completion of the installation
is displayed, and press the [Enter] key.
5. Remove the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM from the drive of the DX Console.
7. Apply the cassette insertion operation label attached to the 50 micron upgrade kit
over the cassette insertion operation label which has been stuck to the machine.
8. Change the attached “CR-IR359 instruction manual (for options)” attached to the
50 micron upgrade kit.
REFERENCE
Components of the 50 micron upgrade kit
1. Cassette Insertion Operation Labels
2. HR reading option key CD-ROM
3. CR-IR instruction manual (for options)
u NOTE u
As sales of the machine as an image reader for use of mammography are not permitted
by authorities concerned in USA and Canada, the machine cannot be used as
mammographic equipment.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-39
9. Image/Conveyance Checks 3. Perform IP exposures.
u NOTE u
In this section, the following checks are made as last-time verification for final placement.
Be sure to make exposure under the following X-ray tube voltage conditions. Otherwise,
- Conveyance checks
the image cannot be correctly checked.
- Image checks
- For tungsten X-ray tube: 80 kVp
- For molybdenum X-ray tube: 25 kVp
9.1 Check Before Procedures
u INSTRUCTIONS u
u NOTES u - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST and HR) used at the
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in the user’s site with the following doses.
hospital should be employed. - With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data exposed. second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. l When the IP type ST
REFERENCE - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
The screen contents of the RU's operation panel vary with the LANGUAGE and - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
SCREEN TYPE selections made during installation. For details on the screen contents - Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) size
of the RU's operation panel, see "1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents" in - Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
the "Machine Description" volume. Voltage 80 kVp
{MD:1.3.3_Operation Panel Display Screen Contents} Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec.
2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and image l When the IP type HR
accumulated on the IP to be used.
- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
{Instruction Manual} - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18cm x 24cm HR size or of 24cm x 30cm HR size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 kVp
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec.
l When the IP type HR is to be exposed with the molybdenum X-ray tube

- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18cm x 24cm HR size or of 24cm x 30cm HR size
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 25 kVp
Amperage 100 mA
Time 0.53 sec.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-40
9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks 2. Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output film or on the
image displayed on the image monitor.
u NOTE u u CHECK u
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks should be There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.
performed with the "MENU" specified below.
If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the two IPs
1. Read the IP prepared in “9.1 Check before procedures” by the DX Console menus of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused by the machine
“QC/TEST,” “Image Format” and “SINGLE,” and output an image. or X-ray tube.
l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

{Troubleshooting}
l If positions of uneven density difference are different
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-41
3. Check the image format.
Make sure that the white blank portion is 4 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
The white blank portion should be 4 mm or less.
If anything abnormal is found:
{Troubleshooting}
u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending
on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the
actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-42
10. Confirming the S Value 2. Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the
radiation dose is 1 mR.
10.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST u NOTE u

If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube voltage at
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 1 mR of 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of 1
radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
output the read image, and check that the S value for 1 mR of radiation, which is determined - Distance: ___cm
from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the control limits. - Tube voltage: ___kVp
- Tube current: ___mA
REFERENCE
- Time: ___sec
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- S value control limits for user adjustments
REFERENCE
Upper limit: 200 x 1.5 = 300
Lower limit: 200/1.5 = 133 If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments values and make fine adjustments:
Upper limit: 200 x 1.3 = 260
Lower limit: 200/1.3 = 154
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after
service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician
adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
1. Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray
radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline is
approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove the
cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center.
3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the radiation dose
five times and average the measured values.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in step
3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table."
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-43
5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to secondary 8. Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S
erasure. value printed on the film or displayed on the DX Console screen) and the average
{Instruction Manual} radiation dose value obtained in step 3.
--- Example ---
u NOTE u Displayed S value: 200
Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on the Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 1.04
employed IP.
6. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x
35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) IP to X-ray radiation.
u NOTE u
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution.
7. Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11

"SINGLE" DX Console menus, and then output the read image.
S value for 1 mR of radiation = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value

= 200 x 1.04
= 208
9. Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is
within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
154 < 208 < 260
Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation,"

which was determined in step 8, is between the
upper and lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not between
the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction and then confirm
the S value again.
{MU:7.3 [5-5-5]_Sensitivity Correction (ST)}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-44
10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR 1. Align the X-ray radiation field with the cassette size. Position the
reference point of the dosimeter sensor so that it coincides with the
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 20 size of the cassette to be used.
mR of radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray
exposure, output the read image, and check that the S value for 20 mR of radiation,
which is determined from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the
control limits.
REFERENCE
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- S value control limits for user adjustments
Upper limit: 120 x 1.5 = 180
Lower limit: 120/1.5 = 80
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments
Upper limit: 120 x 1.3 = 156
Lower limit: 120/1.3 = 92
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time
after service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service
technician adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-45
2. Set the tube voltage to 25 kVp. Set the target/filter to molybdenum/molybdenum. 3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the
Confirm the exposure conditions under which the IP radiation dose of 20 mR is radiation dose five times and average the measured values.
achieved. --- Example ---
2 2
l Achieved IP radiation dose = Dosimeter reading x L /L' First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the dosimeter sensor 19.6 20.0 20.2 20.4 18.8 19.8
L': Distance between the focus and the cassette top frame
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose
determined in step 3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table."
5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to
secondary erasure.
{Instruction Manual}
u NOTE u
Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on
the employed IP.
6. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 18 cm x

24 cm or 24 cm x 30 cm IP to X-ray radiation.
u NOTE u
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution.
7. Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10

and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image
Format" and "SINGLE" DX Console menus, and then output the read
u NOTE u image.
If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 20 mR, leave the tube
voltage at 25 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a
radiation dose of 20 mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
- Distance: cm - Tube voltage: kVp
- Tube current: mA - Time: sec
REFERENCE
If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
values and make fine adjustments:
- Distance (L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the
dosimeter sensor) 55 cm
- Distance (L': Distance between the focus and the reference point of the
dosimeter sensor) 60 cm
- Tube voltage 80kVp
- Tube current 100mA
- Time 0.053sec
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-46
8. Determine the "S value for 20 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value
(the S value printed on the film or displayed on the DX Console screen)
and the average radiation dose value obtained in step 3.
---Example ---
Displayed S value: 120
Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 19.8
S value for 20 mR of Displayed S Average radiation

= x / 20 (mR)
radiation value dose value
= 120 x 19.8 / 20
= 118.8
9. Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8,
is within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
92 < 118.8 < 156
Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation,"

which was determined in step 8, is between the
upper and lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not
between the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction and
then confirm the S value again.
{MU:7.3 [5-5-6]_Sensitivity Correction (HR)}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-47
11. Backing Up the Scanner Data 12. Powering OFF the DX Console/RU
1. Starts the RU PC-TOOL. 1. Shut down the system of the DX Console.
{4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. Shut down the system of the RU.
2. Back up the scanner data (SCN ALL DATA) by using "SCN ALL DATA" under
"BACKUP".
{4.15_BACKUP}
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
IN-48
13. Cleaning the DX Console/RU 14. Exposure Marker Instruction Label

1. Clean the monitor and covers of the DX Console with a dry cloth. 1. Apply the exposure marker instruction label suitable for the local language.
2. Clean the covers of the RU with a moistened cloth.
3. Peel the seal off the operation panel.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
IN-49
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-50
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
IN-51
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-1
Appendix 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective Grounding of the
Equipment and Clamp Locations
GROUNDING INSTRUCTION
Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the additional
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the patient
protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical standard of the country to which
environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. Refer to Medical
the equipment is to be installed.
System Standard, IEC60601-1-1.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and isolated <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures for additional 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
protective grounding” on the next page. connection of additional protective grounding.
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move the
facility construction. connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital grade earth
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used room” terminal.
are given below. 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply from
the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-used
room is equipotential to that in the other medically-used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Non-Medically Used Room

Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual Appx IN-1
Appx IN-2
Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with the No. Name Qty. Remarks
Anti-Topple Retainer 1 Bracket (front) 1 356Y0475

2 Bracket (rear) 1 356Y0502
3 Bracket (left-hand side) 1 356Y0499
1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit
4 Bracket (right-hand side) 1 356Y0498
5 Spacer (1 mm) 6 347N2108
6 Spacer (2 mm) 4 347N2109
7 Cap 2 317S1064
8 Hex head socket bolt (8x15) 2 304S1000820
9 Spring washer (SW8) 6 309S0220008
10 Plain washer (W8) 6 309S0110008
11 Hex socket head button bolt (8x20) 4 304S5000820
12 Anchor nut (Na8) 4 305N100033
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-3
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer 2. Place the assembled anti-topple retainer on the location where the machine is to
be settled. While holding not to cause the anti-topple retainer to shift, mark the
1. Assemble the anti-topple retainer to determine the locations where the anchor locations where the holes for embedding the anchor nuts are to be bored with a
nuts are to be embedded. pen or the like.
REFERENCE
The front bracket (for use on the front face) and the rear bracket (for use on the rear
face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes. Although they are of similar
shapes when viewed from the surface, you can distinguish them by checking from the
back.
The front bracket has nuts welded on the inner side.
The rear bracket has no nut welded on the inner side.
<Reference value>
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-4
3. Once move the anti-topple retainer. Strike a center punch at the center of a 4. Drill holes with a diameter of 12.5 mm and a depth of 35 mm at the four marked
marked position to easily drill a hole. positions.
CAUTION
When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles. Drilled chips might scatter.
u NOTE u
When drilling a hole, exercise care not to tilt the drill. If the drill is tilted, the anchor
nut cannot be embedded straight. As a result, there is possibility that the anti-topple
retainer cannot be correctly retained.
REFERENCE
When drilling a hole, use of a vacuum cleaner is recommended. If the hole is drilled
while sucking the chips by the vacuum cleaner, the depth of the hole can be easily
checked.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-5
5. Strike the anchor nut by a hammer to embed the nut into the four drilled holes. 6. Place the anti-topple retainer in place. Put in spacers with thicknesses of 1 mm
and 2 mm into the bolt retaining positions on the rear side, and temporarily retain
u NOTES u the retainer with the button bolts.
- When embedding the anchor nut, strike the top of the anchor nut vertically to the nut. If
the top of the anchor nut deforms, the bolt for retaining the bracket cannot be installed. u NOTE u
- Embed the anchor nut until its top does not protrude from the floor surface. Be sure to use the button bolt as a bolt to retain the anti-topple retainer. If a common
bolt is used, the bolt head and the adjustable foot might come into contact when the
machine is moved, causing deformation on the adjustable foot.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-6
7. Remove the hex head bolts and the screws to remove the bracket. 8. Adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that a distance from the upper surface
of the nut of the adjustable foot to the bottom of the machine is approx. 5 mm, in
order to mount the bracket on the machine. After the adjustment, check to make
sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable
foot. If there is an aperture between the nuts, the machine retaining bracket cannot be
fixed properly.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-7
9. Insert the rear bracket from the rear of the machine between the nut of the
adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against
the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket
is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained.
- When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture
between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained.
REFERENCE
face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes. Although they are of similar
shapes when viewed from the surface, you can distinguish them by checking from the
back.
The front bracket has nuts welded on the inner side.
The rear bracket has no nut welded on the inner side.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-8
10. Insert the front bracket from the front of the machine between the nut of the 11. Slowly move the machine toward the bracket retained on the floor, until the
adjustable foot and the bottom of the machine. While pushing the bracket against bracket on the rear of the machine comes against the bracket retained on the
the machine, fasten the nut of the adjustable foot for retaining. floor.
u NOTES u u NOTES u
- Be sure to fasten the nut while pushing the bracket against the machine. If the bracket - If the machine cannot be moved as the bracket retained on the bracket comes into
is pushed insufficiently, the machine may not be able to be properly retained. contact with the bracket mounted on the machine when the machine is to be moved,
- When fastening the nut of the adjustable foot, exercise care not to cause an aperture height adjustment is necessary with additional spacers. Take the procedure 12.
between the two nuts. The bracket might not be able to be properly retained. - If the machine can move until the bracket on the rear of the machine comes against
the bracket retained on the floor, the procedure 12 need not be taken. Proceed to the
procedure 13.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-9
12. Once pull out the machine. Adjust the height of the bracket retained on the floor 13. Check to make sure that the spacer of 1mm thickness cannot be inserted into an
by adding a spacer. Then move the machine again. aperture between the bracket retained on the floor and the bracket mounted on
the machine.
u NOTE u
Check the portion where the bracket retained on the floor is in contact wit the bracket on u NOTES u
the rear of the machine. Add a spacer of 1mm or 2mm thickness accordingly. - If the spacer of 1mm thickness can be inserted into an aperture between the bracket
retained on the floor and the bracket mounted on the machine, the spacer should be
removed and the height need be adjusted again. Take the procedure 14.
- If the spacer of 1mm thickness cannot be inserted into an aperture between the bracket
retained on the floor and the bracket mounted on the machine, the procedure 14 need
not be taken. Proceed to the procedure 15.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-10
14. Once pull out the machine. Loosen the button bolt, remove the spacer, and 15. While pushing the bracket retained on the floor against the machine, additionally
fasten the button bolt to retain the bracket. After the bracket is retained, move fasten the button bolt to retain the bracket mounted on the floor. When the
the machine, and again check as instructed in the procedure 13. bracket retained on the floor does not move, once loosen the button bolt, push
the bracket against the machine, and fasten the button nut to retain the bracket
u NOTE u on the floor.
When the spacer is removed, always take the procedure 13 to check the aperture.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-11
16. Put on the bolt on the front of the machine, retain the bracket, and put on the bolt
cover.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-12
Appendix 3 Assembling and Securing the n Supporter Body

No. Name Qty. Remarks
Supporter 1 Stanchion (left-hand side) 1
2 Stanchion (right-hand side) 1
3 Shelf 1
1. Components of the Supporter 4 Connecting strut 2
5 Bracket (left-hand side) 1
6 Bracket (right-hand side) 1
n Supporter Body
7 Bracket (front) 1
8 Bracket (rear) 1
9 Adjustable foot 4
10 Spacer 2
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-13
n Options, Accessories n Arm Options
11 Arm 1
12 Bracket 1
n Base Options
13 Connecting bracket 1
14 Base 1
n Cassette Rack Options
15 Cassette rack 1
Cassette rack
16 1
(for long cassette)
n Optional Wall-Fixing Fitting (Long Type)
17 Bracket 2 Wall-fixing fitting (long type)
18 Bracket (for coupling) 1
n Optional Items
19 Shock absorber 4
20 Cap 2
21 Hex head bolt (8x20) 2
2 For supporter body
22 Spring washer (SW8)
4 For retaining the anchor
23 Plain washer (W8)
4 For retaining the anchor
24 Hex socket head button bolt (8x20) 4 For retaining the anchor
25 Anchor nut (Na8) 4 For retaining the anchor
Cross recessed pan head tapping
26 8 For fixing to the wall
screw (4x40)
27 Washer (W4) 8
28 Stem band 4
29 Insulock 11
30 Insulock plate 11
31 NK clamp 10
32 Retaining band 1
33 Seal 24
4 For arm
4 For base
34 Screw (T5x12)
2 For cassette rack
2 For cassette rack (for long cassette)
8 Wall-fixing fitting (long type)
35 Screw (T6x15) 4 For supporter body
36 W sems screw (B4x12) 4 For arm
37 W sems screw (B4x8) 3 For arm
Cross recessed pan head tapping
37 8 For wall-fixing retainer (long type)
screw (4x10)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-14
2. Assembling the Supporter 2. Mount the connecting struts on one of the stanchions.
1. Attach the adjustable feet to the right- and left-hand stanchions.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-15
3. Mount the struts assembled in the step 2 on the other stanchion. 4. Screw the struts.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the struts with the two screws temporarily tightened.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-16
5. Mount the shelf. 6. Screw down the shelf.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the shelf with the two screws loosely installed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-17
7. Mount the brackets. 8. Mount the shock absorbers.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-18
3. Attachment of the Options 2. Screw the arm.
3.1 Mounting the Arm
1. Mount the arm.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the struts with the two screws temporarily tightened.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-19
3. Lift the connection at the tip of the arm by means of a tool such as pincers. 4. Secure the supporter.
Attach the bracket and screw it.
u NOTE u
When the arm (optional) has been mounted, be sure to retain the supporter according
to “Appendix 3-5 Securing the Supporter”.
{IN: Appendix 3-5_Securing the Supporter}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-20
3.2 Mounting the Base 2. Mount the base to the supporter.
REFERENCE
The base can be placed either on the right or the left at symmetrical positions.
1. Attach the bracket to the base.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-21
3.3 Mounting the Cassette Rack
REFERENCE
The cassette rack can be placed either on the right or the left at symmetrical positions.
n Mounting the Cassette Rack n Mounting the Cassette Rack (for Use with a Long Cassette)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-22
4. Securing the Machine 1. Adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that a distance from the upper surface
WARNING sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot.
Be sure to fix the supporter to the floor or to the wall to secure the machine according u NOTE u
to “Appendix 3-5 Securing the Supporter” in a site where a long cassette is used.
{IN: Appendix 3-5_Securing the Supporter}
fixed properly.
u NOTE u
Be sure to take off the power inlet cover when using the supporter.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-23
u NOTES u
REFERENCE
face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes.
The rear bracket has pins on its back surface.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-24
3. Move the machine into the supporter. 4. Fix the adjustable feet on the front face of the machine.
CAUTION
supporter, exercise care so that your fingers and other parts of your body are not
caught between the supporter and machine.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-25
5. Place the bracket (for the front face) and secure with hex head bolts.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-26
5. Securing the Supporter n REFERENCE INFORMATION
Refer to “Appendix 3-5.1 Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing
WARNING Modes” on the conditions of the floor/wall and how to fix when the supporter is to be fixed to
the floor/wall.
Be sure to fix the supporter to the floor or to the wall to secure the machine in a site {IN: Appendix 3-5.1_Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing
where a long cassette is used. Modes}
u NOTE u
When the arm (optional) has been mounted, be sure to fix the supporter to the floor or the
wall to secure the machine.
To secure the supporter, it is sometimes fixed to the floor and sometimes to the wall.
Depending on the conditions on the installation site, follow the reference procedures below to
fix the supporter to the floor or to the wall, before securing the machine.
l When the supporter is to be fixed to the floor

{IN: Appendix 3-5.3_Fixing the Supporter to the Floor}
l When directly fixing the supporter to the wall

{IN: Appendix 3-5.4_Fixing the Supporter to the Wall}
l When fixing the supporter to the wall by means of a wall-fixing fitting (long
type)
{IN: Appendix 3-5.5_Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via the Wall-Retaining Fitting (Long
Type)}
l When fixing the supporter to the wall via an anchor nut

{IN: Appendix 3-5.6_Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via Anchor Nuts}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-27
5.1 Floor/Wall Conditions and Fixing Method in Respective Fixing Modes
The floor/wall conditions and the fixing method in respective fixing modes are as follows:
Floor/wall conditions Fixing method
l When the supporter is to be fixed to the floor - Concrete floor - Strike an anchor at four positions, and secure the supporter
- Compression strength of 245kgf/cm2 or higher is assumed. with the bolts.
l When the supporter is to be directly fixed to the wall
In the case of a wall made of steel or - Pillar of steel partition or lightweight steel aggregate of - Secure the supporter with four or more cross recessed pan
lightweight steel aggregate lightweight steel partition head tapping screws (4x40).
- A pillar or aggregate with a thickness of 0.6 mm or thicker is
assumed.
In the case of a wooden wall - Wooden pillar on wall foundation - Secure the supporter with four or more course sleds.
- A pillar of Hinoki (Japanese cypress) with a water content of - It is assumed that the supporter is fixed to the pillar in a
8.8%/ pine tree with a water content of 11.0%/cedar with a screwing depth of 27 mm or more.
water content of 9.0% is assumed.
l When the supporter is to be fixed to the wall by anchor nuts - Concrete floor - Strike an anchor at two positions, and secure the supporter
- Compression strength of 245kgf/cm2 or higher is assumed. with the bolts.
l When the supporter is fixed to the wall by a wall-retaining fitting (long type) (*1)
In the case of a wall made of steel or - Pillar of steel partition or lightweight steel aggregate of - Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall with four
lightweight steel aggregate lightweight steel partition or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40).
- A pillar or aggregate with a thickness of 0.6 mm or thicker is - Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the supporter with
assumed. four or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40).
In the case of a wooden wall - Wooden pillar on wall foundation - Secure the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall with
- A pillar of Hinoki (Japanese cypress) with a water content of four or more course sleds.
8.8%/ pine tree with a water content of 11.0%/cedar with a - It is assumed that the supporter is fixed to the pillar in a
water content of 9.0% is assumed. screwing depth of 27 mm or more.
- Fix the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the supporter with
four or more cross recessed pan head tapping screws (4x40).
(*1) If a part of the wall where the supporter is to be fixed is wider than the supporter, the supporter is fixed to the wall via an optional wall-retaining fitting (long type).
Whether the supporter is directly fixed to the wall or fixed via the wall-retaining fitting (long type) should be decided depending on the following values as reference.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-28
5.2 Nothing
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-29
5.3 Fixing the Supporter to the Floor 2. Once move the supporter. Strike the center punch at the center of the marked
position to easily drill a hole.
1. Put the assembled supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. While holding
the supporter not to shift, mark with a pen or the like the positions to be bored
where the anchor nuts are to be embedded.
<Reference value>
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-30
3. Drill holes with a diameter of 12.5 mm and a depth of 35 mm at the four marked 4. Strike the anchor nut by a hammer to embed the nut into the four drilled holes.
positions.
u NOTES u
- When embedding the anchor nut, strike the top of the anchor nut vertically to the nut. If
CAUTION the top of the anchor nut deforms, the bolt for retaining the bracket cannot be installed.
When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles. Drilled chips might scatter. - Embed the anchor nut until its top does not protrude from the floor surface.
u NOTE u
When drilling a hole, exercise care not to tilt the drill. If the drill is tilted, the anchor nut
cannot be embedded straight. As a result, there is possibility that the supporter cannot
be correctly retained.
REFERENCE
checked.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-31
5. Place the supporter where it is to be fixed. Fix the supporter to the floor by the 6. Secure the machine.
button bolts. {IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)}
u NOTE u
Always use button bolts to fix the supporter. If a normal bolt is used, the head of the
bolt comes into contact with the adjustable foot when the machine is moved, and the
adjustable foot might get deformed.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-32
5.4 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall <Reference value>
1. Place the assembled supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. Check the

conditions of the wall at the installation site. Mark the positions to be screwed
with a pen or the like.
014-247-02E
01.31.2014 FM8222
Appx IN-33
2. Screw the supporter. 3. Secure the machine.
REFERENCE {IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)}
Make a preparatory hole of approx. 1 mm on the wall before screwing. This makes the
screws easy to be tightened.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-34
5.5 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via the Wall-Retaining Fitting 2. Attach the wall-retaining fitting (long type) to the wall.
(Long Type) u NOTE u
Observe the wall conditions at the user’s site, and secure the fitting to the pillars of the
1. Assemble the wall-retaining fitting (long type).
wall.
REFERENCE
The weight of the assembled wall-retaining fitting (long type) is approx. 2.1 kg.
<Reference value>
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-35
3. Mount the supporter to the wall-retaining fitting (long type). 4. Secure the machine.
{IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)}
<Reference value>
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-36
5.6 Fixing the Supporter to the Wall via Anchor Nuts <Reference value>
1. Place the assembled supporter on a position where it is to be fixed. Check the

conditions of the wall at the installation site. Mark the positions to be screwed
with a pen or the like.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-37
2. Once move the supporter. Strike the center punch at the center of the marked 3. Drill holes with a diameter of 12.5 mm and a depth of 35 mm at the two marked
position to easily drill a hole. positions.
CAUTION
When drilling a hole, wear protective goggles. Drilled chips might scatter.
u NOTE u
When drilling a hole, exercise care not to tilt the drill. If the drill is tilted, the anchor nut
cannot be embedded straight. As a result, there is possibility that the supporter cannot
be correctly retained.
REFERENCE
checked.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-38
4. Strike the anchor nut by a hammer to embed the nut into the two drilled holes. 5. Place the supporter on a position where it is to be fixed.
u NOTES u
- Strike the top of the anchor nut horizontally when embedding the anchor nut. If the top
of the anchor nut deforms, the bolt for securing the supporter cannot be attached.
- Embed the anchor nut until its top does not protrude from the floor surface.
6. Secure the machine.

{IN: Appendix 3-5.7_Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-39
5.7 Securing the Machine (when the Supporter has been Fixed)
1. Adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that a distance from the upper surface
sure that there is no aperture between the two nuts of the adjustable foot.
u NOTE u
fixed properly.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-40
u NOTES u
REFERENCE
face) of the anti-topple retainer have different shapes.
The rear bracket has pins on its back surface.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-41
3. Put on the spacer on the bracket (for the front). 4. Insert the front bracket from the front of the machine between the nut of the
u NOTES u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-42
5. Move the machine into the supporter. 6. Install the hex head bolts.
CAUTION
supporter, exercise care so that your fingers and other parts of your body are not
caught between the supporter and machine.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-43
6. Applying the Seal 7. Nothing
1. Apply the seals to the screw holes on the supporter.
REFERENCE
The number of seals to be applied depends on whether an optional part has been
mounted. The locations where the seals might be applied are shown below.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-44
8. Nothing
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-45
Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL 1. Additionally Registering the Master CL (Procedures on

the CL1)
This section describes the procedures for additionally register the CL2 (172.16.1.22) into the
system that consists of the RU (ru0: 172.16.1.11) and CL1 (master CL: 172.16.1.21), and for 1. Turn ON the power of the DX Console.
switching the master CL from CL1 to CL2.
REFERENCE
Up to 32 DX Console's may be registered as image transfer destinations. Of the DX
Console's registered, up to four DX Console's are switchable as master CL's.
For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen, see "4.14
EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-46
3. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. 4. Click the Start menu of Windows. Type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\
Turn ON the RU power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left on RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe"] and press the [Enter] key.
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
u NOTE u
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-47
5. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the master CL is to be added, 6. Register the master CL (CL2) created at procedure 5 into the master CL.
and enter the "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the master CL to be added.
REFERENCE
It takes about three minutes to register the master CL (CL2) after you click [SET].
7. Close the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-48
2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2) 5. Enter the host name (ru0) of the RU in and its IP address
(172.16.1.11) in .
1. Start the Service Utility.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual/Maintenance Utility (MU)/1. Starting and
Exiting the Service Utility} 6. Select in the "Add Node" field, and click on .
2. Click on [Setup Configuration Item].
→ The "FRUP Setup" screen appears.
3. Click on [ALL OTHER NODES] of [NETWORK CONFIG].
7. Check in the "Attribute" field ( → ).
8. Type "ru0" in .
REFERENCE
The name should not necessarily be the same as the host name.
9. Click on .
→ Registering the network information is now completed.

4. Click on .
→ The "New Node" dialog box appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-49
3. Registering the Machine Information (CONNECTING 4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility
EQUIPMENT)
1. From the "Config (F)" menu in the "Setup Configuration Item" window, select
"Save (V)".
1. Click on [CONNECTING EQUIPMENT] in the "Setup Configuration Item" window.
→ The save confirmation window appears.
2. Click on .
→ The "Connecting Equipment" dialog box appears. 2. Click on .

3. Register the machine information as shown below.
→ The setup is saved.
3. From the "Config (F)" menu, select "Close (C)".

→ The "Service Utility" window appears back on screen.
4. Exit the Service Utility.
I. Select "Reader".
II. Select the host name (e.g., ru0).
III. If several RU's are connected, select the second and subsequent host name(s) in
"Equipment #2" and so on.
4. Click on .
→ Registering the machine information is now completed.

The "Setup Configuration Item" window appears back on screen.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-50
5. Verifying Switching of Master CL 4. Press the button, and select “Set master CL”.

3. Press the [Utility] button on the operation panel.
→ The “Utility” window appears.
→ The “Select master Console” window appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-51
6. Press the button, and select “CL2”. 8. Turn ON the power of the RU.
9. Perform reading, and make sure that the image is transferred to the master CL.
REFERENCE
The power of the RU automatically turns OFF about 1 minute after the master CL is set.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-52
Appendix 5. Changing the RU's IP Address

This appendix describes the procedure for using the machine with the RU's IP address
changed.
1. Starting the machine Maintenance Utility

1. Start the machine Maintenance Utility as directed under "8.1 Starting the Machine
Maintenance Utility."
{IN:8.1_Starting the machine Maintenance Utility}
2. Setting the RU IP Address

1. Change the RU's IP address as directed under "8.2 Setting the RU IP Address."
{IN:8.2_Setting the RU IP Address}
3. Setting the FTP Server IP address

1. Change the RU's FTP server IP address as directed under "8.3 Setting the FTP
Server IP address."
{IN:8.3_Setting the FTP Server IP address}
2. Reinstall the RU software as directed under "Appendix 6. Reinstalling the RU
Software."
u INSTRUCTION u
After the RU's IP address is changed, be sure to reinstall the RU software.
{IN: Appendix 6._Reinstalling the RU Software}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-53
Appendix 6. Reinstalling the RU Software 4. Click on [DELETE].
This appendix describes the RU software reinstallation procedure that is performed when,
for instance, the machine is to be used with the RU's IP address changed or the RU to be
installed is improperly set up.
To reinstall the RU software, first delete the RU registered in the RU PC-TOOL, and then
install the RU software. u NOTE u
If you click [DELETE] without inserting the RU-APL CD-ROM into the DX Console, the
following error message appears. If the error message appears, insert the RU-APL CD-
1. Deleting an Installed RU ROM into the DX Console and then repeat steps 2 and beyond.

5. Click on [OK].
6. Verify that the RU selected in step 3 is deleted from "LIST OF EXISTING RU."
→ The "RU PC-TOOL" window opens.
3. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select an RU.
2. Reinstalling the RU Software

Reinstall the RU software.
For the RU software reinstallation procedure, see "Appendix 7. Installing the RU Software."
{IN: Appendix 7._Installing the RU Software}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-54
Appendix 7. Installing the RU Software

This appendix describes the procedure for installing the RU software.
Before installing the RU software, you have to run a network check from the RU's machine
Maintenance Utility to verify the connection to the DX Console.
1. Verifying the connection to the DX Console

1. Run a network check as directed under "8.4 Checking the Connection with the DX
Console."
{IN:8.4_Checking the Connection with the DX Console}
2. Installing the RU PC-TOOL
u NOTE u
If the RU PC-TOOL is already installed on the DX Console, the step below need not be
performed. In such an instance, skip to "Appendix 7-3 Installing the RU software."
{IN: Appendix 7-3_Installing the RU Software}
1. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "8.5 Installing the RU PC-TOOL."

{IN:8.5_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
3. Installing the RU Software

1. Install the RU software as directed under "8.6 Installing RU Software."
{IN:8.6_Installing RU Software}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-55
Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be 1. Corrective Procedure 1

Performed after Improper RU PC- This section describes the procedure for aborting the installation process and installing the
RU PC-TOOL.
TOOL Installation 1. If you clicked [SET] with "For Client PC" chosen, click [Cancel] in a window that
opens next.
If "For Client PC" is inadvertently chosen when the RU PC-TOOL is to be installed, install the
RU PC-TOOL as directed below.
When the RU PC-TOOL installation procedure is improperly performed, use either of the
following corrective procedures:
l Abort the installation process and then perform the installation

procedure again.
If you find in the middle of the RU PC-TOOL installation process that "For Client PC" is
inadvertently chosen, you can abort the installation process.
In this instance, abort the installation process and install the RU PC-TOOL. For details
on the procedure, see "Appendix 8-1 Corrective Procedure 1."
{IN: Appendix 8-1_Corrective Procedure 1}
l Delete the CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform the installation procedure
again.
If you complete the RU PC-TOOL installation process with "For Client PC" inadvertently
chosen, the CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed.
In this instance, delete the CLIENT PC-TOOL with the RU-APL CD-ROM and then 2. When a message appears to ask whether you want to cancel the installation
install the RU PC-TOOL. For details on the procedure, see "Appendix 8-2 Corrective process, click [Yes].
Procedure 2."
{IN: Appendix 8-2_Corrective Procedure 2}
3. Click on [Finish].
4. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "Appendix 7-2 Installing the RU PC-
TOOL."
{IN: Appendix 7-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-56
2. Corrective Procedure 2 5. Click on [Remove].
This section describes the procedure for deleting the CLIENT PC-TOOL with the RU-APL
CD-ROM and installing the RU PC-TOOL.
1. If the CLIENT PC-TOOL is running, exit it.
3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
6. When the uninstallation process is completed, click [Finish].
4. Click on [NEXT].
7. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "Appendix 7-2 Installing the RU PC-
TOOL."
{IN: Appendix 7-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-57
Appendix 9. Installing the Mobile Kit 2. Attaching the Tape

Apply the tape at the front side end of the right-hand side cover.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
IWhen the mobile kit is to be used, the retaining bracket need be attached to the upper part
Applying the tape, the cover edge can be prevented from getting broken by vibration.
of the subscanning unit. Check that the retaining bracket has been attached when reinstalling
the subscanning unit, if the subscanning unit has been removed and then reinstalled during
the servicing. Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “9.1 Subscanning
Unit” for the retaining bracket.
1. Loosen the screws and remove
the front cover.
1. Components of the Mobile Kit

The mobile kit consists of a tape and the anti-topple retainer kit (except the anchor nut).
- Tape (382N1885): 1
- Anti-topple retainer kit: 1 set (except anchor nut)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-58
2. Apply the tape to the right-hand 3. Installing the Anti-Topple Retainer Kit
side cover.
Refer to the Installation “Appendix 2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer” for
u NOTE u the details of the installation procedures for the anti-topple retainer kit.
Be sure to apply the tape with {IN:Appendix 2._Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainer}
its end pressed against a step
(recess) of the right-hand side
cover.
3. Put the lower part of the front

cover under the housing,
before attaching. Then, retain it
with the screws while holding
the cover.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-59
Appendix 10. Uninstallation of the 50 Micron REFERENCES

- If you have pressed the [Enter] key without making any entry in #1 of the procedure 3,
Upgrade Kit the error message does not appear. Enter the RU’s IP address and press the [Enter]
key.
Described below are the procedures for uninstalling the 50 micron upgrade kit.
1. Insert the 50 micron upgrade kit CD-ROM into the drive of the DX Console.
→ The installation menu automatically appears.

- If you have entered a wrong IP address and pressed the [Enter] key in #1 of the procedure
3, the error message appears. Press the [Enter] key to exit. Double-click the CD-ROM
drive from the explorer to again perform the installation from the procedure 2.
3. Input the RU’s IP address (example: 172.16.1.11), and press the [Enter] key.
→ The message “Uninstallation Completed” appears.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Appx IN-60
4. Check to make sure that the message indicating the completion of the
uninstallation is displayed, and press the [Enter] key.
5. Remove the HR reading option key CD-ROM from the drive of the DX Console.
7. Peel off the cassette insertion operation label attached to the 50 micron upgrade
kit from the machine.
8. Restore the CR-IR359 instruction manual (including parts for options) to the
original set.
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
Control Sheet
Performance Check (PC)

05.31.2013 FM6150
PC-1
CR-IR 359 Performance Check List 2. Connecting the Cables

{IN:5._Connecting the Cables}
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of CR-IR 359 installation - Supply voltage/machine power supply short-circuit check  OK  NG
to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which are based on the Power supply voltage: V (specified value: 100VAC ± 10%)
instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not supposed to replace the Continuity check between E and E:  OK  NG (specified value: with continuity)
installation steps set forth in the CR-IR 359 Service Manual but is to be followed concurrently. Resistance value measured between L and E: Ω (specified value: ∞Ω)
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking the Resistance value measured between N and E: Ω (specified value: ∞Ω)
system connection and output image quality (section 4 or later), and then pass the equipment Resistance value measured between L and N: Ω (specified value: 100KΩ –)
over to the customer.
3. Installing RU Software
{IN:8._Installing RU Software}
Installation Information
- RU IP address:  Default (172.16.1.10)  Modify (__________)
- FTP server IP address:  Default (172.16.1.20)  Modify (__________)
Serial Number: Software Ver.:
- Identification code of the machine (RU):
Site Name: Installed by: - Software Version:
Site Number: Signature: - Backup of set file (machine-specific data)  OK  NG
Room Name: Installation Date/Servicing Date:
4. Image/Conveyance Checks
Checklist
- X-ray exposure information with a dose of ST IP  OK  NG
X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kV Tube current: mA
1. Preparation for Installation
Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber:
{IN:3._Preparation for Installation} Bulb No.:
- Checking the Items Supplied  OK  NG Additional filter: Yes  (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No 
 Machine main body IP size: × IP barcode No.:
 Accessories S value:
Options - X-ray exposure information with a dose of HR IP  OK  NG
 Anti-topple retainer kit Check the following when the HR IP is to be used.
 Supporter X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kV Tube current: mA
 Cassette rack Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber:
 Rack for long cassette Bulb No.:
 Mount (IR 355 CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT #(E)) Additional filter: Yes  (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No 
 Mount (IR CPU FLOOR MOUNT KIT EU E) IP size: × IP barcode No.:
 Arm for LCD monitor S value:
 Retainer for fixing to wall (long type) - Image/Conveyance Checks  OK  NG
 Mobile kit - Image format check: white blank portion, ____ mm max. (specified value: 2 mm max.)
 AC cable for BSI  OK  NG
 AC cable for CEE
 AC cable for USA
 50 micron upgrade kit (Except for USA)
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
CR-IR 359 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
5. IP type checks
- IP type used at the institution  ST-VI  HR-V  HR-VI
6. Summary test  OK  NG
Includes checks for normal bootup and termination.
7. Output films or image data are stored as records for performance check.
 OK  NG
8. Test equipment used for the check

Test equipment: Model: S/N:
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150
PC-3
BLANK PAGE
014-247-01E
05.31.2013 FM6150

Capsula XL 2 - New RU2 - A - 02E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Capsula XL 2 - New RU2 - A - 02E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

To CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual

Image Related Checkpoints Software Related Checkpoints

CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE

Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations

Precautions in Using the Client PC

Precautions in Setting the “Internet Options” Import and Export

Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL

Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the

FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2013-2014 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

Document No. 014-247-02E

1. Handling of This Manual 1.3 About Notation in the Manual

n Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.

n Notation of Unit Symbols CAUTION

4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of

1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

1. Safety Precautions ........................................... Safety-1 4. CLASSIFICATION ........................................... Safety-10

2. Labels ................................................................ Safety-4

1. Specifications of Machine ..................................Spec-1

Machine Description (MD)

1. Machine Overview ..................................................MD-1 2. Descriptions of Software Control .......................MD-14

1.6.4 Light-Collecting Unit .......................................................................... MD-13

4. Descriptions of Scanner Mechanism and

5. Descriptions of Mechanical Components

1. Overview of Troubleshooting................................. MT-1

2. Error Code Table..................................................... MT-7

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

2. Table of Contents ...................................................MC-2 5. Cassette Set Unit ..................................................MC-32

9.11 Rubber Roller (C, D)................................................................. MC-123

10. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations........MC-147

11. List of Jigs and Tools .........................................MC-150

Maintenance Utility (MU)

1.2 RU Operation Panel ..................................................................... MU-1 3.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-12

4.1.2 Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-21 4.10.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-30

4.16 RESTORE .................................................................................MU-47 5. Client PC ...............................................................MU-61

6.13.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-111 6.21.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-128

[5-8-2] S value calculate ............................................................................. MU-178

Service Parts List (SP)

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

3. Checking the Image/Conveyance..........................PM-9 9. Light-Collecting Guide..........................................PM-20

13. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding....PM-22

1. Specifications of Machine .......................................IN-1 6. Final Placement ......................................................IN-23

Appendix 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE 6. Applying the Seal ................................................................Appx IN-43

Appendix 8. Corrective Procedure to be

Performance Check (PC)

CR-IR 359 Performance Check List ............................ PC-1

CR-IR 359 Service Manual

014-247-02E CR-IR 359 Service Manual

1. Safety Precautions n Optical Parts

n Power Supply n Other Working Precautions

l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance

l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure

1.5.2 Precautions in Preventing the Supporter from Toppling

2.1 Laser Precaution Labels

2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations

n HHS Certification and Identification Label

n Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly Use Period) Label

3. Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure 4. CLASSIFICATION